The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutTERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA/PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS/20103'.SEP- /D 7- SEP- /-0 .�/^ SEP-/fl Q�'Y�l �QGI^2G�hOzt Ar2,-4 �DlD f I op '�" C&A ;or'S� Pv-T r,-] torch ::,-F Con,4rraci-. i�so�k- �•'�oY� is - 388 Se/I9 � �kn�il;e �esLrinyf an Se�-`iew.bcH -2olo o/n -p10.nS /n Sfo cc� l ncti l rons� corns o -1r, COrt -Fra� t E<4; MA&- e cst CoS% -1 O 1 11 f rh ) br hS��- 't'rO� J 2 eYY'y ✓t.�•Q COC� �rtd c'irec --kv`j C %f �/tyin�a✓ 4o �tac.e swJ Plans an -�ov^ T�u-,L I;c �nSpPc� ion. "CSp �I.CTt T1+.. lD-'9 -rr QPI.V vvrrr�9 ,p /�a Yes, SPtCG^++Cri�+ORS Zr`rr. bC COrt�rR�{ EII eS�rrr.1� Df Co3{ - vv- 4,6 1 COYtS l ��A� v F l^2Yr7! ke �loOc( �I4C✓'¢ /roh •ta- _ L JJAs211 �r'D`J.e�{, eS-CA, (;Sk+Y,,d krncwLicl mot- b� Seckr��y iv 4ccomp Pl- �cL� -. ClireG/Trr�q UC��y R.d�vev+�:sernerl�1 -FoN cls F - i:X;n9 -h " ".ee wu1/ TDlgc-e -ct)V Yecep -lr4 A14; cQ c;- �w 1; e i+2ar+„lq — roof -) ��c l; c.L� -; �r•� Rest> .4:oi, cewcw ,,r CaR-%ra,'f � Q.w�i.vr;z�,,5 Ae �arlyh ztp /� O � I (� 1 CJ l (.e /L' 'Av �� a, COa-I rA.c� for CanSy-r -(:op — o�- �.�. erry �rue�lr�x� �ecr'Pa'h;�.� 1]reA�i'�ta5jc %�wo T�ro�e„ZeYt�s Y OJ &C4 'VJT +GF +o +.J +OaC2S — rr��I 04 rCL-.0"- (�hasQ 2- o7otD )D-Mc-- /U Foam 4 Qgrc2rn�� j ertormr�nct --£ - Ta[� -mzn� �n 3 -49, L- Jd. n�45o)tti- tip, -� /a- /a 5(�10.cc2�;nQ '� It uJOrI( .-ter �ry�g r� �rwie t�)Oc�� 1'jer Y'Q�,'i'�t7� Arec, 1" 11AS� al Tm�rove.tn.- erg's PraJ�e /ti-. i CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA September 2, 2010 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 21st day of September, 2010, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK M1� O d cn („ NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 2 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 21 st day of September, 2010, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK u� cn E rr: -' yi P N ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 Rubber Composite Shingle 1 LS $27,000.00. OPINION OF PROBABLE CONSTRUCTION COST $27 ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA Bio- retention Cell 1 LS $80,500.00 $80 $80 PHASE21MPROVEMENTS $107, PROJECT TOTAL IOWA CITY, IOWA SEPTEMBER 2, 2010 Phase 2 improvements include the north I - access drive with cul-de-sac parking, boat ramp parking area, boat ramp and the marina facility with associates walkways. ITEM DESCRIPTION CITY UNIT UNIT PRICE EXTENSION BASE BID 1 .Mobilization 1 LS $98,000.00 $98,000.0 2 Site Demolition 1 LS $27,500.00 $27,500.0 3 Clearing and Grubbing 1 LS $4,500.00 $4,500.0 4 ,Debris Removal 10 '.. EA $250.00. $2,500.0 5 :Earthwork 1LS $81,930.00. $81,930.0 6 Erosion Control 1 LS $7,500.00 $7,500.0 7 'Storm Sewer 1 LS $95,000.00. $95,000.0 8 Water Service '.. 1 LS $32,000.00. $32,000.0 9 ISanitary Sewer Service 1 ! LS $21,000.00: $21,000.0 10. Electrical Service 1 LS : $10,000.00, $10,000.0 11 Pavement, 7" Depth PCC 8,550 SY $40.00 $342,000.0 12 .Pavement, 6" Depth PCC 16,750: SF $4.50.. $75,375.0 13 iLimestone Retaining Wall 1 LS $8,800.00:. $8,800.0 14 !Marina Building 1 LS $244,000.00'. $244,000.0 15 ;Open Shelter 1 LS '.. $30,000.00. $30,000.0 16 :'Plantings 1 LS $10,000.00, $10,000.0 17 ;Seeding 1 LS $32,000.00. $32,000.0 BASE BID TOTAL $1,122,105.00 ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 Rubber Composite Shingle 1 LS $27,000.00. $27 $27 ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 Bio- retention Cell 1 LS $80,500.00 $80 $80 ADD ALTERNATES TOTAL $107, PROJECT TOTAL J:\2010_projects \110 .0630 \Engineering \CostOpinions \Cost Est Bid Items 9- 2- 10.x1s vE fit .. 2010 SEP -2 Pit I,: 37 101'1!,!1 CI T `i', 10';'; Project Manual Terry Trueblood Recreation Area -- Phase 2 Improvements Iowa City, Iowa September 2, 2010 Project No. 110.0630.01 Prepared by: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Ankeny, Iowa 50023 319- 362 -9394 Architects Schipper Kastner 3716 Ingersoll Ave. Suite A Des Moines, IA 50312 515 - 277 -6707 Farris Engineering 10636 Justin Drive Des Moines, IA 50322 515 - 331 -0981 Shuck Britson, Inc. 2409 Grand Avenue Des Moines, IA 50312 515- 243 -4477 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 COVER Iowa City, Iowa I hereby certify that this Engineering Document was prepared by QPO SSsi000 N under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engin er under the Laws of the State of Iowa. CHAD D, DEVORE Chad D De� , P.E. Date License Number 16007 16007 My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2011 'i 'f1 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission deb ribed ZE OF �� below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Landscape 'F DONALD P, Architect under the Laws of the State of Iowa. MARNER r. �� ' '6h0 o LANDSCAPE ti rn ARCHITECT No, Donald P. Marner, ASLA Date �!o 314 (ANOSCpe ' License Number 314 a `7 C- tap) 02`j JU License Expires: June 30, 2012 . ♦♦ ♦ ♦ ♦t� Timothy J. 0a ��y+= _ ; Monson ; ` iJ♦ •♦♦ 12103 ♦ ♦0(( /'iii ♦ ♦ ♦�M�rr ♦• TQ\; I hereby certify that this Engineering Document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer urAder trA /f_aVs of the State of Iowa. mothy /JPbtbnson, P.E. Date License-Number 12103 My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2010 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: ChSa5t[sVS Std $ 6, Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 1 SIGNATURES Iowa City, Iowa I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE PORTION OF THIS TECHNICAL SUBMISSION DESCRIBED BELOW WAS r" _ ., _ PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION O`•"Q�� ,•,•,•o /A�,'�i,, `� - ANd THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITEQrUNDER moo@ '•,t J {'�,, I THELAWSOFT T STATE 10 A. /] 't MICHAE01 -1 2 , Z MICHAELJ. KASTNER,AIA DATE =N ; KASTNER s—f -0. 5348 ; me DISCIPLINE: ARCHITECTURE ' +�„� �••,,e,a,•,•,,�. yQ�� IOWA REGISTRATION NO.: 5346 1�0iW�P,a *�,`,` SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL; I U tri'9p " I O Q�oF ESS10Hq�.. ,.may GERRY W. WILWERDING ' m 16743 ; c � ,0.�• °0 •'w ° °p `gyp. •* JUSTIN B. OLSON 19500 10 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. „!( // 7 I I , I Gerry My license renewal date is December 31, 20 r Pages or sheets covered by this seal; 2— date I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Justin B. Olson 19500 My license renewal date is December 31, ----- 0 Pages or sheets co NOV, Z � by this seal: t z11 dale Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 2 SIGNATURES Iowa City, Iowa SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE SHEET � TABLE 0FCONTENTS N[}TICET(}R0DF�RS..--..--.—.........—.------.....^.... //}�� /\F�2 NOTET(} BIDDERS .......... ....... ............................................................................ � NB-1 FORM{)F PROPOSAL .................. ..... . .......................... .................................. FP-3 � BID BOND ............................................................................................................... BB-1 � FORM {)FAGREEMENT. ................................. ... ..... ....................................... ' /\G-2 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ....................................... � .......... ........... PR-2 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANT|^DISCRIMI NATION REQUIREMENTS) ................................................... [3C-7 � GENERAL CONDITIONS .......................................................................... ............. G[-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ......................................................................... SC-15 � TECHNICAL SECTION � � DIVISION 1' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS � Section 01O25 Measurement and Payment ................................................ 01025'5 / Section 0131O Progress and Schedules ........................ ............................ 01310'2 Section 0157O Traffic Control and Construction Facilities ...... .................... 01570'2 DIVISION 2^ SITE WORK Section 02050 Demolitions, Removals and Abandonments ........................ 02050'3 Section 02100 Site Preparation .................. ........... ............... .................. 02100'2 Section 02118Clearing and Grubbing ........................................................ 07110'3 � Section 02220 Earth Excavation, B@CkfilL Fill and Grading ......................... 02220'5 | Section O2270 Slope Protection and Erosion Control ......................... ...... 02270'3 Section 02310 Bio^ReteDtiOD Swale ................. ............ ............. ........ ...... 02310'7 Section 02570 Portland Cement Concrete Paving ...................................... 02520'3 � Section 02524Curb R@nlpS—.--.......................—...... 02524^2 Section 02660 Water Distribution ...... ............................. ........................... 07660-17 i Section 02885Water Service Work for Contractors ... ............ .................. 02665'6 � Section 027OO Sewers ........................ .......... '............................................ 02700'12 Section 02710 Grinder Pump Station ....... — ............. ................................ 02710-2 Section 02751 Directional Boring and Drilling...................— 02751-5 � Section 02900 Landscaping ...—.......................—.-- 02000'5 DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories ..... ............................... 03100 -3 Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement ................... ............................... 03200 -2 Section 03300 Cast -In Place Concrete .................... ............................... 03300 -8 Section 03390 Concrete Curing and Sealing ............ ............................... 03390 -2 DIVISION 4 — MASONRY Section 04720 Cast Stone ........................................ ............................... 04720 -4 Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies ................. ............................... 04810 -7 Section 04852 Stone Masonry Veneer .................... ............................... 04852 -4 DIVISION 5 — METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel ................................. ............................... 05120 -7 Section 05500 Metal Fabrications ............................ ............................... 05500 -3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry .............................. ............................... 06100 -5 Section 06130 Heavy Timber Construction .............. ............................... 06130 -6 Section 06150 Wood Decking .................................. ............................... 06150 -3 Section 06181 Glued- Laminated Structural Units ..... ............................... 06181 -2 Section 06410 Custom Cabinets .............................. ............................... 06410 -4 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07311 Shingles ........................................... ............................... 07311 -6 Section 07461 Wood Siding .................................... ............................... 07461 -3 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ......... ............................... 07620 -3 Section 07900 Caulking and Sealing ....................... ............................... 07900 -4 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS `Section 08100 Hollow Metal Work ............................ ............................... 08100 -4 08334 Coiling Counter Doors ...................... ............................... 08334 -2 Xection ection 08410 Aluminum Storefront ......................... ............................... 08410 -5 $,ection 08520 Aluminum Sliding Service Windows .. ............................... 08520 -2 S ,&ction 08710 Door Hardware ................................. ............................... 08710 -7 Section 08850 Glazing ............................................ ............................... 08850 -4 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09900 Paints and Coatings ........................ ............................... 09900 -8 Section 09960 High- Performance Coatings ............ ............................... 09960 -3 DIVISION 10 —SPECIALTIES Section 10180 Toilet Accessories ............................ ............................... 10180 -3 Section 10400 Identification Devices ....................... ............................... 10400 -2 Section 10523 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets ................ ............................... 10523 -2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical ............................. ............................... 16010 -7 ' . ....:....... .......'........... Section 15000 General Provisions .......................... 15000 -6 Section 15010 Shop Drawings ................................. ............................... 15010 -2 Section 15050 Basic Plumbing Materials and NAthbds..- :.;; ..... ........ . ... 15050 -20 Section 15251 Plumbing Insulation .......................... ............................... 15251-5 Section 15400 Plumbing Piping and Equipment .,....i , .......:........... ............ 15400 -12 Section 15410 Plumbing Fixtures .... ...6 ....... 6 ....... l:i:,:.`.. - .i.Li;..;,; .:........... 15410 -5 Section 15838 Power Ventilators ............................. .6............................. 15838 -3 Section 15890 Air Distribution ... ............................... .6...6....6.................... 15890 -7 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical ............................. ............................... 16010 -7 Section 16110 Raceways ......................................... ............................... 16110 -7 Section 16120 Wires and Cables ............................. ............................... 16120 -4 Section 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings ............. ............................... 16135 -3 Section 16143 Wiring Devices ................................. ............................... 16143 -4 Section 16190 Supporting Devices .......................... ............................... 16190 -4 Section 16195 Electrical Identification ...................... ............................... 16195 -4 Section 16420 Service Entrance .............................. ............................... 16420 -2 Section 16452 Grounding ......................................... ............................... 16452 -21 Section 16470 Panelboards ..................................... ............................... 16470 -3 Section 16477 Fuses ............................................... ............................... 16477 -2 Section 16510 Lighting Fixtures ............................... ............................... 16510 -3 Section 16950 Occupancy Sensors ............................. ............................... 16950 -4 APPENDICES Appendix A Geotechnical Engineering Report Appendix B NPDES Contractual Requirements NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE2IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the C1 of Iowa City, Iowa, until 10:00 A.M. on the 21a day of October, 2010. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 26" day of October, 2010, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: Base Bid: Construction of the park improvements to include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, boat ramp, trails, marina building with restrooms, park shelter, prairie seeding, surface restoration, and associated work. Add Alternate No. 1: The additional cost for installing rubber composite shingles for the marina building and open park shelter and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for the construction of a bio- retention cell and associated work. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award AF -1 9 AF -2 of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: November 1, 2010 Specified Completion Date: October 31, 2011 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., Cedar Rapids, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242 -4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239- 1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shall include the type of work and _r approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. - -Q .c-1 By virtue of statutory authority, preference must -° w be given to products and provisions grown and ty o ° coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to N Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully re- quired under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and Irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK AF -2 NOTE TO BIDDERS 1. The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal RM. c: RM. FORM OF PROPOSAL TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF IOWA CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder Address of Bidder TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 E. Washington St. Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ in accordance with the terms set forth in the "ProjectSpecifka'tionsr '; a The undersigned bidder, having examined and determined the scope of the contract' Documents, hereby proposes to provide the required labor, services, materials and equipment and to perform the Project as described in the Contract Documents, including Addenda and , and to do all work at the prices set forth herein. We further propose to do all "Extra Work" which may be required to complete the work contemplated, at unit prices or lump sums to be agreed upon in writing prior to starting such work. FP -1 ESTIMATED UNIT EXTENDED ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 1. Mobilization LS 1 $ $ 2. Site Demolition LS 1 $ $ 3. Clearing and Grubbing LS 1 $ $ 4. Debris Removal EA 10 $ $ 5. Earthwork LS 1 $ $ 6. Erosion Control LS 1 $ $ 7. Storm Sewer LS 1 $ $ 8. Water Service LS 1 $ $ 9. Sanitary Sewer Service LS 1 $ $ FP -1 BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 1. Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ $ ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 2. Bio- retention Cell LS 1 $ $ c� ESTIMATED UNIT EXTENDED ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 10. Electrical Service LS 1 $ $ 11. 7" Depth PCC Pavement SY 8,550 $ $ 12. 6" Depth PCC Pavement SF 16,750 $ $ 13. Limestone Retaining Wall LS 1 $ $ 14. Marina Building LS 1 $ $ 15. Open Shelter LS 1 $ $ 16. Plantings LS 1 $ $ 17. Seeding LS 1 $ $ BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 1. Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ $ ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 2. Bio- retention Cell LS 1 $ $ FP -2 c� d ! s CD a N Co FP -2 The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: i Phone: Contact: FP -3 , as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated for Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contrfiet in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal'§ faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, ` ' then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this day of A.D., 20_ (Seal) Witness Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By Witness (Attorney -in -fact) Attach Power -of- Attorney M FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ( "City "), and ( "Contractor "). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the day of , 20_, for the Project ('Project "), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers b. "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, Iowa Department of Transportation, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders, g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non - Resident Bidding on Non - Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements); j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. DATED this day of 20_ City Mayor ATTEST: City Clerk AG -2 Contractor (Title) ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office l � 1 J -r ,J �P• � U G 0 AG -2 Contractor (Title) ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars (g ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns; jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of entered intS ia , (date) written Agreement with Owner for Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by _, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient la funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price, as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and /or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of () years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. 20 SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF IN THE PRESENCE OF: (Principal) Witness (Title) (Surety) t._ a. ^ Witness (Title) CO .t .v } "O (Street) ;.. -. o 0 r (City, State, Zip) (Phone) RMA C C) [N , �( -�: C, T mo m CITY OF IOWA CITY to C� C C) [N , �( -�: C, T mo m CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors -bbide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2 -3 -1. rs 3 C CC -1 SECTION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et sec.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. ,The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining.the necessary posters. co v ,rrc CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? r 'A The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature i Print Name Phone Number Title Date CC -3 SECTION III - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer". (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word -of -mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. t... (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for ?" Only use c•i job- related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job c ' related: Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal c.,interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) ;Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non - biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and /or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage all qualified employees to bid on them. CC -4 r � 1 City or Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 —1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC -5 2 -3.1 CHAPTER 3 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES 2 -3 -1 SECTION: C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- 2-3.1: Employment; Exceptions tion or the employees or members 2 -3 -2: Public Accommodation; thereof- to directly or Indirectly adver- Exceptlons tise or In any other manner Indicate or 2 -3 -3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions publicize that Individuals are unwel- 2-3-4: Education come, objectionable or not- solicited 2 -3 -5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; for employment or membership be- Intimidation cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95 -3697, 11 -7 -1995) 2 -3 -1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: D. Employment policies relating to preg- A. It shall be unlawful for any employer nancy and childbirth shall be governed to refuse to hire, accept, register, by the following: classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in 1. A written or unwritten employment employment against any other person policy or practice which excludes from or to discharge any employee be- employment applicants or employees cause of age, color, creed, disability, because of the employee's pregnancy gender Identity, marital status, nation- is a prima facie violation of this Title. al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- riage, childbirth and recovery there - nizatlon to refuse to admit to member- from are, for all Job - related purposes, ship, apprenticeship or training an temporary disabilities and shall be applicant, to expel any member, or to treated as such under any health or otherwise discriminate against any temporary disability Insurance or sick applicant for membership, apprentice- leave plan available In connection with ship or training or any member In the employment or any written or unwrit- privileges, rights or benefits of such ten employment policies and practices membership, apprenticeship or train- involving terms and conditions of ing because of age, color, creed, employment as applied to other tem- disability, gender identity, marital porary disabilities. status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- E. It shall be unlawful for any person to plicant or member. solicit or require as a condition of -. employment of any employee or pro - F co Q S2 897 N :OWO CllY CC -6 2 -3 -1 spective employee a test for the pres- ence of the antibody to'fiz human immunodeficiency virus. An agree- ment between an employer, employ- ment agency, labor organization or their employees, agents or members and an employee or prospective em- ployee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or pro- spective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human Immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the State epidemiologist determines and the Director of Public Health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- ment of Health and Human Services, that a person with a condition related to acquired Immune deficiency syn- drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunode- ficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. F. The following are exempted from the provisions of this Section: 1. Any bona fide religious institution or its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to any qualifications for employment based on religion when such qualifica- tions are related to a bona fide reli- gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an administrative officer, serving in a supervisory capacity of a bona fide religious educational facility or reli- gious Institution shall be presumed to be a bona fide occupational qualifica- tion. (Ord. 94 -3647, 11 -8 -1994) 897 Iowa City CC -7 2 -3 -1 2. An employer or employment agency which chooses to offer employment or advertise for employment to only the disabled or elderly. Any such employ - ment or offer of employment shall not discriminate among the disabled or elderly on the basis of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, mari- tal status, national origin, race, reli- gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95 -3697, 11 -7 -1995) 3. The employment of individuals for work within the home of the employer if the employer or members of the family reside therein during such em- ployment. 4. The employment of Individuals to render personal service to the person of the employer or members of the employer's family. 5. To employ on the basis of sex in those certain instances where sex is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- rowly. 6. A State or Federal program de- signed to benefit a specific age classi- fication which serves a bona fide pub- lic purpose. 7. To employ on the basis of disability in those certain Instances where pres- ence of disability is a bona fide occu- pational qualification reasonably nec- essary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be Interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94 -3647, 11 -8 -1994) GENERAL CONDITIONS Division 11, General Requirements and Covenants of the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2009,, as amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. GC -1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLES WITHIN THIS SECTION u S -1 Definitions S -2 Limitations of Operations S -3 Insurance S -4 Supervision and Superintendence S -5 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others S -6 Compliance with OSHA Regulations S -7 Employment Practices S -8 Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements) S -9 Measurement and Payment S -10 Taxes S -11 Construction Stakes S -12 Restriction on Non - Resident Bidding on Non - Federal -Aid Projects Caption and Introductory Statements These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement Division 11 of the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, as amended and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. S -1 DEFINITIONS. ADD to or CHANGE the following definitions within 1101.03 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. "ENGINEER" shall mean the Director of Public Works for the City of Iowa City, Iowa or his authorized representative. "OWNER" and "CITY" shall mean the City of Iowa City, Iowa acting through the City Council and duly authorized agents. "CONTRACTING AUTHORITY," "DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION," or "COUNTY' shall mean the CITY. "IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS" shall mean the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, as amended. S -2 LIMITATIONS OF OPERATIONS. Add the following paragraph to 1108.03 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the ENGINEER. SC -1 S -3 INSURANCE. A. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE: CANCELLATION OR MODIFICATION 1. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the City for approval a Certificate of Insurance, meeting the requirements specified herein, to be in effect for the full contract period. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. 2. The Contractor shall notify the City in writing at least thirty (30) calendar days prior to any change or cancellation of said policy or policies. 3. Cancellation or modification of said policy or policies shall be considered just cause for the City of Iowa City to immediately cancel the contract and /or to halt work on the contract, and to withhold payment for any work performed on the contract. B. MINIMUM COVERAGE Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his /her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: Type of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence Aggregate Bodily Injury & Property Damage* $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Automobile Liability Combined Single Limit Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 Excess Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Workers Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. *Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage when determined by City to be applicable. The City requires that the Contractors Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. SC -2 c, J _ l 4i.} ll SC -2 In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 1. The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits,; identified in the policy and on the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the poliey, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liagl6 ?gr-4or which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction by virtue of investiga ion or d'e'fense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. r 2. The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coveragefimits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self- insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self- insured retention. 3. If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 4. The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims- made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: a. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. b. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. d. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self- insured retention than the insurance which it replaces. 5. The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and pursue any and all remedies available to the City. SC -3 6. In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses reduce the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance below the limits required hereunder, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 7. In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. C. HOLD HARMLESS The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City of Iowa City and its officers, employees, and agents from any and all liability, loss, cost, damage, and expense (including reasonable attorney's fees and court costs) resulting from, arising out of, or incurred by reason of any claims, actions, or suits based upon or alleging bodily injury, including death, or property damage rising out of or resulting from the Contractor's operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or herself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. 2. = Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of '")lowaiCity, Iowa. 5- 4'SUPERVI §(ON AND SUPERINTENDENCE. a c� — Aeid the �lowing,paragraph to 1105.05 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: CONTRACT'OR shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER the phone number and /or paging service of this individual. S -5 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS. Add the following paragraph to 1108.01 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Bidders shall list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes /intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required for approval by the City and as noted on the Form of Proposal and the Agreement. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. S -6 COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS. Add the following paragraphs to 1107.01 of the [DOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: The Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910 SC -4 (General Industry Standard) and 29 CFR 1926 (Construction Industry Standard). The Contractor and all subcontractors are solely responsible for compliance with said regulations. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals', p or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to t r the Project Engineering prior to the start of construction and supplemented as nec, ssgry B? throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does' � . not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and Stater. laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to- know. S -7 EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES. Neither the Contractor nor his /her subcontractors, shall employ any person whose physical or mental condition is such that his /her employment will endanger the health and safety of them- selves or others employed on the project. Contractor shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to include the following clauses in any subcontracts: To discriminate against any individual in terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. To discharge from employment or refuse to hire any individual because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age, or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. S -8 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI- DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS). For all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. S -9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Section 01025, Measurement and Payment, contained in Division 1 of these specifications defines all pay items and methods of measurement. The provisions of this section will supersede applicable sections in the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. S -10 TAXES. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. S -11 CONSTRUCTION STAKES. Replace the last paragraph of 1105.06 of the ]DOT Standard Specifications with the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction staking for the project. SC -5 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• 1.02 1.03 A. Procedures and submittal requirements for schedule of values, applications for payment, and unit prices. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENTS: A. Work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer. Payment will be based on the actual quantity of work performed according to the various classes of work specified unless noted in Part 3 of this Section. The Contractor will be given an opportunity to be present during measurement. SCOPE OF PAYMENT: A. The Contractor shall accept the compensation as herein provided as full payment for furnishing materials, labor, tools and equipment and for performing work under the contract; also, for costs arising from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the execution of the work and up to the time of acceptance. B. Construction items may be bid as a lump sum or as itemized work, which will be paid on a unit cost basis. In either case, some work may be required for which a separate pay item is not provided. Completion of this work is required. If a separate pay item is not provided for this work, it is to be considered incidental to the project and no separate payment will be made. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 NONE PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURE: A. Payment under this contract shall occur no more than once per month for work completed by the Contractor. Payment is based on an estimate of the total amount and value of work completed minus 5% retainage. It is not the City's policy to pay for materials and equipment stored or furnishings fabricated off site. The 5% retainage will be released 31 days after the project is accepted by the City Council, provided no claims against the project have been filed within 30 days of project acceptance. Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa will govern the release of retainage and resolution of claims. 01025 -1 C� • e A. Procedures and submittal requirements for schedule of values, applications for payment, and unit prices. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENTS: A. Work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer. Payment will be based on the actual quantity of work performed according to the various classes of work specified unless noted in Part 3 of this Section. The Contractor will be given an opportunity to be present during measurement. SCOPE OF PAYMENT: A. The Contractor shall accept the compensation as herein provided as full payment for furnishing materials, labor, tools and equipment and for performing work under the contract; also, for costs arising from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the execution of the work and up to the time of acceptance. B. Construction items may be bid as a lump sum or as itemized work, which will be paid on a unit cost basis. In either case, some work may be required for which a separate pay item is not provided. Completion of this work is required. If a separate pay item is not provided for this work, it is to be considered incidental to the project and no separate payment will be made. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 NONE PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURE: A. Payment under this contract shall occur no more than once per month for work completed by the Contractor. Payment is based on an estimate of the total amount and value of work completed minus 5% retainage. It is not the City's policy to pay for materials and equipment stored or furnishings fabricated off site. The 5% retainage will be released 31 days after the project is accepted by the City Council, provided no claims against the project have been filed within 30 days of project acceptance. Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa will govern the release of retainage and resolution of claims. 01025 -1 3.02 BID ITEMS: A. GENERAL The following subsections describe the measurement of and payment for the work to be done under the items listed in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. Each unit or lump sum price stated shall constitute full payment as herein specified for each item of work completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, including clean up. It is the Contractor's responsibility to identify the locations of public and private utilities. No additional compensation will be made for any interference or delay caused by the placement and/or relocation of said utilities. No additional compensation will be made for repair costs to fix damage caused by the Contractor or his/her Subcontractors. Work associated with existing items on private and/or public property that are to be protected, removed, relocated, replaced, reinstalled or modified is considered incidental unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. Existing items damaged or unsuitable for relocation or reinstallation will be replaced with like item and painted, if necessary, at the Contractor's expense. All trees and shrubs shall remain and be protected from damage unless specifically noted as "REMOVE" or "CLEAR AND GRUB" on the project plans and as otherwise directed by the Engineer. The prices for those items which may have any impact on existing trees and shrubs shall include compensation for special precautionary measures required to prevent u', `_injury or damage to said tree, shrub or root system. " -_ ','The prices for those items which involve grading or excavation shall include compensation 9, C,-) CPr top soil removal and replacement (unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF i— ,&OPOSAL), disposal of surplus excavated material, handling water, installation of all N 5:> necessary sheeting, bracing and temporary fencing around all open excavations and supply, !�acement and compaction of specified backfill. N The prices for those items which involve surface removal adjacent to buildings or vaults shall include compensation to protect exposed surfaces from water which may leak or seep into vaults and/or basements. All labor, materials and equipment required to bring surfaces to the proper elevation and density including loading, hauling, and disposal of unsuitable material, below grade excavation, borrow and hauling, placing, forming, drying, watering and compaction of fill material, and all such work as may be required to make the grading work complete with a uniform surface free of rock, broken concrete, tree roots, limbs and other debris is incidental to this project unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. The Contractor must pay for all parking permit fees, meter hoods, lot and ramp fees, and parking tickets. The Contractor must figure these costs into their bid prices. The City will not waive parking fees or fines. Permits paid for by the Contractor will be issued only for construction vehicles, not personal vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for continuous cleaning of mud and debris off adjacent driveways, streets, sidewalks and private property, when mud and debris is deposited there as a result of any construction activity. The cost of clean up shall be incidental. 01025 -2 B. BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS <<% 1. Bid Item No. 1: Mobilization (LS): Lump sum price shall include preparatoiy work and operation for all items under the contract, including, but'hot limited�W, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies.; Also includes construction staking, traffic control, construction fence and other incidegtal items to the project. Payment shall be made upon percent complete on the project. 2. Bid Item 2: Site Demolition (LS): Lump sum price includes sawcutting, removing, loading, transporting and disposing of existing site improvements to be removed including pavements, gravel, and miscellaneous site items. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted site demolition. 3. Bid Item No. 3: Clearing and Grubbing (LS): Lump sum price includes all work required to cut, remove and dispose of trees, stumps, roots, logs, down timber, hedges, brush, shrubs and vegetation within the grading limits of the proposed improvements. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in -place and accepted clearing and grubbing. 4. Bid Item No. 4: Debris Removal (EA): Unit price includes digging, removing, loading, transporting, and properly disposing of the broken concrete, boulders, rebar and unwanted materials located within the project construction area. Each unit is defined as a full truckload based upon a 10 cubic yard (CY) truck. The unit price will be adjusted as necessary for the actual truck used for debris removal. Measurement for payment based on the number of full truckloads hauled off -site and properly disposed. Contractor to assume for bid purposes, 10 full truck loads. 5. Bid Item 5: Earthwork (LS): Lump Sum price includes securing topsoil, loading, transporting, placing, compacting, testing, and finish grading topsoil; and associated work as noted on plans. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted earthwork. 6. Bid Item 6: Erosion Control (LS): Lump sum price includes furnishing and placement of all temporary products and control such as filter socks, silt fence, rip rap, erosion matting RECP, etc., and maintaining the SWPPP as construction progresses to meet the administrative provisions set forth in the NPDES permit including weekly inspections and record keeping. Includes placing silt fence around excess soil site in park. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted erosion control. 7. Bid Item No. 7: Storm Sewer (LS): Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and labor required to install complete and operational storm sewer improvements as indicated on plans. Includes all storm sewer structures, pipe, flared end sections, footings, apron guards, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon percentage complete of in -place and accepted storm sewer system. 8. Bid Item 8: Water Service (LS): Lump sum price includes all material, equipment, tools, excavation and backfill, boring, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational water service as shown on the plans. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted water service components. 01025 -3 9. Bid Item 9: Sanitary Sewer Service (LS): Lump sum price includes all material, equipment, tools, excavation and backfill, boring, casing, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational sanitary sewer service as shown on the plans. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted sanitary sewer service components. 9, Bid Item 10: Electrical Service (LS): Lump sum price includes all equipment, tools, excavation and backfill, boring, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational electrical service to all components of the project. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted electrical service components. 10. Bid Item 11: 7" Depth PCC Pavement (SY): Unit price includes subgrade preparation per geotechnical report, over excavation, forming, furnishing and placing concrete of specified type, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints and associated work. Including all associated elements of the boat ramp. Measurement for payment based on square yard of pavement constructed and measured in the field. 11. Bid Item 12: 6" Depth PCC Pavement (SF): Unit price includes subgrade preparation per geotechnical report, over excavation, forming, furnishing and placing concrete of specified type, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints and associated work. Measurement for payment based on square foot of pavement constructed and measured in the field. C" Bid Item 13: Limestone Retaining Wall (LS): Lump sum price includes excavating, ,t2; c° sheeting and shoring, compacting subgrade and backfill, granular base, subdrain, granular backfill with fabric, geotextiles, stainless steel pins, grouting, labor and M C :)," materials for the construction of the limestone retaining wall. Measurement for oi payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted limestone y" rN retaining wall. 7'°? a C -D N 13. Bid Item 14: Marina Building (LS): Lump sum price includes excavating, temporary sheeting and shoring, compacting subgrade and backfill, forming, concrete slab, structural concrete materials, reinforcing steel and placement, stone veneer, precast bases, caps and accessories, mortar, decorative steel components & connectors, powder- coating, electrical work, labor and materials for the construction of the marina building. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in- place and accepted marina building. 14. Bid Item 15: Open Shelter (LS): Lump sum price includes excavating, temporary sheeting and shoring, compacting subgrade and backfill, forming, concrete slab, structural concrete materials, reinforcing steel and placement, stone veneer, precast bases, caps and accessories, mortar, decorative steel components & connectors, powder- coating, labor and materials for the construction of the shelter. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted shelter. 15. Bid Item 16: Plantings (LS): Lump sum price includes the installation of all plant material including trees, shrubs, and perennials as shown on the plans. Also includes transportation, utility locates, planting bed preparation including soil amendments, tilling, excavation, placement, watering, mulching, warranty, and associated work. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in -place and accepted plantings. 01025 -4 16. Bid Item No. 17: Seeding (LS): Lump sum price includes furnishing and installing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for seedbed preparation, installation, and placement of seed as indicated on the construction plans and all areas disturbed by construction. This work includes all seed type mixes. Measurement and payment based upon percentage complete of in -place and accepted seeding operations. 17. Add Alternate No 1 • Rubber Composite Shingles (LS): Lump sum price includes providing and installing ribber composite shingles on the marina building and open shelter in lieu of the asphalt shingles as specified on the plans. Measurement and payment based upon percent complete of in -place and accepted rubber composite shingles. 18. Add Alternate No. 2: Bio- retention Cell (LS): Lump sum price includes grading, securing, loading, transporting, mixing, placing porous organic backfill in excavated areas as specified. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for. Includes providing and installing plants shown on plan, tiling, watering, mulching, and associated work. Includes all materials, labor, and equipment required for the complete functioning bio- retention cell system. Measurement and payment based upon percent complete of in- place and accepted bio- retention cell system. 01025 -5 c 01025 -5 SECTION 01310 ,<:> PROGRESS AND SCHEDULES �'� �, �J!, _ PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY. A. Prepare, submit and update as necessary a schedule of the work. B. Time is of the essence. Minimizing inconvenience, disruption and duration of disruption to residences and businesses is a high priority. Scheduling of work shall be planned with this in mind. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. The Contractor shall submit prior to the Pre-Construction meeting a detailed schedule of the proposed work with the controlling operation identified. The schedule shall include proposed dates and durations of street closings. Work may not begin until the schedule is approved by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall submit updated construction schedules at two week intervals throughout the project. PART 2- PRODUCTS None. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MEETINGS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION: A. A Pre - Construction meeting will be held prior to beginning work. 3.02 PROGRESS OF WORK. A. The specified start date is November 1, 2010. Liquidated damages of $500 per day will be charged on working days beyond October 31, 2011. B. No work shall be done between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. without the approval of the Engineer, with the exception of saw cutting freshly poured concrete. C. Work will proceed in a well organized and continuous mamter to minimize the disruption to the general public (both pedestrian and vehicular) and the local businesses and residents. Access to businesses and residences shall be maintained at all times. D. Contractor shall submit a construction phasing plan for Owner review prior to proceeding with work. 01310 -1 E. The Contractor will become an active partner with the City in communicating with and providing information to concerned residents and businesses. F. Work is to be staged to minimize the length of time parking spaces and parking revenue are lost. 3.03 COORDINATION WITH UTILITY 0JVNERS. A. The Contractor shall work closely with the utility companies for proposed improvements and schedules. 3.04 PUBLICSTREET.• A. Notify the Engineer four days in advance of any work activities associated with McCollister Blvd. Contractor shall provide traffic control as required for work within the right -of -way. McCollister Blvd. shall remain open at all times. 11 /00 sharc&ngincer�spccs.i W 1310Am J c� Cn C7 0 N 01310 -2 SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Fumish, install and maintain traffic control and construction facilities iequir`gd_for, the work. Remove when work is completed. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. IDOT Standard Specifications. B. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways," 1988 Edition, as revised. C. Traffic Control Notes on project plans. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit a traffic control plan for all activities requiring traffic control not specifically addressed by the project plans. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Traffic control devices may be new or used, but must meet the requirements of the IDOT Standard Specifications. B. All construction fence shall be new and securely fastened to approved posts and installed as directed by the Engineer. 2.02 EQUIPMENT. A. Portable generators may not be used to power traffic control devices within 300 feet of residential dwellings, including apartments, between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 11. General Requirements and Covenants. Section 1107.09. Barricades and Warning Signs. 01570 -1 Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2528. Traffic Control. 3.02 NO PARKING SIGNS: A. The City will furnish "NO PARKING" signs to facilitate removal of parked vehicles ahead of scheduled work. The Contractor is responsible for installation and maintenance of the signs 48 hours in advance of when the vehicles must be removed. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF FACILITIES: A. The Contractor shall monitor the condition of traffic control and construction facilities at all times, including non -work hours. Repair, replace and maintain as necessary. B. Pedestrian access to homes and businesses shall be maintained at all times. Temporary gravel surfaces shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. 3.04 EXCAVATIONS: A. All excavations shall be fenced. 3.05 ADDITIONAL FACILITIES: A. All signs, barricades and fences within and beyond the project area deemed appropriate by -the Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. a 9 �•- G co c]Is :.1.1/.00 C, i n s�areadM ngffip�peajWl I$7q.d. C-2 01570-2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITIONS, REMOVALS AND ABANDONMENTS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to remove existing gravel and paved surfaces as indicated and specified. B. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to remove existing structures, as indicated and specified. 1.02 REFERENCES: n` A. IDOT Standard Specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Disposal sites shall comply with all applicable Iowa Department of NaturafResources and United States Environmental Protection Agency regulations. B. Comply with all state and local ordinances pertaining to hauling and disposal of rubbish, broken concrete, asphalt, stone, bricks, castings, and other waste or debris resulting from work on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Locations of disposal sites. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Granular backfill material shall consist of Class A Crushed Stone, MOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 11. B. Explosives shall not be used for demolition. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 24. Structures. Section 2401. Removal of Existing Structures. 02050 -1 Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction Section 2510. Removal of Old Pavement. Section 2511. Removal and Construction of Portland Cement Concrete Side- walks. Section 2515. Removal and Construction of Paved Driveways. Section 2516. Removal and Construction of Retaining Walls and Steps. 3.02 INSPECTION: A. Limits of demolition shall be per 3.04 of this section. The Engineer reserves the right to revise demolition limits if required by the nature of construction. 3.03 PROCEDURES: A. Utilities Notify all corporations, companies, individuals and state or local authorities owning pipelines, water lines, gas mains, buried and overhead electric facilities, telephone, cable television, fiber optic, and other public or private utilities shown on the drawings or otherwise known or discovered to be in the project area. 2. When active utilities are encountered, promptly take necessary measures to support and protect said utilities and maintain them in service. — 3. If active utilities are damaged or interrupted as a result of work on the project, take appropriate measures to restore service immediately. Restoration of utility services under these circumstances shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3 Active utilities shown on the drawings to be relocated, or which require relocation due to unforeseen circumstances or conditions, shall be relocated in accordance �lls n rN CL) with instructions from the Engineer. Generally, the respective utility owners shall obe responsible to perform relocation work for their facilities. The Contractor shall cooperate with these efforts in every reasonable way and shall not be entitled to additional compensation for delays resulting from such relocations. B. Site Protection Measures Barricade and fence open excavations or depressions resulting from work during non - working hours and when not working in immediate area. Provide suitable warning devices adjacent to excavations and work areas. 2. Warning devices shall be kept operational during all non - working and non - active periods. C. Site Access Measures Pedestrian access to homes and businesses shall be maintained at all times. Temporary gravel surfaces shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. 02050 -2 2. Contractor shall perform demolition and removal operations so as to maintain vehicular access to adjacent properties and businesses to the maximum extent possible. D. Disposals 1. No material or debris shall be buried within the project work area. All unsuitable material resulting from demolitions and removals shall be hauled to and disposed of at a Contractor- furnished site approved by the Engineer or to the landfill. The Contractor shall pay the current tipping fee at the landfill. 3.04 DEMOLITIONAND REMOVALS: A. Site Removals I . Removal shall be to the limits noted on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. 2. Removals shall include gravel, rocks, boulders, brick, P.C. Concrete, and A.C. Concrete pavements, driveways, and sidewalks. 3. Sawcuts shall be approved by the Engineer. 4. Removal operations shall conform to construction phasing as directed by the Engineer. 11 /00 sharedlenpwn ,\,,cs- HW2050.d. 02050 -3 N c? rn 9.q CI �O SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Furnish labor, material, tools and equipment to prepare site as indicated and specified. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. MOT Standard Specifications. PART2- PRODUCTS None. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the ]DOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. Section 2101. Clearing and Grubbing. Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2519. Fence Construction. 3.02 EXISTING TREES, SHRUBS AND VEGETATION: A. All trees, shrubs and vegetation shall remain and be protected from damage unless specifically noted as "REMOVE" or "CLEAR AND GRUB" on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. B. No construction materials and/or equipment are to be stored, piled, or parked within the trees' drip line. C. Contractor is responsible for damage outside the limits of construction, and for tees, shrubs and vegetation not designated for removal. The Contractor's liability for tree and shrub damage will be based on the appraised value, not replacement value, and shall include the cost of appraisal by a qualified arborist. 02100 -1 3.03 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND PROPERTY: A. Remove existing signs and posts within the construction area as directed by the Engineer. All permanent traffic signs will be removed, stored, and replaced by the City of Iowa City. Contractor shall provide 48 hour minimum advance notice for sign removal and for sign replacement. Permanent signs will be replaced prior to concrete pours. B. Move mailboxes to a location approved by the Engineer prior to closing road. Salvage and store any unique supports for mailboxes. Restore mailboxes and their supports to their prior location and condition when road is reopened. 3.04 EXISTING FENCING: A. Only fencing designated by the Engineer shall be removed. B. Sections of fence removed for construction shall be replaced per the applicable bid item. If not addressed, replace with new materials. 3.05 EXISTING UTILITIES: A. Contact appropriate utility representative to verify the presence and location of buried utilities in the construction area. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL: " Comply with Iowa City Code and Section 02270, Slope Protection and Erosion Control. I I j U 11 /00 �' o sLaredknginee�i_ yew- id02100.doc N 02100 -2 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY 0 a Section Includes: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, plants, and grass to remain. 2. Removal and disposal of all woody and other herbaceous vegetation, rubbish, unsuitable soils, and other objectionable materials. 3. Removing existing stumps, trees, shrubs, plants and grass. 4. Clearing and grubbing obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation including grinding stumps and removing roots and debris. 5. Preparation of the site. Related Sections: Section 3123 00: Excavation and Fill 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Construction sequencing. 1.04 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS A. Conflict Avoidance: �n 'V C ?. C� 1. Expose possible conflicts in advance of construction, such as utility lines and drainage structures. Verify elevations and locations of each and verify clearance for proposed construction. 2. Notify Owner of conflicts discovered or changes needed to accommodate unknown or changed conditions. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Stop Work: Stop work and notify Owner immediately if contaminated soils, historical artifacts, or other environmental or historic items are encountered. 02110 -1 B. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. C. Conform to Local, State, and Federal requirements. D. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Except for those items which are to be preserved as indicated in the contract documents or as designated by the Owner, all woody and other herbaceous vegetation, fences, trees, brush, stumps, roots, rubbish, etc. shall be removed from the project area. Work shall be classified as follows: A. Clearing: Clearing shall consist of cutting, removal and disposal of trees greater than 6 inches (152.4mm) in diameter. B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of removal and disposal of the following: 1. All stumps, including roots, all trees, and all down timber 6 inches (152.4mm) or less in diameter. 12- removal shall consist of pulling or grubbing of tees and shrubs 6 inches p c') — (152.4mm) or less in diameter, including roots, which are not classified as hedge. a_ i- l_ _ 3r_ Vegetation and rubbish removal shall consist of removal of all vegetation and all u rubbish encountered. N 4. Construction fence shall be removed from the project upon project completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Notification: Notify Owner prior to start of clearing and grubbing activities. B. Removal: Remove the following items: 1. Trees, stumps, including roots. 2. Logs and downed timber. 3. Hedges, bushes, and shrubs, including roots. 4. Vegetation and rubbish. 5. Other objectionable materials. 02110 -2 C. Disposal: Material from clearing and grubbing may be removed in accordance with Iowa Administrative Code 567 -23.2 and must meet local ordinances. Material from clearing and grubbing may be processed by such means as chipping of logs, down timber, or brush, for mulching material, or salvaging of logs and down timber for firewood. Other vegetation including turf grass may be disked into the existing ground surface if approved by the Owner. Materials from clearing and grubbing, other than fence, that is not handled on the project shall be hauled to a "yard waste" landfill. Fence shall be removed from the project and shall be deposited in an approved off -site location. J S 1 02110 -3 SECTION 02220 EARTH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Excavating, placing, stabilizing and compacting earth, including trench and rock excavation, addition of borrow and backfill, disposal of excavated material, and topsoil, strip, salvage and spread. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. IDOT Standard Specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: u� A. Whenever a percentage of compaction is indicated or specified, use percent, of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698 -91, unless noted otherwise. B. Borrow sites and materials shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Granular backfill material shall consist of Class A Crushed Stone, IDOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 11. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. All sections Division 24. Structures. Section 2402, Excavation for Structures. 3.02 TOPSOIL: A. Strip and stockpile topsoil from lawn, grass, and crop areas for surface restoration and landscaping work. Strip topsoil to a uniform depth to provide sufficient quantity of material for placement of a minimum of 9 inches of topsoil for surface restoration and 02220 -1 landscaping. Protect topsoil from mixture with other materials such as aggregate and from erosion. Removal of topsoil from the site is not permitted. 3.03 DRAINAGE AND DEWATERING: A. Provide and maintain ample means and devices (including spare units kept ready for immediate use in case of breakdowns) to intercept and/or remove promptly and dispose properly of all water entering trenches and other excavations. Keep such excavations dry until the structures, pipes, and appurtenances to be built therein have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged. B. Dispose of all pumped or drained water without undue interference to other work, or causing damage to pavements, other surfaces, or property. Provide suitable temporary pipes, flumes, or channels for water that may flow along or across the work site. C. Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the work by rain or by water entering the site, whether water entry be overland or by groundwater. 3.04 TRENCH EXCA VA TION: a_P A. General 1. Excavate trench by machinery to, or just below; designated subgrade when pipe is to be laid in granular bedding or concrete cradle, provided that material remaining at bottom of trench is only slightly disturbed. CI) w f US A M ra Do not excavate lower part of trenches by machinery to subgrade when pipe is to be laid directly on bottom of trench. Remove last of material to be excavated by use of hand tools, just before placing pipe. Hand shape bell holes and form a flat or shaped bottom, hue to grade, so that pipe will have a uniform and continuous bearing. Support on firm and undisturbed material between joints, except for limited areas where use of pipe slings have disturbed bottom. Protection 1. Barricade and fence open excavations or depressions resulting from work during non - working hours and when not working in immediate area. Trench Width 1. Make pipe trenches as narrow as practicable and safe. Make every effort to keep sides of trenches firm and undisturbed until backfilling has been completed and consolidated. 2. Excavate trenches with vertical sides between elevation of center of pipe and elevation 1 foot above top of pipe. 3. Refer to plans for allowable trench widths within the pipe envelope for various types, sizes and classes of pipe. Trench Excavation in Fill 02220 -2 Place fill material to final grade or to a minimum height of 6 feet above top of pipe when pipe is to be laid in embankment or other recently filled areas. Take particular care to ensure maximum consolidation of material under pipe location. Excavate pipe trench as though in undisturbed material. E. Excavation Near Existing Structures 1. Discontinue digging by machinery when excavation approaches pipes, conduits, or other underground structures. Continue excavation by use of hand tools. 2. Excavate exploratory pits when location of pipe or other underground structure is necessary for doing work properly. F. Disposal of Unsuitable Soil The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Iowa Department of Natural Resources (DNR) if soil contamination is found or suspected during excavation. 2. Soil disposal and remediation method shall be an option outlined in the IDOT Construction Manual Section 10.22, and approved by the Iowa DNR and City. The Contractor is not to proceed with soil removal and remediation measures until instructed by the Engineer. moo. 3. Disposal site to be provided by the Contractor and approved, by the Eigineer and Iowa DNR. 4. Contractor is responsible for completing and filing all necessary Federal, State and local government agency forms and applications. G. Care of Vegetation and Property 1. Use excavating machinery and cranes of suitable type and operate with care to prevent injury to trees, particularly to overhanging branches and limbs and underground root systems. 2. All branch, limb, and root cuttings shall be avoided. When required, they shall be performed smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. Trim injured portions by use of a ehainsaw or loppers for branches, or an ax when working with roots. Do not leave frayed, crushed, or tom edges on any roots 1" or larger in diameter or on any branches. Frayed edges shall be trimmed with a utility knife. Do not use tree paint or wound dressing. If conflicts with large roots and branches are anticipated, notify the Engineer. 3. No construction materials and/or equipment are to be stored, piled, or parked within the trees' drip line. 4. Excavators and loaders used on brick surfaces shall be limited to those with rubberized tracks or rubber tires. 5. Do not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other equipment on paved surfaces when treads or wheels can cut or damage such surfaces. 02220 -3 6. Restore all surfaces which have been damaged by the Contractor's operations to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found before work commenced. Use suitable materials and methods for restoration. 7. Aerate all grassed and planter areas compacted by construction activities. 8. Utility lines, including drainage tiles, encountered shall be restored in one of the following ways: a. Repair or otherwise reconnect the utility across trench after trench has been backfilled, provided adequate drainage gradient is maintained, if applicable. b. Connect drainage tiles to nearest storm sewer. The Contractor shall document the location and elevation of any utility lines encountered. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer whenever a utility is encountered and submit the proposed method of restoring the utility for review and approval. All utility repairs shall be made prior to backfilling the trench. H. Water Services 1. Permanent copper water service lines which are damaged (cut, nicked, bent, crimped, crushed, etc.) shall be replaced from the water main to the curb box with new copper service pipe, without any joints. The cost for this work shall be at the Contractor's expense. F, 2: In any excavation where existing lead or galvanized iron water services are in the excavation or disturbed area, the Contractor shall replace the existing lead or M w galvanized piping with new 1 -inch or larger copper water service pipe from the ®" o water main to the curb box. The Contractor will be paid per the applicable bid Y @ U.1 item. If there is no bid item, the unit rice for the replacement of the water service � P' P shall be negotiated prior to commencement of the work. N 3. When water service is disrupted, the Contractor shall make a reasonable attempt to restore the service within two hours. 4. Water service pipe shall be type k soft copper. 3.05 ROCK EXCA VATION: A. Rock excavation will be considered Class 12 Excavation as defined in MOT Standard Specification Section 2102.02. B. Explosives shall not be used for rock excavation. 02220 -4 3.06 BACKFILLING: A. General "j 1. Do not place frozen materials in backfill or place iiaak iilFupon frozen material. Remove previously frozen material or treat as required before new backfill is placed. B. Backfilling Excavations Begin backfilling as soon as practicable and proceed until complete. 2. Material and Compaction a. Paved Areas: Under and within 5 feet of paved surfaces, including streets, sidewalks and driveways, backfill shall be Class A crushed stone placed in one foot lifts compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. The top 12 inches directly below paved surfaces shall be Class A crushed stone compacted to 98% Standard Proctor Density. If under pavement, backfill to bottom of the subgrade. If not under pavement, backfill to within 12 inches of finished surface. b. All other areas: Backfill shall consist of suitable job excavated material placed in one foot lifts compacted to 90% Standard Proctor Density. If excavated material is unsuitable, backfill with Class A crushed stone to within 12 inches of finished surface. C. Do not place stone or rock fragment larger than 2 inches within 2 feet of pipe nor larger than 12 inches in backfill. Do not drop large masses of backfill material into trench. C. Backfilling Around Structures Do not place backfill against or on structures until they have attained sufficient strength to support the loads, including construction loads, to which they will be subjected. Avoid unequal soil pressure by depositing material evenly around structure. 2. Backfill shall consist of Class A crushed stone placed in one foot lifts compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density unless otherwise indicated or specified. 3.07 UNAWHORIZEDEXCAVATION: A. When the bottom of any excavation is taken out beyond the limits indicated or specified, backfill, at Contractor's expense, with Class A crushed stone compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. 11/00 sha ed\enginee,Vpecs- R\022 20.doc 02220-5 SECTION 02270 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Placement of silt fence, erosion control mat, engineering fabric, revetment stone, and erosion stone. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. IDOT Standard Specifications. B. Iowa Department of Transportation Highway Division "Standard Road Plans Manual ", latest edition. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Revetment stone and erosion stone shall meet the abrasion and durability requirements of Section 4130 of the IDOT Standard Specifications. B. Engineering Fabrics (geotextile) shall be of a non -woven material and confomt to the requirements of IDOT Engineering Fabric for Embankment Erosion Control. 1.04 STORAGE: A. Prior to use, geotextile shall be stored in a clean dry place, out of direct sunlight, not subject to extremes of either hot or cold, and with the manufacturer's protective cover in place. Receiving, storage, and handling at the job site shall be in accordance with the requirements in ASTM D 4873. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Except as amended in this document, the materials in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 41. Construction Materials. Section 4130. Revetment Stone and Erosion Stone. Section 4169. Erosion Control Materials. Section 4196. Engineering Fabrics. 02270 -1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2507. Concrete & Stone Revetment. and the following ]DOT Standard Road Plans: RC -5 Wood Excelsior Mat RC -I6 Silt Fence 3.02 SCHEDULE: A. Silt fence shall be installed at locations indicated on the plans immediately upon completion of grading. Wood excelsior mat shall be placed and staked in seeded areas of swales immediately following seeding. 3.03 GEOTEXTILE: 'A. Surface Preparation c 1. The surface on which the geotextile is to be placed will be graded to the neat lines ` and grades as shown on the plans. The surface will be reasonably smooth and free of loose rock and clods, holes, depressions, projections, muddy conditions and standing or flowing water. - B -. -, Placement 1. Prior to placement of the geotextile, the soil surface will be inspected for quality of design and construction. The geotextile will be placed on the approved surface at the locations and in accordance with the details shown on the plans. The geotextile will be unrolled along the placement area and loosely laid (not stretched) in such a manner that it will conform to the surface irregularities when material is placed on or against it. The geotextile may be folded and overlapped to permit proper placement in the designated area. 2. The geotextile will be joined by overlapping a minimum of 18 inches (unless otherwise specified on the plans or by the manufacturer), and secured against the underlying foundation material. Securing pins, approved and provided by the geotextile manufacturer, shall be placed along the edge of the panel or roll material to adequately hold it in place during installation. Pins will be steel or fiberglass formed as a "U ", "L ", or "T" shape or contain "ears" to prevent total penetration. Steel washers will be provided on all but the "U" shaped pins. The upstream or up- slope line will be inserted through both layers along a line through approximately the midpoint of the overlap. At horizontal laps and across slope laps, securing pins will be inserted through the bottom layer only. Securing pins will be placed along a line approximately 2 inches in from the edge of the placed geotextile at intervals not to exceed 12 feet unless otherwise specified. Additional pins will be installed 02270 -2 as necessary and where appropriate, to prevent slippage or movement of the geotextile. The use of securing pins will be held to the minimum necessary. Pins are to be left in place unless otherwise specified. Should the geotextile be torn or punctured, or the overlaps disturbed, as evidenced by visible damage, subgrade pumping, intrusion, or grade distortion, the backfill around the damaged or displaced area will be removed and restored to the original approved condition. The repair will consist of a patch of the same type of geotextile being used, overlapping the existing geotextile. Geotextile panels joined by overlap will have the patch extend a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of any damaged area. 4. The geotextile will not be placed until it can be anchored and protected with the specified covering within 48 hours or protected from exposure to ultraviolet light. In no case will material be dropped on uncovered geotextile from a height greater than 3 feet. 11/00 ,haredk.gwa\tpe - H\02270.d.c 02270 -3 SECTION 02310 BIO- RETENTION PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the testing, mixing, and installation of amended topsoil material and installation of aggregate material associated with bio- retention areas. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: Section 9030 "Plant Material and Planting ". Section 9010 "Seeding ". 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Amended Topsoil: Topsoil that has been uniformly modified with soil amendments to meet the requirements of this section and designed to readily infiltrate runoff water down to open graded stone layer below. B. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. C. Bio- retention area: Shallow vegetated depression underlain with open graded stone and whose topsoil is composed of amended topsoil. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. F. Finished Grade: Elevation of finished surface of topsoil or amended topsoil. G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 02310 -1 I. Topsoil: hnported or onsite topsoil. J. Open Graded Stone: Open graded aggregate for drainage within bio- retention area. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for the following: I. Engineering Fabric. 2. Sand: Provide gradation and source. 3. Open graded stone: Provide gradation and source. B. Samples for the following: 1. Engineering Fabric: 12 -by -12 -inch (300 -by- 300 -mm) sample of engineering fabric. 2. Amended Topsoil: 1- gallon sample. C. Material Test Reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 0 1.: Organic Content and pH measurement of amended topsoil mix shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 194 and ASTM D 4972, respectively. 2.: Gradation of amended topsoil mix shall be in accordance with ASTM D 422 -63 l for amended topsoil mix. Field Control Tests: —�� 1.1 An adequate number of field control tests shall be taken and submitted to demonstrate that amended soil meets the required parameters and is uniform. a. Two samples per amended topsoil batch prior to placement. b. One amended topsoil sample shall be taken within each rain garden, and one amended topsoil sample per 100 linear feet of bioswale. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Workmanship: The Contractor shall have been employed in similar types of work of similar size and scope within the past three years. The Contractor shall provide a list of similar types of projects and references to the Owner. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt offsite utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. 02310 -2 3. Contact utility - locator service for area where Project is located "before " excavating. 1.08 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil placement with preparation activities and recommended seeding /planting schedules to meet the requirements of this section, and provide the required maintenance"'Y from date of substantial completion 1.09 DELIVERYAND STORAGE A. Coordinate with Construction Manager for delivery and storage of required materials for this Section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be a natural loam uniformly composed from the A- horizon of soil profiles of local soils without admixture of subsoil, fertile, friable (i.e. not pulverized), free from clay lumps, brush, litter, stones, roots, or similar objects larger than 1 -inch in any dimension, or other materials deleterious to plant growth, and shall be of clean material that is also free of weed propagules (seeds, rhizomes, and plants). 1. Topsoil source: a. On -site and Off -site Topsoil Source: Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well - drained construction sites where topsoil occurs at least four (4) inches deep; do not obtain from wetlands, e.g., marshes, fens, wet prairie, etc. Topsoil shall not have been stockpiled or stored for more than one year. b. Material stripped from the following sources shall not be considered suitable for use as topsoil: chemically contaminated soils, areas from which the original surface has been shipped and/or covered over such as borrow pits, open mines, demolition sites, dumps, and sanitary landfills. 3 B. Coarse Sand: Coarse sand used within the amended topsoil and bio- retention bedding layer shall be in accordance with the following gradation. Size % Passin 3/8" 100 No. 4 97+/-3 No. 16 65+/-20 No. 50 20+/- 10 No. 100 5+/-5 C. Organic Matter: The organic matter shall be well- composted, stable, and weed -free with a 02310 -3 W C7 n_ LJ 0 N pH range of 5.5 to 8. Compost used to supplement organic matter shall also meet the following requirements: The compost shall be derived of material that consists of chipped, shredded, or ground vegetation or clean, processed, recycled wood products. 2. The compost shall be processed or completed to reduce weed seeds, pathogens, and deleterious material, and shall not contain paint, petroleum products, herbicides, fungicides, or other chemical residues that would be harmful to plant or animal life. Other deleterious material, plastic, glass, metal, or rocks shall not exceed 0.1 percent by weight or volume. Amended Topsoil Mix 1. Coarse Sand shall be clean and free of toxic materials. 2. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be used within the amended soil to meet mix specifications. 3. Organic Matter: Organic matter shall be used within amended soil to meet mix specifications. 4. Mix: Contractor shall test native topsoil prior to mixing to obtain initial characteristics. Mixing ratios shall then be determined to achieve the required gradation and organic content of amended topsoil. Suggested mixture ratios are as follows: SoilType Amended Soil Mix Ratio, Soil: Mixture Average Soils 3:1 Sandy Soils 1:1 Clay :Soils (also areas of high rainfall or poor drainage Not more than 8:1 (Note: Native material on site is clay soil.) Amended Topsoil shall be thoroughly mixed prior to placement. Topsoil shall be amended with Coarse Sand and Organic Matter to meet the following properties in accordance with ASTM D422 -63. Test results shall be submitted according to Field Control requirements. Two discrete samples per amended topsoil batch and approved by the Owner's Representative prior to placement: a. Proportion of Sand, 75 % -80% b. Proportion of Clay, <10% C. Proportion of Organic Matter, 8 % -10% d. pH, 6.8 <_ pH < 8.0 E. Open Graded Stone for use in bio- retention areas: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with Standard Specifications (Iowa Department of Transportation), with the following gradation. Size % Passin 1 -1/2" 100 1" 95+/-5 %z" 45+/-15 No. 4 5 +/-5 02310 -4 F. ENGINEERING FABRIC 1. Material shall be provided and installed as per Section 4196.01 (B) anwor (C) of the IDOT Standard Specifications, as appropriate. Suitable yr�ateyi, Is,are li�stdd'In the IDOT Materials IM 496.01. G. PERFORATED PIPE Material shall be provided and installed as per Section 4146 of the IDOT Standard Specifications. H. EROSION BLANKET Erosion blanket material within bio- retention areas and areas of concentrated flow shall be consistent with Section 4169 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for ditch protection. Suitable materials are listed in the IDOT Materials IM 496.10. 2. Erosion blanket on disturbed side slopes of bio- retention areas outside areas of concentrated flow shall consistent with Section 4169 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for slope protection. Suitable materials are listed in the IDOT Materials fM 496.10. I. TRANSITION MAT Mat shall be 4' x 4' ScourStop Transition Mat panels, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls. 3.02 BIO- RETENTIONAREA A. Verify that subgrades are constructed to lines and elevations indicated on plan documents. B. Place first three (3) inches of coarse sand bed and thoroughly mix with subgrade soils to a depth of two (2) inches. C. Place second three (3) inches of coarse sand bed and tamp. 02310 -5 D. Verify rough grades prior to placement of open graded stone and amended topsoil layers. E. Place open graded stone in maximum 8 -inch lifts and compact to 90% to meet indicated depths and elevations. Do not overcompact, which can create fines that may clog subgrade soils. F. Place 4 -inch perforated pipe to elevation indicated on plan documents. G. Place soil separation engineering fabric as indicated between open graded stone and amended topsoil layers. H. Place amended topsoil mix in 8 -12 inch lifts, Overfill above indicated grades to allow for natural settlement. Avoid over compaction by allowing time for natural settlement and compaction. If time does not allow for natural settlement of soil, one of the following Iight compaction methods as specified below, may be implemented; if needed, additional amended soil prix shall be placed as necessary to meet final grades. 1. Amended topsoil mix may be compacted by soaking the placed soil until t- water flows from the underdrain. Water for saturation shall be applied by >: spraying or sprinkling. Additional settlement may occur subsequent to the initial wetting. ��- Roll the entire bio- retention area with a hand roller weighing no more than 100 pounds per foot of width. During the rolling, all depressions caused by settlement of rolling shall be filled with additional amended topsoil mix and the surface shall be regraded and rolled until a smooth and even finish to the indicated elevations and sections. I. Open graded stone or amended topsoil contaminated by construction site runoff, sediment or other foreign materials shall be removed and replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.03 FINE GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1, Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. B. Finish bio - retention surface to required elevations within the following tolerances: Bio- retention: Plus or minus 1 inch. 02310 -6 3.04 EROSION BLANKET INSTALLATION A. Install specified erosion control blanket following manufacturer's.' ecifications and installation procedures for areas as indicated on the plan, documents: ; Exo §jon blanket shall be installed immediately following seed'in5tafl4tioli, -Coordi�ate work to ensure all areas are blanketed prior to end of workday. 3.05 PRO'T'ECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. After placement of amended topsoil, bio- retention areas shall be protected from construction traffic. Any rutting, over - compaction, clogging, or other damage to bio - retention area shall be repaired to established grades and tolerances at no additional expense to owner. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner representative; reshape and recompact. 3.06 DISPOSAL OT SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property at no cost to Owner. 02310 -7 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING t PART 1 - GENERAL r,r 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to prepare, install, shape, trim and compact subgrades to receive Portland Cement Concrete paving. B. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to form, place, reinforce, finish, joint and cure Portland Cement Concrete roadways, parking area slabs, driveways, and sidewalks at the locations and grades noted on the plans. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. IDOT Standard Specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. B. Quality testing: 1. Compressive Strength Tests. 2. Entrained Air. 3. Slump. 4. Density Tests of Base and Subgrade. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Except as amended in this document, the materials in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the ]DOT Standard Specifications: Division 41. Construction Materials. Sections 4101 through 4122. B. Aggregate durability class for all Portland Cement Concrete paving shall be Class 3. 02520 -1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.07 TECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. Section 2111. Granular Subbase, Division 22. Base Courses. Section 2201. Portland Cement Concrete Base. Section 2212. Base Repair. Section 2213. Base Widening. Division 23. Surface Courses Section 2301. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. Section 2302. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Widening. Section 2310. Bonded Portland Cement Concrete Overlay. Section 2316. Pavement Smoothness. Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2512. Portland Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter. U I Section 2515. Removal and Construction of Paved Driveways. e , j Section 2517. Concrete Header Slab. -'' Section 2529. Full Depth Finish Patches. Section 2530. Partial Depth Finish Patches. 3:!02 &RING AND PROTECTION OF PAYEMENI. A" Curing compound shall be applied immediately following finishing of the concrete, including back of curb. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. A. When concrete is being placed in cold weather and temperatures may be expected to drop below 35 °F, the following requirements must be met for concrete less than 36 hours old: 24 Hour Temperature Forecast Covering Minimum 35 -32° F One layer plastic or burlap. Minimum 3l -25 °F One layer plastic and one layer burlap or two layers burlap. Below 25° F Commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete shall be protected from freezing temperatures until it is at least five days old. C. Concrete damaged by cold weather shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 02520 -2 D. Maximum allowable concrete temperature shall be 90° F. E. If concrete is placed when the temperature of the concrete couldl, p� qd 90° F, the ' Contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregate § °and /onmixinp water, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete as it is placed below 90?+ 3.04 OPENING TO TRAFFIC: A. Opening to traffic, including Contractor's vehicles, will not be permitted until the compressive strength of G" dia. x 12" cylinders is at least 3,000 lb. per square inch. B. All joints in the pavement shall be cleaned and sealed prior to opening the street(s) to traffic of any kind. C. Opening to traffic shall not constitute final acceptance. 3.05 COMPLETION OF WORK: A. When traffic is allowed upon the pavement, the Contractor shall begin remaining work and clean up. All streets and sidewalks shall be finished and opened to the public as soon as practicable. B. Contractor shall notify the Engineer if weather conditions make it difficult to use Class M concrete, when specified. 11 /00 slmeed \engineer�specsii \02520.doc 02520 -3 SECTION 02524 ,�W I 9 •MV119.1 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Construct sidewalk curb ramps to meet ADA specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES: I A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. City of Iowa City Design Standards, C. Iowa DOT ADA Curb Ramp Compliance (Alterations) - (I IA -4) 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly gained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of curb ramp construction. B. Slope measurements. Newly constructed curb ramps and sidewalks not meeting the slope requirements will be, at the Engineer's discretion, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Section 02520, Portland Cement Concrete Paving PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the Iowa DOT ADA Curb Ramp Compliance (Alterations) — (I IA-4) and the following sections of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) B Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. Section 4. Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Re- quirements Section 14. Public Rights -of -Way 02524 -1 3.02 SLOPES: A. Cross slope refers to the slope that is perpendicular to the direction of travel. Running slope refers to the slope that is parallel to the direction of travel. B. Curb ramp cross slopes should be no greater than 1:50 or 2% to a level plane. C. Curb ramp running slopes should be no greater than 1:12 or 8.33% to a level plane unless existing conditions do not permit and layout is approved by the Engineer. 3.03 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE THICKNESS. A. 6 -inch thick P.C.C. will be placed at all curb ramps unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 11 /00 sh are&ngi nee Aspecs- IR02524.dw 02524 -2 V1 rj OF � U cn N 02524 -2 SECTION 02660 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: n Jp,, F � v, A. Furnish, install and test water distribution system as indicated and specified. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. This specification references the following documents. hi their latest edition, the referenced documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. In case of conflict, the requirements of this specification shall prevail. One copy of all references marked with a * ** shall be kept on the site, readily available and accessible to the Engineer during normal working hours. Copies may be obtained from the organizations or from the Iowa City Water Division at cost plus 15 %. B. City of Iowa City Water Division I. Reference Manual C. American National Standards Institute and American Water Works Combined Standards: I. ANSI/AWWA- C104/A21.4: Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 2. ANSI/AWWA- C105/A21.5: Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems 3. ANSVAWWA- C1I0 /A21.10: Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 -inch through 48 -inch, for Water and Other Liquids 4. ANSI/AWWA -CI I I /A21.11: Rubber- Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 5. ANSI/AWWA- C150/A21.50: Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe 6. ANSI/AWWA- C151/A21.51: Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids 7. ANSVAWWA- C153/A21.53: Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch through 24- inch, and 54 -inch through 64 -inch for Water Service 8. ANSI/AWWA C502: Dry- Barrel Fire Hydrants 9. ANSI/AWWA C504: Rubber- Seated Butterfly Valves 10. AWWA C509: Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 02660 -1 11. ANSI/AWWA C510 Double Check Valve Backflow- Prevention Assembly 12. ANSI/AWWA C511 Reduced - Pressure Principal Backflow- Prevention Assembly 13. ANSI/AWWA C550: Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 14. ANSIIAWWA C600 * * *: Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 15. ANSI/ AWWAC651 * * *: Disinfecting Water Mains 16. ANSI/AWWA C900: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 -inch through 12- inch for Water Distribution D. American Water Works Association: I. AWWA Manual M23 * * *: PVC Pipe- Design and Installation 2. AWWA Manual M17 * * *: Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants E. American Society for Testing Materials: c =� 1, ASTM D2241 F. ) 44nufacturers Standardization Society: MSS -SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials Design and Manufacture LV „ N c2` MSS -SP -69 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application o U + Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association: 1. UNI- B -3 -88 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (nominal diameters 4 -36 inch) complying with AWWA Standard C -900 or C -905. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit to the Engineer the following drawings or details for approval prior to installation. One copy of each with the approval stamp shall be kept at the work site at all times. B. Shop and Working Drawings: 1. Pipe layout with valves, fittings and hydrants shown 2. Valves 3. Hydrants 4. Fittings 5. Bolts 02660 -2 6. Joints 7. Tapping sleeves, couplings, and special piping materials. 8. Polyethylene .r a s 9. Thrust block designs and details 0 10. Special backfill (UIr`, C. Certificates: Sworn certificates of shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard for all piping materials. D. Manufacturer's Literature: 1. Catalog cuts of joints, couplings, harnesses, expansion joints, gaskets, fasteners and other accessories. 2. Brochures and technical data and coatings and linings and proposed method of application. E. Plans for initial operations and final operations: Special prepared drawings and typed list of sequences of steps are needed prior to any operation of water distribution system. Submit 2 weeks prior to date of planned operation. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Engineer reserves the right to inspect and test by independent service at manufacturer's plant or elsewhere at Engineer's expense. B. Contractor shall conduct visual inspection before installation. 1.05 TIME: A. Time is of the essence for water main construction work. All work which requires shutdown of active water mains must be completed as quickly as possible to minimize inconvenience to the consumers and risk to the community. B. Amount of advance notice required to the Iowa City Water Division when materials or services are supplied by the Division are listed below. Serve notice to the Water Division at 356 -5160. 1. For tapping service, provide 24 hours notice. 2. For notice to customers of disruption of water service, provide 48 hours notice. This work will be completed with the assistance of Water Division personnel. 3. For review, comments, and approval of plans of operation, provide 3 days notice. 4. For locations of underground facilities, provide 48 hours notice. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 All products used for this work shall be from the list of "Accepted Products for Water Distribution 02660 -3 Materials" contained in the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual and found in Appendix A. If there is a discrepancy between the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual and Appendix A, the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual prevails. 2.02 DUCTILE- IRONPIPE: A. Thickness design shall conform to ANSUAWWA C150/A21.50. B. Manufacture shall conform to ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51. C. Thickness for direct bury piping, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be class 52. D. Thickness for pipe suspended fiom structures and bolted or restrained joint pipe, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be class 53. E. Cement mortar lining shall conform to ANSUAWWA CI04/A21.4. 2.03 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE JOINTS: A. Single rubber - gasket push -on joints or mechanical joints conforming to ANSUAWWA C1l l /A21.11. Furnish with all necessary hardware and gaskets. .. Bell- and - spigot pipe joints conforming to ANSI A21.6 or ANSI A21.8. C. Fat bolted/restrained mechanical joint, use Griffin Bolt -Lok restrained joint or approved equal. (Class 53) Ij. Fo'r unbolted/restrained mechanical joint, use Griffin Snap -Lok restrained joint or approved equal. (Class 53) c, Do not use drilled & tapped retainer glands. E Plain end of push -on pipe factory machined to a true circle and chamfered to facilitate fitting gasket. 2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDEPIPE: A. Pipe shall conform to ANSUAWWA C900 and shall be thickness class DR 18 (Class 150). All pipe shall have the same outside dimensions as ductile -iron pipe. PVC pipe materials are only allowed in sizes 6 to 10 inch diameter. B. PVC pipe materials shall not be used in any area where there is likelihood the pipe will be exposed to concentrations of pollutants comprised of low molecular weight petroleum products or organic solvents or vapors. C. PVC pipe shall not be installed under public roadways and shall not be used around cul -de -sacs or other small radius curves. 2.05 FITTINGS: A. All fittings shall conform to ANSUAWWA C1 10 /A21.10, with pressure rating of Class 350 for 3" to 24 ". 02660 -4 B. Mechanical joint fittings shall be ductile iron compact ANSUAWWA CIS 15 121,5 or ductile standard ANSUAWWA CI10 /A21.10. Large fittings, 12- inc�Jt ough 20 -inch "shall be ductile iron standard ANSUAWWA C110 /A2L10. Swivel tees'441l,be ductile iron standard ANSUAWWA CI 10.A21.10. Where ductile iron is not available Zi'.,,offsets), cast iron standard ANSUAWWA CI 10 /A21.1.0 shall be provided C. All fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and outside and shall be furrii$hadJppr plete with necessary accessories including plain rubber gaskets, ductile iron glands, NSS Cor- Blue bolts and nuts. Verify the gasket seats are not made irregular by improper application of the lining materials. 2.06 VALVES& VALVEBOXES: A. Gate valves shall conform to ANSUAWWA C509. 1. Valves shall be full line size gate valves with epoxy coating inside and outside and contain stainless steel nuts and bolts. 2. Valve bodies shall be ductile iron or cast iron. Working pressure of the valve shall be at least 200 psi and gaskets rated at 250 psi. 3. Valves shall have a standard 2 -inch square operating nut and shall open left. 4. Valves shall be capable of being repacked or replacing o -rings under pressure. 5. Valves are to be non - rising stem with the stem, nut and thrust collar made of bonze. B. Butterfly valves shall conform to ANSI/AW WA C504, for buried service, Class 150B. 1. Valve seat to be installed on disk or valve body. 2. Butterfly valves shall not be utilized in sizes smaller than 16 ", unless so noted on the plans. 3. Working pressure of the valve shall be at least 150 psi. 4. Valves shall be short body pattern with mechanical joint ends. 5. Shaft seals shall be o -ring type. 6. Valve shall have manual operator with a 2" square operating nut for operation of the valve and shall open left. 7. All interior and exterior cast iron, ductile iron or steel surfaces shall be painted with an epoxy coating and contain stainless steel bolts and nuts. 02660 -5 C. Tapping Valves shall be as specified for resilient- seated gate valves with the exception that one end shall be mechanical joint and the other end shall be flanged to match the tapping sleeve and shall have oversize seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters. 1. Tapping valves be 175 psi minimum working pressure. 2. Valves shall be epoxy coated inside and outside with stainless nuts and bolts. 3. Valves shall be furnished with all joint accessories. D. Valve Boxes shall be 2 -piece or 3 -piece slip type, range 51" to 71 ". Use lids marked "water ". 2.07 HYDRANTS: Specification standard: Type of shutoff: Type of construction: C c ,Main valve opening: LLJ Nozzles arrangement N and size Nozzle thread: Type of inlet connection: Size of inlet connection: Depth of bury: Direction of opening: Packing: Size and shape of operating nut: Working pressure: Color: ANSJ/AW WA Standard C502 Compression Break flange or break bolt above the ground line and a breakaway stem connection. All bolts to be stainless steel. 4%2 inches for 12" water main and under 5%< inches for 16" water main and above 3 nozzle, two 2%2 -inch hose nozzles and one 4%2 -inch pumper nozzle, with caps attached with chains National Standard Hose Threads Mechanical Joint 6 inch Depth of bury shall be 6 feet Open to right (clockwise) Conventional or O -Ring 1 %2 inch, standard pentagon 250 psi Safety Red `i 2.08 SPECIAL FITTINGS: A. Special pipe fittings must be approved by the Engineer. B. Special fittings must be the same diameter, thickness and pnessu>"e class asIstandard, fittings. C. Special fittings may be manufactured to meet requirements of same specifications as standard fittings except for laying length and types of end connection. D. Full Body Tapping Sleeves: Shall be mechanical joint, split construction with end gaskets, manufactured to fit cast iron or ductile iron pipe. Branch shall have a flange fitting to match the tapping valve. 2. Shall meet the OD requirements for Class A, B, C, or D pit cast pipe. 3. Shall be furnished complete with all accessories. 4. Required for 12" and larger pipe or under paving. E. Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves: 1. Shall be epoxy coated with ductile -iron flange and stainless steel bolts. 2. Shall meet the OD requirements for class A, B, C, or D pit cast pipe. 3. Shall be furnished complete with all accessories. 4. Shall be compatible with Mueller, Clow, Kennedy, or U.S. Pipe F. Stainless Steel Repair Clamps: 1. All stainless steel, single section, double section, or triple section, depending upon size of main. 2. Shall have stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2.09 GASKETS, BOLTS, AND NUTS: A. Mechanical joints made with: Bolts: 3/4 inch NSS Cor -BLUE. 2. Stainless steel bold studs with stainless steel nuts on each end. B. All thread rod used to restrain fittings shall be stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and 3/4" diameter. 02660 -7 2.10 LOCATION WIRE: A. Location wire shall be #12 solid copper, TWIN insulation in yellow or orange color. 2.11 LUMBER: A. Lumber for bracing or supports shall be hardwood (i.e. oak or maple). Do not use creosoted lumber in contact with piping materials. 2.12 WATER: A. Reasonable amounts of water will be provided for use in the final operations of water main flushing, disinfection and testing. Prior notice must be given to the Water Division, B. Contractor will not be charged for the water used as long as there is reasonable care to control and conserve the rate and volume used. If there is waste or carelessness, Contractor will be charged for water. PART -3, - EXECUTION 3.01 ,REFERENCES AND DOCUMENTS: Contractor must have all required documents on the site before commencing with the work. W r 13. Valves, fittings, hydrants and ductile -iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with E , : ANSUAW WA C600 except as noted herein. is PVC pipe must be furnished and installed in accordance with AWWA M23 and Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association UNI- B -3 -88 except as noted herein. D. Contractor must prepare and retain a set of "as- built" drawings on the job site with accurate and current information on the location of all valves, pipe and special construction features. Examples of special buried features would be: Offsets in alignment. 2. Changes in depth, depth greater than 8 feet or less than 5 feet. Special fittings or construction materials. 3.02 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. The Engineer may mark materials which are found on the job site and which are determined to be defective or not approved. The marking may be done with spray paint. The Contractor shall promptly remove defective or unapproved materials from the site. B. While unloading PVC piping materials: 1. Do not allow the pipe units to strike anything. 2. Do not handle pipe units with individual chains or single cables, even if padded. Do not attach cables to pipe unit frames or banding for lifting. 1 ..1 C. Within the "Storage" language of AWWA M23, change "should" to "shall"' . r D. Within the " Handling" language of AW WA M23, change "should" t "shall.' ^ 3.03 LOCATION, ALIGNMENT, SEPARATION & GRADE. 0 A. Water mains, valves, hydrants, and special fittings shall be installe8 m,tlrc locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. / B. Contractor shall have all buried utilities located by the 1 -800- ONE -CALL service and shall do exploratory excavation as necessary to determine specific conflicts between existing utilities and new water main. No extra compensation will be allowed for the exploratory excavations. C. Water main shall be installed a minimum depth of cover of 5'/z feet. D. Water mains crossing sewer services, storm sewers or sanitary sewers shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water main and the top of the sewer. Where local conditions prevent this vertical separation, the water main shall not be placed closer than 6 inches above a sewer or 18 inches below a sewer under any circumstances. Additionally, one full length of water pipe crossing the sewer shall be centered at the point of crossing so that the water pipe joints will be equal distance as far as possible from the sewer. The water and sewer pipes must be adequately supported and have pressure tight joints. A low permeability soil shall be used for backfill material within 10 feet of the point of crossing. E. No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet shall be maintained. F. All PVC water main and ductile iron water main with greater than 400 feet between features that extend to the surface (such as hydrants or valve boxes) shall be marked with a wire for the entire length to make electronic location possible. The wire shall be installed continuously as the pipe is backfilled. The wire shall be fixed to the side of the pipe at a position of 2 o'clock or 10 o'clock and attached with duct tape every 5 feet. 2. The insulation shall be protected to prevent accidental grounding. Make few splices and splice the wire together using a Twister DB Plus Wire Connector. Bring the wire to the ground surface at each fire hydrant and loop wire in a Valvco tracer wire terminal box. These boxes shall be located between the hydrant and the hydrant valve with at least tvvo feet of extra wire inside the box. Install the terminal box perpendicular from the hydrant and parallel with the valve box, one -foot from the hydrant base. The tracer wire terminal box must be installed flush with the finished grade. If there is no fire hydrant within 500 feet, bring the wire to the surface in a "daylight box" which is a full -size valve box and mark the drawings appropriately. 02660 -9 3.04 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILLING. A. Ductile -iron pipe bedding shall conform to the project plan details or as otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer. B. PVC pipe bedding shall conform to UNI- B -3 -88 laying condition Type 2 including hand excavation for the bell holes. The bedding shall be loose, natural, fine soil which is compacted by stomping on the soil along the sides of the pipe to the top of the pipe. C. Trench width within the pipe envelope shall conform to the plans or as directed by the Engineer. D. Set valves and hydrants on precast concrete bases. 3.05 PIPE RESTRAINT: A. Thrust Restraint: 1. For pipe smaller than 10" diameter, concrete block shall be used, placing the concrete block next to the fitting and undisturbed soil. For 10" and larger diameter pipe, blocking shall be by cast -in -place concrete. Cover fittings and joints with 10 mil. polyethylene before placing concrete. Brace fittings with hardwood lumber to E•f + prevent shifting before placing concrete. .J M ;...0 ` e - Do not pour excess concrete on top of pipe and fittings. l j V7 i� S`ooket Pipe Clamps, Tie Rods, and Bridles: N 1. Where indicated or necessary to prevent joints or sleeve couplings from pulling apart under pressure, provide suitable socket pipe clamps, tie rods, and bridles. Bridles and tie rod diameter shall be at least 3/4 in. except where they replace flange bolts of smaller size with nut on each side of flange. C. Dead Ends Pipe ends or fittings left for future connections shall be plugged or capped using materials supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 2. All pipe ends or fittings left for future connections shall be blocked against thrust. 3.06 JOINTS AND COUPLINGS. A. Push -on Joints: 1. Inspect bell grooves and clean to assure complete gasket seating. 2. Use extreme care to prevent separation of joints already installed. 3. Do not use push -on joints when boring. Griffin Snap -Lok shall be used in casing with locking rubbers. 02660 -10 B. Mechanical Joints: 1p I . The range of torque for tightening bolts which is indicated in ANSI/A*WA C600? may be somewhat affected b the temperature. On cold da r y y p )�� more- torque may be required. J 2. Use extreme caution when tightening cast iron fittings to avoid brea e ears of " the flanges. An average worker should not use a wrench longer than `1,0' i li'elg �! , 3. On PVC pipe connections to MJjoints, cut the bevel off the end of the PVC pipe to get full pipe diameter in the joint. 4. Do not deflect pipe at joint. C. Sleeve -Type Coupling: Clean pipe ends for distance of 12 inches. 2. Use soapy water as gasket lubricant. 3. Carefully mark and place the sleeve coupling in the center of the joint. 3.07 TAPPED CONNECTIONS UNDER PRESSURE. A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Tapping mains for new connections 1 -inch to 12 -inch in diameter shall be done by the Water Division. C. A new and site specific tapping application must be prepared for each tap regardless of size, and submitted to the Water Division. The tapping application must be completed and include location, name, and address of water customer, schematic drawing, and materials of construction. 3.08 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT. A. All open cut installed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be wrapped with an 8 mil polyethylene encasement in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C205/A21.5 installation methods. This includes any ductile iron laid in cul -de -sacs or other small radius areas where PVC main could not be used. 3.09 HYDRANTINSTALLATION. A. Handle carefully to avoid breakage and damage to flanges. Keep hydrants closed until they are installed. Protect stored hydrants from dirt, water, ice, animals and vandals. B. Before installation, clean piping and elbow of any foreign matter. C. Install hydrants away from the curb line a sufficient distance to avoid damage from or to vehicles. A set -back of 4 feet from the curb line is recommended. D. Orient the hydrant so the pumper nozzle faces the street. Outlet nozzles shall be at least 18 02660 -11 inches above finished ground. The break -off flange should be no more than 6 inches above ground. There shall be no obstructions to fire hose connections. E. The base elbow shall be placed on solid precast concrete blocks on firm, undisturbed soil. The barrel of the hydrant shall be firmly braced against the back of the trench wall with pre -cast cement blocks to resist thrust at the pipe connection. F. The base and lower barrel shall be backfilled with 5 cubic feet of washed gravel or I inch crushed rock to allow water to release from the hydrant drain. G. Install the hydrant plumb. Drainage stone and soil backfill around the barrel shall be firmly compacted to provide good lateral support for the hydrant. This is essential to the performance of the break -off flange. 3.10 WATER MAIN OPERATIONS. A. All work which involves operating the active public water distribution system will require the notice, consent, approval and assistance of the Water Division. X13 An accurate and legible copy of the "as- built' drawings must be on file in the Water Division office prior to using the water supply. C. If requested by the City, the contractor will work with the Water Division personnel to n h submit a plan for initial operations and a plan for final operations to the Water Division for approval. The plans shall include a drawing and typed list of actions which show all the �'- significant steps necessary to connect to the existing water distribution system or conduct the filling, flushing and testing operations. The purpose of both plans is to minimize the impact of service interruptions and pressure and flow variations on the water distribution system and existing customers. 3.11 DISINFECTION FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS. A. General Upon completion of a newly installed water main or when repairs to an existing water system are made, the main shall be disinfected according to instructions listed in ANSUAWWA C651 and the following specifications. B. Special Disinfection Requirements 1. Exercise cleanliness during construction. Protect pipe interiors, fittings and valves against contamination. 2. Water main 16 -inch and larger in diameter must be swabbed with a soft pig prior to flushing if flow in the system is not adequate to maintain scouring velocity (2 fps) during flushing. 3. The minimum uniform concentration of available chlorine used for disinfection shall be 50 mg/L. Use either the granulated/tablet or continuous feed method with modifications as described in 3.11 C or D below. 4. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main at least 24 hours, during which 02660 -12 time all valves and hydrants in the section treated shall be operated in Order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24 hour period, the treated LvaYer shall contain no less than 25 mg/L chlorine throughout the length optnlin. ; 5. After the retention period, flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main, int}yl, the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no hi &h iitfian 3 mg/t" `_.- - and the water appears clean. Flush at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feefp�rsecQpd:iq, , the main through an opening not less than '/, of the main diameter. For 6LI'ng� through 12 -inch water mains, a single 2V2-inch fire hydrant opening is adequate!i% Water entering storm sewer system shall be dechlorinated by a method approved by the Engineer to prevent downstream environmental damage (i.e. fish kills). 6. Collect a bacterial sample from the end of each line or 800 -1,000 feet and deliver the sample to the University Hygienic Laboratory at Oakdale for analysis. Allow approximately 5 days for the results. If the bacterial sample shows the absence of coliform organisms, the hydrostatic test may proceed. C. Tablet Method of Chlorine Application Use ANSUAWWA C651, however slowly fill the main (less than I cubic foot per second) with system water, pushing out as much air as possible. Do not wash out the tablets. D. Continuous Feed Method of Chlorine Application I. Prior to applying chlorine, do a preliminary flush at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second in the main through an opening not less than not less than '' /< of the main diameter. For 6 -inch through 12 -inch water mains, a single 2% -inch fire hydrant opening is adequate, 2. Add the water and chlorine solution with the required concentration to fill the main completely. 3.12 TESTING: A. Filling the water main: 1, Fill the newly constructed water main system slowly using heated public water under low pressure and low flow. The objective is to displace air with water while avoiding damage to new construction, customer services, and adjoining property due to the release of air and water. Public Works staff must be on site to assist with operation of the system valves and hydrants during this operation. 2. Open one hydrant (completely) at the end of the main or at a high point on the main which is to be filled. Open a filling valve (the smallest one available) slightly. Allow the water main to fill and slowly release the air, When the main being filled has released nearly all air, surging should diminish and water released from the hydrant should flow in a steady stream. Monitor and control the released water to minimize damage. 02660 -13 3. After a few minutes of steady state operation, open all other valves slowly and then open the initial fill valve completely, while regulating the flow hydrant to minimize damage. When the main has been filled, open and close all hydrants sequentially to force fresh water progressively through each section (new and old) of water main which was shut down to replace fresh water into each section. 4. After clear water and a fresh chlorine odor are observed at each hydrant, shut down hydrant flow slowly and allow water flow to cease and internal pressure to stabilize. Then, each water service connection shall be tested at a sill cock and observed by the Contractor to verify adequate pressure and flow. B. Pressure and Leakage Tests: 1. Conduct combined pressure and leakage test in accordance with ANSUAWWA C600. 2. Pressure test off the hydrants or furnish and install temporary testing plugs or caps. Furnish pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gauges, equipment, potable water and labor. Use only potable water for testing. r, 3. Test after disinfection operations are successfully completed. If testing operations require reconstruction or repairs during which the interior of the pipe is exposed to p ! i contamination, disinfection will be required again. 4. Keep the water main full of water for 24 hours before conducting combined v pressure and leakage test. r 5. Pressure and leakage test consists of first raising water pressure at the lowest point of section being tested to 150 psi internal pressure. 6. Failure to achieve and maintain the specified pressure for two hours with no additional pumping means the water main has failed to pass the test. 7. If the water main fails the pressure and leakage test, locate, uncover, and repair or replace defective pipe, fitting or joints. Conduct additional tests and repairs until water main passes the test. C. Valve Operations: All valves shall be located and tested to verify operation. Remove the valve box lid, insert the valve key and open and close each valve. Count the turns and record the results. D. Hydrant Operations: After the hydrant has been installed and the main and hydrant have been pressure tested, each hydrant shall be flushed and checked for proper operation. 2. Remove a nozzle cap and open the hydrant slowly and fully. Check the direction of opening as marked on the top. Do not force the hydrant in the opening direction beyond full open as indicated by sudden resistance to turning. 02660 -14 E. 3. After hydrant has been flushed, close it and check for drainage. This is done by placing the hand over the nozzle opening and checking for a vacuum. Then check the hose thread for proper fit. 4. Replace nozzle cap, then open hydrant again and inspect all joints for leaks. Flow Test: Flow tests shall be conducted to verify all components of the water system are fully open and operational and to determine the fire flow capacity. 2. Public Works staff personnel must be on the site to operate the system valves and hydrants during this test. 3. A hydrant flow test shall be conducted on the hydrant at the extreme locations for distance or highest elevation to determine the fire flow capability of the system. Static and flowing pressures and flow rates shall be recorded, and a copy forwarded to the Water Division. 02660 -15 N rl7 d � J MOD n]►:�� Accepted Products for Water Distribution Materials WATER PIPE: (Ductile) ANSI /AWWA — A21.51/C151 American, Clow, Griffin, McWane, Tyler, and US Pipe Class 52 for direct bury piping unless other wise indicated or specified. Class 53 for suspended from structures and bolted or restrained joint pipe WATER PIPE: ( PVC) (Class 150) — C900 C900 thickness class DR18 (6" thru 10 ") FITTINGS: (Ductile Iron Standard) ANSI /AWWA — A21.10/C110, 3" to 2411- 350 psi (Ductile Iron Compact) AWWA CI 53, 350 psi Clow, Tyler/Union, U.S. Pipe, or Sigma TAPPING SLEEVES: (Full Body Ductile Iron with Stainless Steel and /or NSS Cor -Blue Nuts and Bolds) for 12" and larger or under pavement Clow - F -5205, Mueller - H615, Kennedy, Tyler/Union, Kennedy, American Flow Control - Series 2800, or U.S. Pipe - T -9 TAPPING SLEEVES: (Stainless Steel) Smith Blair - 662 or 663, Ford FAST, Mueller -14304, Romac SST, JCM -432 C.) N MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT DEVICE: (Megalug) Ebaa Iron Sales Inc. STAINLESS STEEL REPAIR CLAMPS: Smith -Blair -261, Ford FS1, Romac SS VALVES: (Resilient Seated Gate Valves) ANSI /AWWA — C509 Clow F -2640, Kennedy 1571 -X, Mueller Resilient Seat - A- 2360 -20, American Flow Control - AFC -500, or U.S. Pipe Metro Seal 250 #5460 VALVES: (Butterfly) ANSI /AWWA C504, Class 150B Clow, Pratt, Mueller, American Darling, Kennedy, M & H, or DeZurik VALVES: (Tapping) Clow — F -2640, Mueller — T- 2360 -16, Kennedy 4950, U.S. Pipe Metro Seal 250 #5860, or American Flow Control -865 VALVE BOXES: Tyler — (Series 6855 & Item 666A, Range 51" to 71 ") East Jordan Series 8555 & Item 666A — Range 51" to 71" 02660 -16 HYDRANTS (4 %2" for 12" and under) (5'/4" for 16" and above) AWWA C502 Clow F -2545 Medallion, Kennedy Guardian K -81, Mueller Super Centurion 250, American Darling - MK 73 for 4 1/2" & B84 -B for 5 1/4" SLEEVE TYPE COUPLING: Standard solid black sleeve — Tyler/Union 5 -1442, Griffin Bolted Straight Coupling with stainless steel bolts and nuts — Smith -Blair 441 or Romac Style 501 STAINLESS STEEL REPAIR CLAMPS (with stainless steel bolts & nuts): Smith -Blair 261, Romac SS I or Ford FS 1 TRACER WIRE TERMINAL BOX (DAYLIGHT BOX): U.S. Filter WaterPro or Utility Equipment - Valvco —95E —2 %2" ID with lockable cast -iron lid — minimum 18" long, telescoping TRACER WIRE CONNECTORS: Twister DB Plus Wire Connector POLYWRAP; 8 mil pojyethylene encasement r WIRE. - #1,� solid copper- THHN insulation in yellow or orange FREE7eMLESS YARD HYDRANT: Woodfglil Mfg. Iowa Model Y34 and YI N 03/07 stiared�ensmecrlspecs- iiW2660.doc 02660 -17 SECTION 02665 WATER SERVICE WORK FOR CONTRACTORS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Furnish and install new water services and yard hydrants as indicated and specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Section 02660: Water Distribution 1,03 REFERENCES: A. This specification references the following documents. In their latest edition, the referenced documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. B. City of Iowa City Water Division: 1. Tap Installation, Metering Policies & Charges and General Informatiop, C. American National Standards Institute and American Water Works Combined Standards.:" 1. ANSI/AWWA -C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. 3 D. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. ASTM B75 -86 Seamless Copper Tubing. 1,04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit to the Engineer the following drawings or details for approval 4 weeks prior to installation. Sworn certificates of shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard for all piping materials. 2. Working drawing or site plan with customer location, address, size, and materials of water service and main pipe including a full list of materials required from the Iowa City Water Division, as applicable. 02665 -1 1.05 PERMITS: A. City of lowa City: 1. Contractor's superintendent on the job must have a license as a sewer and water service installer issued by the City to construct water and sewer mains and services in Iowa City. 2. The Contractor or their agent will be responsible for the tapping application forms and records. 1.06 TIME: A. Time is of the essence for water service work. All required work must be completed as quickly as possible to minimize inconvenience to the consumers. The Contactor is expected to comply with the minimum response and completion times listed. B. Amount of advance notice required to the Iowa City Water Division when materials or services are supplied by the Division are listed below. Serve notice to the Water Division at 356 -5160. For tapping service, provide 24 hours notice. For notice to customers of disruption of water service, provide 48 hours notice. p. -0, , — ,�, • For supply of materials for less than 20 units, provide 2 weeks notice. M " °' For supply of materials for more than 20 units, provide 4 -6 weeks notice. I o_ -- r For supply of seldom used materials such as galvanized or lead, provide 4 -6 weeks g, yr i notice. o F-v For locations of underground facilities, provide 48 hours notice. 0 N C. Response Time - the maximum time allowed from telephone notice by the Engineer until the Contactor is on the job and ready to begin work: 1. For 1 service which is planned work, less than 24 -36 hours. 2. For 1 service which is emergency work, less than 4 -6 hours. 3. For 3 or more services which are planned work, less than 48 hours. D. Completion Time - the maximum time allowed from the time the Contactor turns off the water until the water service is connected and operational under normal circumstances: For 1 service, where it is necessary to break and remove concrete with no prior warning or planning, less than 12 hours. 2. For 6 -8 services or more in one block area with prior planning, some services on each side of the street and in conjunction with paving projects, less than a 12 -hour workday. 02665 -2 1.07 1VORIC ONPRIVATE PROPERTYFOR OTHL *RS: A. Water service work may be necessary or desired by private property owners at the same time as the new water service work under this contract is done. The Contractor will be allowed to work on private property adjacent to the work site in order to do water service work directly for the private property owner. Work on private property shall not adversely affect the time schedule for work under this contract. B. The work on private property will not be the responsibility of the City. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER SERVICE MATERIALS A. All water service materials shall meet or exceed current ANST/AW WA -C800 specifications and shall be made in accordance with ASTM B -62. The manufacturer shall furnish a certificate indicating all new materials meet the specifications. All valves, fittings and pipe shall be inspected several times during the manufacturing process and pressure tested with air under water before shipment. All water service materials shall be visually inspected before installation. Brass and copper are soft metals and care in handling shall be exercised to avoid damaging threads or distorting piping, valves or fitting bodies. B. Water service brass for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. The Contractor shall use the brass goods furnished by the Walter Division on work under this contract only and not on private property. t `U C. All water service lines will be furnished and installed by the Conti-actor Material shall be new type K copper in coils for sizes 3/4 -inch through 1' /z -inch and in coils orUraight pipe for 2 -inch size. No couplings or connections will be permitted under the paving. D. Curb boxes for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. E. Couplings for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. F. Materials purchased from the City Water Division are available at the Water Division at 330 North Madison Street during normal working hours. The Water Division will provide an accounting for materials supplied and the Contractor will be required to keep records of materials used at each service connection. G. Yard hydrant assembly will be furnished by the Contractor. 02665 -3 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDS AND DOCUMENTS: A. Contractor must prepare and retain a set of "as- built' drawings on the job site with accurate and current information on the location of all water service valves, pipe and special construction features. Examples of special construction features include: Offsets in alignment. 2. Changes in depth and depth greater than 8 feet or less than 5 feet. 3. Special fittings or construction materials. Following completion of the project, a copy of these drawings shall be furnished to the Water Division. 3.02 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. The Engineer may mark materials found on the job site which are determined to be c� defective or not approved. The marking may be done with spray paint. The Contractor shall =, promptly remove defective or unapproved materials from the site and replaced with new. U $,,�3 ' E'XCAVATIONAND BACRFILL: A• All excavators shall comply with the requirements of the O.S.H.A Standards subpart P- 9. Excavations. M. Earth excavation, backfrll, fill and grading shall be in accordance with Section 02220. C. Excavation and backfill shall include all excavation, backfilling, compacting, stockpiling of surplus material on the site, and all other work incidental to the construction of trenches, including any additional excavation which may be required for construction of the water service lines. D. Along the proposed water service lines, the Contractor shall remove the surface materials only to such widths as will permit a hole or trench to be excavated which will afford sufficient room for proper construction. Paving removals shall be as directed by the Engineer E. The Engineer shall approve removal limits. F. Where working space permits, holes or trenches may be excavated by machine, provided that by so doing, public and private improvements will not be subjected to an unreasonable amount of damage. The size of the hole shall be as small as reasonably possible to do the work. If, however, excavation by machine methods cannot be made without damage being done to public and private improvements, hand excavation shall be employed. G. The Contractor shall use a mole for excavation of a hole to place the water service piping, '' /<" to 2" diameter, at any location under a street surface, driveway, sidewalk or lawn area whenever the distance from the water main to the water service connection is greater than 20 feet. The mole shall be used even though the street surface has been removed so as to 02665 -4 protect the new street surface from settlement. The mole shall be a maximum of four inches in diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision for mole excavation. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the location of all buried utilities and for all damage or repairs to utilities caused by mole excavation. Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to explore and excavate to determine the best line and grade for the construction of the new water service line or to locate an existing water service which must be disconnected, the Contractor shall make explorations and excavations for such purposes. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Fire hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, or other utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters shall be kept clear and adequate provisions shall be made for sheet drainage. Natural watercourses shall not be obstructed. K. The Contractor shall provide and maintain ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering excavations or depressions until all work has been completed. No sanitary sewer shall be used for disposal of water. L. To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, fencing, construction signs, caution lights and guards as required shall be placed and rpaintained by the Contractor at excavations during the progress of the construction work and until it is safe for pedestrian and vehicular traffic to use the roads, sidewalks and facilities—All material piles, equipment and pipe which may serve as obstructions shill be enclose by fences or barricades and shall be protected by proper lights when the visibility it poor: Tate rules and regulations of O.S.H.A. and appropriate authorities for safety prbvisins shall be observed. M. Trees, shrubbery, fences, poles and all other property and structures shall be, protected during construction operations unless their removal for purposes of construction is authorized by the Engineer. Any fences, poles, or other improvements which are removed or disturbed by the Contractor shall be restored to the original condition after construction is completed. Any trees, shrubbery or other vegetation which are approved for removal or ordered for removal by the Engineer shall be removed completely, including stumps and roots. The Contactor shall be responsible for any damage caused by construction operations to shrubbery or other landscape improvements which were not authorized for removal by the Engineer. 02665 -5 3.04 WATER SERVICE CONSTRUCTION. A. The City Water Division will not provide labor and equipment to tap the water main for services 2 inches and smaller. Each water service pipe shall be connected to the water main through a brass corporation stop. A tapping saddle is required on all PVC water main materials. The plastic plug shall be recovered. The main shall be tapped at an angle of forty-five degrees (450) with the vertical, if possible. The stop must be turned so that the T- handle will be on top. B. The old water service under the street right -of -way will be shut off and removed. C. The Contractor shall install the new copper service line from the new corporation stop to the new curb stop and from the curb stop to the customer service line near the property line. The size will be determined by the Water Division. The minimum size will be 1 -inch to the stop box. The service pipe shall be laid in the mole hole excavation and in the trench with sufficient weaving to allow not less than one foot extra length for each 50 feet of straight line distance. D. Underground water service pipe shall be laid not less than ten (10) feet horizontally from the building drain, and shall be separated by undisturbed or compacted earth. Where the horizontal separation cannot be met, the water service pipe shall be installed so the bottom `Q of the water service pipe is at least eighteen (18) inches above the top of the building drain 1inP at its highest point. !- J P M :_� -curb stop shall be furnished and installed for each service at the location shown on the 1 plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Place a brick or masonry block under each curb box r'— = vflve. A cast iron service box shall be furnished and installed over the curb stop and held in ar%uly vertical position, until sufficient backfill has been placed to ensure permanent vertical alignment of the box. The top of the box shall be adjusted and set flush with the ` finished surface grade. The curb stop shall be located between the curb and the property line and visible from the sidewalk. F. The Contractor shall make a clean cut on the existing service line and connect the new service line at the location as directed by the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for visual inspection of all water service materials used in this work. If water pressure is available or will be available within 24 hours of making the new service connection, the new service shall be subjected to normal system pressure and visually inspected for leaks. If any leaks appear, the Contractor shall make repairs. Each water service shall be turned on and observed by the Contractor within the premises to verify adequate pressure and flow. 11/00 sharedlenpineercpecs- id02665.doc 02665 -6 SECTION 02700 SEWERS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• A. Construction of piping and structures for the collection and transmission of wastewater and storm water. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Sanitary and Storm Sewers 1. ASTM C76, latest edition, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe. 2. ASTM C443, latest edition, Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Culvert and Sewer Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. 3. ASTM C361, latest edition, Standard Specification for Rein %icte�l Ccncrete..W- Head Pressure Pipe. v B. Reinforced Concrete Arch Pipe - For Storm Sewers 1. ASTM C506, latest edition, Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe 1. ASTM C700, latest edition, Standard Specification for Vitrified -Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. 2. ASTM C425, latest edition, Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified -Clay Pipe and Fittings. D. Ductile Iron Pipe ANSIIAWWA-A21.5/C 15 1, latest edition, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand -Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. 2. ANSI/AWWA- A21.50/C150, latest edition, Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. 3. ANSI/AWWA- A21.53/C153, latest edition, Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 16 in., for Water and Other Liquids. 4. ANSI/AWWA- A21.1 1/C111, latest edition, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Gray -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 02700 -1 5. ANSI/AWWA- A21.4/C104, latest edition, Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. E. Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — For Sanitary Sewer Service Lines I. ASTM D1784, latest edition, Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 2. ASTM D2321, latest edition, Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 3. ASTM D2729, latest edition, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4. ASTM D3034, latest edition, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 5. ASTM D3212, latest edition, Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals F. PVC Truss Pipe — For Sanitary Sewers G. Force Main See Section 02710 for force main specifications. Pressure testing requirements for force main are under Part 3 of this specification. H. Manholes 1. ASTM C478, latest edition, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. I. hitake Structures 1. IDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Iowa Department of Transportation Highway Division "Standard Road Plans Manual ", latest edition. 1.03 QUALZTYASSURANCE: A. All products will meet or exceed the minimum standards specified in the applicable 02700 -2 1. ASTM D1784, latest edition, Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds i _ r : Z. ASTM D2321, latest edition, Recommended Practiice for Underground Installation P-1 _ of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. ...=7 M.. ASTM D2680, latest edition, Standard Specification for Acrylonih-ile- Butadiene- L Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping 0 4. ASTM F477, latest edition, Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe G. Force Main See Section 02710 for force main specifications. Pressure testing requirements for force main are under Part 3 of this specification. H. Manholes 1. ASTM C478, latest edition, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. I. hitake Structures 1. IDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Iowa Department of Transportation Highway Division "Standard Road Plans Manual ", latest edition. 1.03 QUALZTYASSURANCE: A. All products will meet or exceed the minimum standards specified in the applicable 02700 -2 references listed in the previous subsection. B. All suppliers of reinforced concrete pipe and manholes must be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation. C. Reinforced concrete pipe shall be manufactured by such means to minimize cage twist. Pipe displaying cage twist in excess of 30 degrees, as demonstrated by the form seam, will be rejected. D. Details of gasket installation and joint assembly are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. E. All materials judged to be of poor quality will be marked by the Engineer and promptly removed from the site by the Contractor and replaced with new. F. All pipe must pass the leakage tests specified in Part 3 of this section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Concrete Pipe: Submit current Iowa Department of Transportation certification. B. Vitrified -Clay Pipe: Submit shop drawings of gasket installation and joint assembly. C. Shoring: Submit plans for all shoring, excluding trench boxes, certified by a professional engineer registered in the State of Iowa. This submittal will not be reviewed fo structural adequacy by the City. C7 cn PART 2 - PRODUCTS -� 2.01 MATERIALS: 7 E 1 u A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Sanitary and Storm Sewers 1. Joints: All joints will be confined O -ring gasket meeting ASTM C443)or ASTM C361, as specified. All pipe 36 -inch diameter and smaller will have bell and spigot joints. Pipe larger than 36 -inch diameter may have tongue and groove joints. 2. Wall Thickness: Minimum wall thickness will be B -wall as defined in ASTM C76 or Class C25 as defined in ASTM C361. 3. Pipe Strength: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III as defined in ASTM C76 or as defined in ASTM C361. 4. Pipe Markings: All pipe shall be marked with the date of manufacture and ASTM class. If quadrant reinforcement is used, the top shall be marked on the outside of the pipe. 5. Lift holes are not allowed. 6. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C 12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Storm Sewers 02700 -3 I . Joints a. Circular pipe: All joints will be confined O -ring or profile gasket meeting ASTM C443, All pipe 36 -inch diameter and smaller will have bell and spigot joints. Pipe larger than 36 -inch diameter may have tongue and groove joints. b. Arch pipe: All joints will be sealed with mastic butyl rubber -based sealant meeting the requirements of AASHTO M198 -75, Type 'B ". Wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric. 2. Wall Thickness a. Circular pipe: Minimum wall thickness will be B -wall as defined in ASTM C76. b. Arch pipe: Minimum wall thickness as defined for in ASTM C506. 3. Pipe Strength a. Circular pipe: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not 5. Lift holes are not allowed. 6. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C 12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe 1. Joints: Shop drawing of gasket installation and joint assembly, subject to approval of the Engineer. 2. All pipe shall be "extra strength" as defined by ASTM C700. 3. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. D. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: Use push on joints unless otherwise specified on the plans. 2. Thickness: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, use Class 52. 3. Lining and Coating: 02700 -4 specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III as defined in ASTM C76. b. Arch pipe: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III A as defined in ASTM C506. Pipe Markings: All pipe shall be marked with the date of manufacture and ASTM ° 0 class. If quadrant reinforcement is used, the top shall be marked on the outside of the pipe. 5. Lift holes are not allowed. 6. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C 12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe 1. Joints: Shop drawing of gasket installation and joint assembly, subject to approval of the Engineer. 2. All pipe shall be "extra strength" as defined by ASTM C700. 3. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. D. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: Use push on joints unless otherwise specified on the plans. 2. Thickness: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, use Class 52. 3. Lining and Coating: 02700 -4 a. Inside of pipe and fittings: Double thickness cement lining and bituminous seal coat conforming to ANSI A21.4. b. Outside of pipe and fittings: Standard bituminous coating conforming to appropriate ANSI. 4. Minimum Bedding — Type 5 per ANSI/AWWA CI50 /A21.50 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. E. PVC Truss Pipe —For Sanitary Sewers 1. All PVC truss pipe shall be made of PVC compound having a minimum cell classification of 12454 as defined in ASTM D1784. 2. Joints: Gaskets shall comply with all requirements in ASTM F477 and F913. Joint shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2680 and ASTM D3212. 3. Pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 200 psi at 5% deflection. 4. Minimum Bedding — Crushed stone encasement to the top of the pipe. The minimum bedding depth shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum bedding depth shall be 4" below the pipe. F. Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — For Sanitary Sewer Service Lines u 1. All PVC pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM DN34.c- 2. Joints: ASTM D3212 gasketed. 3. All 4" and 6" services shall be SDR 23.5. e rQ 4. Minimum Bedding — Crushed stone encasement to 6" above pipe. The minimum bedding depth shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum bedding depth shall be 4" below the pipe. G. Corrugated Plastic Pipe for Subsurface Drainage Corrugated PVC with a smooth interior wall shall meet the standards of ASTM F949 and be constructed of resins meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, cell class 12454B. 2. Corrugated HDPE with a smooth interior wall shall meet the standards of AASHTO M -252 and M -294. 3. Minimum Bedding — Drainable stone encasement to 6" above pipe. H. Force Main See Section 02710 for force main specifications. Pressure testing requirements for force main are under Part 3 of this specification. 02700 -5 I. Manholes Joints: All joints will be confined O -ring or profile gasket meeting ASTM C443. 2. No lift holes through the entire wall. 3. Mark date of manufacture. 4. Inverts: Precast and cast -in -place inverts must provide a channel at least one -half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross- sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in directions of inverts shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to supplement flow through the manholes. 5. All manholes are 4 -foot diameter unless noted otherwise. 6. Manhole frame and lid to be Neenah R -1670, self - sealing, East Jordan 1117, self - sealing or approved equal. If in paved area, casting shall also be non - rocking. 7. Manholes in paving shall have an interior Cretex chimney seal (or approved equal) that spans from the casting to the cone section. (9 I dding: L(. `'alit Granular bedding material shall consist of porous backfill material, IDOT Standard Specification Section 4131 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 29. fV8RT =c tiU'CUTION CD 3.01 ftySTALLATION OF PIPE: A. Inspect before installation. Remove and replace defective sections. B. Alignment and Grade Install to line and grade indicated on plans using laser and check elevation as required to maintain grade. 2. Driving down to grade by striking or with excessive force from excavating equipment is not allowed. 3. Blocking the pipe to grade with wood, stones or other materials is not allowed. C. Bedding 1. Support on compacted granular bedding material using the type of bedding specified on the plans. If no bedding is specified, use the minimum bedding specified in Part 2 of these specifications. 2. Place bedding material to ensure that there are no voids under or alongside the length of the pipe. Slice with shovel to remove voids. Compact with pneumatic equipment. 3. Hand shape bell holes so that only pipe barrel receives bearing pressure. 02700 -6 D. Connections 1. A -LOK shall be used for all sanitary sewer connections to manholes unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Subdrains shall be connected to storm sewer intakes and manholes using IDOT standard intake outlet detail RF -19C. CMP outlet shall be used unless approved by the Engineer. E. Jointing 1. Clean and lubricate all joints prior to assembly. 2. Join per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Suitable couplings shall be used for jointing dissimilar materials. F. Backfrll as specified in Section 02220. G. Clean pipeline upon completion. H. Tolerances I . Any deviation in a sewer pipes section more than 1/8 inch per foot of pipe diameter from the horizontal or vertical alignment, as established by the Engine ,will not be allowed; and all sewer laid incorrectly, as determined by the Engmeer; must be relaid at the Contractor's expense. This tolerance in grade will be allowed only if the sewer is designed at a slope sufficient to prevent backfall when its limits are teachq� Under no condition will a sewer be accepted when one or more pipe lengths have been installed without "fall ". 2. The completed sewer must be laid so nearly in a perfect line that an ordingry electric lantern held at center of the sewer at a manhole may be wholly visible to the eye at the level of the sewer at the next manhole. 3. Sags and reverse slope on gravity pipe is prohibited. Remove and relay pipe to proper grade. 3.02 TESTING OF PIPE: A. Lamp all pipe to visually inspect for defects and debris. B. Leakage Tests: Perform leakage tests on all sanitary sewers as follows: 1. Perform after completion of backfill. 2. Perform after groundwater has returned to normal level. 3. Furnish test plugs, water pumps, appurtenances, and labor. Install bulkheads for testing and weirs for measurement as necessary. Groundwater elevation from observation wells or excavations are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 02700 -7 a. If groundwater is more than two foot above top of pipe at upper end, conduct infiltration or low- pressure air tests. If maximum pressure exerted by groundwater is greater than 4 psig, conduct infiltration test. b. If groundwater is less than two foot above top of pipe at upper end, conduct exfiltration or low- pressure air tests. C. If pipe is larger than 27 -inch, air test is not allowed. 4. Exfiltration or infiltration test performed on sections of approved length (maximum %2 -mile for sewers) and before connection to buildings. Low - pressure air tests performed on manhole -to- manhole sections of pipeline. 5. - Low - pressure air test: a. Equipment (1) Designed for testing sewers using low - pressure air. (2) Provide air regulator or safety valve so air pressure does not (3) Introduce low- pressure air into sealed line and achieve internal air pressure 4 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe invert. (4) Limit internal pressure in sealed line below 8 psig. (5) Allow two minutes minimum for air pressure to stabilize. Disconnect low- pressure air hose from control panel. (6) Acceptable Test Result: (a) Minimum time for pressure to drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by ground water above pipe invert. Pipe diameter Time in in inches Minutes 4 2.0 6 3.0 02700 -8 exceed 8 psig. (3) All air through single control panel. b. Procedure . _ C'1 1 (1) Perform from manhole -to- manhole after backfill. o (2) Place pneumatic plugs: (a) sealing length: equal to or greater than pipe diameter, (b) capable of resisting internal test pressure N without external bracing or blocking. (3) Introduce low- pressure air into sealed line and achieve internal air pressure 4 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe invert. (4) Limit internal pressure in sealed line below 8 psig. (5) Allow two minutes minimum for air pressure to stabilize. Disconnect low- pressure air hose from control panel. (6) Acceptable Test Result: (a) Minimum time for pressure to drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by ground water above pipe invert. Pipe diameter Time in in inches Minutes 4 2.0 6 3.0 02700 -8 8 4.0 10 5.0 12 5.5 15 7.5 18 8.5 21 10.0 24 11.5 (b) Minimum allowable time for sewers with more than one size of pipe: based on largest diameter reduced by 0.5 min. (c) If groundwater level at time of testing is above the sewer, air pressure shall be increased 0.43 psig for each foot the groundwater is above the flow line of the pipe. C. If pressure drop exceeds 1.0 psig during the test period, the test shall be considered to have failed. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 6. Infiltration Test a. Dewater and conduct test for at least 24 hours. b. Locate and repair leaks, and retest as required. N C. Allowable infiltration, including manholes, fittings, ;and cg'pcctioh maximum 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per 24: hours. 1 7. Exfiltration Test a. Subject sewers to internal pressure by: (1) plugging the inlet of the upstream and downstream manholes, (2) filling sewer and upstream manhole with clean water until the water elevation in the manhole is two feet above top of sewer, or two feet above the existing ground water in the trench, whichever is the higher elevation. b. Use suitable ties, braces, and wedges to secure stoppers against leakage from test pressure, where conditions between manholes may result in test pressure causing leakage. C. Rate of leakage from sewer: Determined by the amount of water required to maintain the initial water elevation for one hour from the start of the test. d. Allowable exfiltration same as allowable infiltration. If the average head above the section being tested exceeds two feet above top of pipe, then the allowable exfiltration can be increased by 5% for each additional foot of head. C. Modification to this test only as approved by the Engineer. f. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 02700 -9 8. Force Main Pressure Testing a. Test liquid piping systems after filling with water in accordance with ANSUAWWA C600 for Pressure Piping; inspect all visible joints and valves for leakage after piping has been under pressure 24 hours. Minimum test pressure for the force main is 150 psi. b. Valve off, or otherwise isolate instruments, controls or other piping accessories which would be damaged by test pressure. c. Provide test pumps, test plugs, pipe, and gauges, and make required piping connections. d. Retest piping showing leakage; replace or repair defective pipe, fittings and valves disclosed during testes to satisfaction of Engineer. C. Deflection Tests: Perform deflection tests on all PVC truss sewers as follows: The mandrel (go /no -go) device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with nine (9) evenly spaced arms or prongs. The mandrel dimension shall be 95% of the flexible pipe's published ASTM average inside diameter. Allowances for pipe wall thickness or ovality (from shipment, heat, shipping loads, poor production, etc.) shall not be deducted from the ASTM average inside diameter, but shall be counted as part of the 5% allowance. The contact length of the mandrel's arms shall equal or exceed the nominal diameter of the sewer to be inspected. Critical mandrel dimensions shall carry a tolerance oft .001 ". Proving rings shall be available. The mandrel inspection shall be conducted no earlier- than 30 days after reaching final trench backfill grade provided, in the opinion of the Engineer, sufficient water densification or rainfall has occurred to thoroughly settle the soil throughout the entire trench depth. Short-term (tested 30 days after installation) deflection shall not exceed 5% of the pipe's average inside diameter. The mandrel shall be hand pulled by the Contractor through all sewer lines. Any sections of the sewer not passing the mandrel test shall be uncovered and the Contractor shall replace and recompact the embedment backfill material to the satisfaction of the Engineer. These repaired sections shall be retested with the go /no -go mandrel until passing. 3. The Engineer shall be responsible for approving the mandrel. Proving rings may be used to assist in this. Drawings of the mandrel with complete dimensioning shall be furnished by the Conti-actor to the Engineer for each diameter and type of flexible pipe. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES, MANHOLE BOXES AND INTAKE STRUCTURES: A. Set bases true to line and elevation on minimum six -inch granular backfill material. B. Install O -ring or profile gasket in joints between sections conforming to manufacturer's standard. C. Cast in place inverts must provide a channel at least one -half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross - sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in direction shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to supplement flow through the 02700 -10 c� ) 4 C) ems_., rl N The mandrel (go /no -go) device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with nine (9) evenly spaced arms or prongs. The mandrel dimension shall be 95% of the flexible pipe's published ASTM average inside diameter. Allowances for pipe wall thickness or ovality (from shipment, heat, shipping loads, poor production, etc.) shall not be deducted from the ASTM average inside diameter, but shall be counted as part of the 5% allowance. The contact length of the mandrel's arms shall equal or exceed the nominal diameter of the sewer to be inspected. Critical mandrel dimensions shall carry a tolerance oft .001 ". Proving rings shall be available. The mandrel inspection shall be conducted no earlier- than 30 days after reaching final trench backfill grade provided, in the opinion of the Engineer, sufficient water densification or rainfall has occurred to thoroughly settle the soil throughout the entire trench depth. Short-term (tested 30 days after installation) deflection shall not exceed 5% of the pipe's average inside diameter. The mandrel shall be hand pulled by the Contractor through all sewer lines. Any sections of the sewer not passing the mandrel test shall be uncovered and the Contractor shall replace and recompact the embedment backfill material to the satisfaction of the Engineer. These repaired sections shall be retested with the go /no -go mandrel until passing. 3. The Engineer shall be responsible for approving the mandrel. Proving rings may be used to assist in this. Drawings of the mandrel with complete dimensioning shall be furnished by the Conti-actor to the Engineer for each diameter and type of flexible pipe. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES, MANHOLE BOXES AND INTAKE STRUCTURES: A. Set bases true to line and elevation on minimum six -inch granular backfill material. B. Install O -ring or profile gasket in joints between sections conforming to manufacturer's standard. C. Cast in place inverts must provide a channel at least one -half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross - sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in direction shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to supplement flow through the 02700 -10 structure. D. Plug holes for handling with mortar. E. Lay grading rings in full bed and joint of mortar without subsequent grouting, flushing or filling; bond thoroughly. F. Set frames with top conforming to finished ground or pavement surface as indicated and directed. Grading rings plus the frame height shall not exceed 24 inches. G. Set frames in full bed of RAM -NEK or equal to fill and make watertight space between masonry top and bottom flange of frame. H. Backfill as specified in Section 02220. Clean manhole upon completion. J. Inspect for visible leaks after groundwater has returned to normal level. Repair leaks. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW.• A. Storm Sewers: At the end of each working day, the Contractor shall reestablish the full capacity of any drainage system affected by construction. Diversion of storm v4t r into the sanitary sewer system is not allowed. - - °- �� o rn ii B. Sanitary Sewers: The Contractor shall at all times maintain full capacity in the sanit�aPy sewer system and protect the system from storm water. C. If pumps are used for the diversion of flow, the Contractor shall have a stand -by pump readily at hand. The Contractor shall provide the Police Department and the Supervisor of the Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Plant with phone numbers where the responsible person may be reached 24 hours a day to make immediate repairs and/or replacement in case of diversion system failure. Diversion of sanitary sewage to storm sewers or waterways is not allowed. 3.05 CONFLICTS A. Provide temporary support for existing water, gas, telephone, power or other utilities or services that cross the trench. B. Compact backfrll under the existing utility crossing as specified in Section 02200. C. Separate gravity sewers from water mains by horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 1. Top of sewer is at least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main. 2. Sewer is placed in separate trench or in same trench on bench of undisturbed earth with at least three feet separation form the water main. D. Use water main materials for gravity sewers with less than 10 feet of horizontal distance and top of the sewer less than 18 inches below the bottom of the water main; maintain a linear separation of at least two feet. 02700 -11 E. Where gravity sewer crosses over water main or service or where the top of sewer is less than 18 inches below the bottom of the water main or service, the following requirements shall apply: 1. The sewer may not be placed closer than 6 inches below a water main or 18 inches above a water main. The separation distance shall be the maximum feasible in all cases. 2. Use 20 -foot length of water main material as specified for gravity sewer centered on the water main. Both joints shall be located as far from the water main as possible. 3. The sewer and the water main must be adequately supported and have watertight joints. 4. Backfill trench with low permeability soil for the 20 -foot length centered on the crossing. F. Sanitary sewer force mains and water mains shall be separated by a horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 1. The force main is constructed of water main material meeting a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. 2. The force main is laid at least four linear feet from the water main. rr 06/03 : shared4ngineGr�syecs- ji102J00�doc C7 W 0 N 02700 -12 SECTION 02710 GRINDER PUMP STATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 Contractor shall supply and install a Barnes Simplex or E -One Model 3F53 Simplex factory pre - wired 36" dia. By 96" tall grinder pump station with the grinder pump, 50' of electrical cable and the grinder pump control panel. 1.02 General layout of the grinder pump station installation is shown on the plans. 1.03 After installation of the Grinder Pump Station, coordinate with Iowa City Public Works Department for start up of the grinder pump station. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GRINDER PUMP STATION N C7 A. Install Grinder Pump Station as shown on plans and in full compliane�cit�i mnufacturers installation manual. 7% o B. The Contractor is responsible to install ballast to prevent buoyancy. c') - C i d u C. Required ballast is a minimum of 1.2 CY of concrete. i S�AAA P -p D. Design duty point is 27gpm at a TDH of 74.80 feet. Minimum HP required is 2 HP. 2.02 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The required electrical service is 2 circuits. The first circuit is a 3 wire, 220 volt circuit with a ground; 25 amp. Minimum service from the marina's electrical distribution panel. The second circuit is a 3 wire, 110 volt circuit, 15 amp. Service from marina's electrical distribution panel. B. Install 30 amp. non -fused disconnect switch on side of the building near the grinder station for the 220 volt circuit. C. Install a 1 pole toggle switch on the side of the 30 amp. non -fused disconnect switch for the 110 volt circuit. 2.03 GRAVITYSEWER LINE A. Pipe: 4" Schedule 40 PVC pipe. B. Install the gravity sewer line from the marina building to the grinder pup station at the grade allowable by building code. Cut inlet opening in tank in the recommended inlet zone as required in the manufacturers installation manual and install hub. 02710 -1 204 PRESSUREDISCHARGELINE A. Forcemain to be I Yz" high density, polyethylene (14DPE), AWWA C901 DR 11 200 psi, IPS pipe size, or 1 Y2" SCh. 40 PVC. B. Install pressure discharge line from the grinder pump station to the discharge manholes shown on Sheet SP -3. Install check valve and shut -off valve as shown on the plans. 2.05 CHECK VALVE A. Check valve PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, polyvinylchloride ASTM D1784, Buna -N Flapper, stainless steel hardware, manufacturer R & G Sloane, Chemnrol, or equal. B. Install check valve next to shut off valve as shown on the plans. 2.06 SHUT OFF VALVE 2.07 A. Valve type; IPS (OD) or use PE pipe, SDR 11; working pressure 200 psi; CEPEX Performance Series curb stop or equal. B. Install shut off valve next to check valve as shown on the plans. C. Valve box and over; valve box to conform with SUDAS except valve box cover marked "S" for sanitary sewage. GRINDER PUMP CONTROL PANEL A. Install grinder pump control panel on the wall of the marina building next to the disconnect switch. Install 1/4" PVC conduit with 3 conductors for 220 volt circuit and 3 conductors for the 110 volt circuit from disconnect switch to grinder pump control panel. r-� N 1. The location of the ginder pump control panel must be located in an accessible location for service personnel. B. Connect the electrical cable for grinder pump power supply and the float control cables to the grinder pump control panel as shown on the wiring schematic in manufacturers installation manual. 1. Remove the jumper to convert the grinder pump control panel to a 2 circuit power supply. PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED 02710 -2 SECTION 02751 DIRECTIONAL BORING AND DRILLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Fumish labor, materials, tools and equipment to install carrier pipe by directional boring and drilling. B. This specification covers thrust - restrained Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. Pipe is intended for use in pressure - related potable water delivery systems. C. Pipe material including carrier pipe and fittings will be provided by the City of Iowa City. D. Boring pits will be excavated and backfilled by the City of Iowa City. 1.02 REFERENCES: o E3 A, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and chlorinated PVC Compounds n , 2. ASTM D2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials 3. ASTM D3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 4. ASTM F477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Jointing Plastic Pipe B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) AWWA C900: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 12 inch, for Water 2. AWWA C906 -99: Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch, for Water Distribution and Transmission C. American Railway Engineering Association "Specifications for Pipelines Conveying Non - Flammable Substances," latest edition D. Iowa Department of Transportation (]DOT) Standard Specifications, latest edition 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 02751 -1 A. Carrier Pipe Materials: To be provided by the City of Iowa City Water Division B. Boring Pit: To be provided by the City of Iowa City Water Division C. When boring is complete, contractor shall provide Engineer with a plan and profile of the bore path. D. Record and submit notes of actual boring operations with field load conditions. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Only workers experienced in boring and jacking operations shall be used to perform the work. Statement of qualifications shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to the start of work. B. Provide efficient, useful monitoring devices on the equipment so the operator and Engineer can compare the field conditions with the design and effectively monitor the loads on the pipe as it is being installed. C. Engineer will survey and record top of pavement elevations before and after boring operations as necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CARRIER PIPE MATERIALS: Q. '-'PVC pipe for directional boring shall be C900/RJ. PVC restrained joint pipe (Certa -lok) 4rom CertainTeed Corporation will be supplied by the City of Iowa City Water Division. CJ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES: A. City of Iowa City will locate underground facilities via potholing at critical locations. B. Contractor is responsible for modifying boring operations to prevent damage to existing facilities. 3.02 DIRECTIONAL BORING EQUIPMENT: A. The drilling equipment shall be capable of placing the pipe as shown on the plans. The installation shall be by a steerable drilling tool capable of installing continuous runs of pipe without intermediate pits, a minimum distance of 400 feet. B. The directional boring machine shall be supplied with an output signal inside the housing of the drill bit. The output signal shall have a constant output signal to allow a person to track the location of the beacon at all times. C. The drilling machine shall be equipped with a drilling fluid compatible for the onsite conditions. 02751 -2 D. The directional head shall be capable of accepting a variety of cutting bits for varied soil conditions. 3.03 CONTROL OF LINE AND GRADE: A. Engineer will provide control surveying and grade stakes as necessary. Engineer will survey and record top of pavement or rail elevations before and after boring operations as necessary. B. During the installation of carrier pipes, the Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring alignment and elevation of said pipes. The Contractor shall provide control points, reference marks and equipment for this purpose. The drill bit shall be located a maximum of every 5 feet. The operator of the drilling unit shall check the bore path and position of boring pit at every five feet and make necessary correction to stay along the alignment. C. Allowable deviations from the plan alignment and elevation are as follows: 1. The guidance system shall be capable of installing pie within 1 -1/2 inch of the plan vertical dimensions and 2 inches of the plan horizontal dimensions. 2. In addition, care shall be taken to assure that continuous positive or negative grads, as shown on the plans, are maintained in the installed carrier pipe. 3. The Contractor shall be required to remove and reinstall pipes whic�r vary in depth and alignment from these tolerances. 3.04 PILOT HOLE INSTALLATIONS: ' E i A. The pilot hole shall be drilled along the path shown on the project plans B. At the completion of the pilot hole drilling, the Contractor shall provide a tabulation of coordinates, including elevation data, referenced to the drilled point entry, which accurately describe the location of the pilot hole. C. Pilot hole alignment shall be accepted and approved by the Engineer prior to reaming and pipe installation. 3.05 REAM and PULL BACK OPERATIONS: A. Reaming shall be sufficient to prevent damage to pipe or pipe crossing. B. The maximum allowable tensile load imposed on the pipeline pull section shall not exceed 90% of the product of the Specific Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe and the area of the pipe section, or as specified by the pipe manufacturer. C. A swivel shall be used to connect the pipeline pull section to the reaming assembly to minimize torsional stress imposed on the section. D. The pipeline pull section shall be supported as it proceeds during pull back so that it moves freely and the pie and pipe coating are not damaged. E. The pipeline pull section shall be installed in the ream hole in such a manner that external 02751 -3 pressures are minimized. F. In case of a pull back where the bore hole will be abandoned or where voids are created, the Contractor shall fill voids with grout injected under pressure using approved methods. 3.06 DIRECTIONAL BORING OPERATIONS: A. The drilling machine shall be set up at such a location to avoid disruption of private yard and landscaping. B. Pipes shall be joined before being subjected to the boring process, or after they have reached final position, depending on the type of pipe and nature of the joint and jointing material. C. The method of boring, in each case, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the governing agency. D. Once boring has been started, it shall be continuous until completion of the boring operations in order to reduce the possibility of a so- called "stuck" pipe and to minimize the creep of the soil into the face, even though this may involve working outside the normal c1 i working days. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for effort required to maintain continuous boring operations. The Engineer reserves the right to "R r waive the requirement for continuous boring if such waiver is approved by the appropriate governing agency. p C r E. Care shall be taken during boring operations to ensure that the pipe remains true to line and grade. F. No open cut within boring limits shown on the plans shall be permitted without written authorization of the Engineer and the governing agency. G. Pull back forces shall not exceed the allowable pulling forces for the pipe being installed H. The drilling fluid, such as bentonite, shall be used for lubricating the pipe during pull -back, forcing spoils out of the pipe pit, assisting in holding the hole open during pull back, and hardening into a clay substance around the outside of the conduit, preventing settlement of the ground. Adequate drilling fluids shall be used to avoid a "hydra- lock" condition. Disposal of excess fluid and spoils shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any damage to property, landscaping or trees caused by Contracot's operation shall be replaced to the Owner's satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Contractor shall make necessary provisions to keep water and soil out of the installed piping systems. K. Obstructions to the progress of the pipe, such as roots, boulders or portions of former structures, shall be removed and deviations from line and grade shall be avoided if such deviation will result in ill- fitting joints. The use of explosives for removing obstructions is prohibited. 02751 -4 3.07 RESTRAINED JOINT PVC PIPE ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION: A. Follow manufacture's instructions and recommendations for assembly and installation. B. Prevent dirt from getting into the couplings and, especially, the gasket grooves. If dirt does get into the gasket grooves, the gaskets must be removed and cleaned, and the grooves must be cleaned, and the gaskets then reinserted before they can be installed into the pipes. C. When pulling in restrained joint PVC pipe, do not exceed the maximum recommended pulling or bending limits for the pipe. When the pull -in is complete, apply pushing forces to each end of the pipeline to relieve any stretch that may be remaining. 3.08 CARRIER PIPE INSTALLATION.- A. The carrier pipes shall be the class, type and size as indicated on the plans and specified herein. This will be supplied by the City of Iowa City Water Division. B. If the plans call for the carrier pipe to be installed without a casing pipe, the requirements for installation of casing pipe as detailed herein shall apply. This shall include filling of voids between undisturbed embankment and outside of pipe with specified grout. 3.09 SEALING: A. After installation of carrier pipes within casing pipes, the Contractor shall seal ends of casing pipes with weak concrete bulkheads a minimum of one -foot thick or manufactured end seals as indicated. 3.10 TESTING: A. Testing procedures for carrier pipe shall follow those outlined in Sections 02660 — Water Distribution. " 06/06 sharedkngineerls,wc AP0275 Ldw END OF SECTION 02751 -5 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART 1- GENERAL 1,01 SUMMARY.- A. Plantings (trees, shrubs, seed and sod), including soil preparation, finish grading, landscape accessories and maintenance. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the Engineer and /or the City Forester with the following requirements: I Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformity with U.S.D.A. listings and those of established nursery supplies. 2. Standards: All trees must conform to the standards established by the American Association of Nurserymen. B. The Contractor shall repair or replace all plantings which, in the judgment of the Engineer and /or City Forester, have not survived and grown in a satisfactory manner for a period of one year after City Council acceptance of the project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Certify that all plantings are free of disease and insect pests. Certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer and /or City Forester. B. Submit certification of seed mixtures, purity, germinating value, and crop year identification to the Engineer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING: A. Protect all plantings in transit to site to prevent wind burning of foliage. B. Set all balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, which cannot be planted immediately, on ground and protect with soil, wet peat moss or other acceptable material, and water as required by weather conditions. C. Keep container grown trees and shrubs, which cannot be planted immediately, moist by adequate watering. Water before planting. 02900 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES AND SHRUBS: A. Trees and shrubs shall be vigorous, healthy, well - formed, with dense, fibrous and large root systems and free of insect or mechanical damage. B. All trees and shrubs, except those specified as container grown, shall be balled in burlap with root ball formed of firm earth from original and undisturbed soil. At a minimum, 80% of all plantable containers shall be removed during planting. C. All trees shall display the following form and branching habits: 1. Free of branches to a point at 50% of their height. 2. Contain a minimum of six (6) well placed branches, not including the leader. 2.03 SOD: A. Grass and sod established, nursery grown Kentucky or Merion Bluegrass sod, vigorous, well rooted, healthy turf, free from disease, insect pests, weeds and other grasses, stones, and any other harmful or deleterious matter. B. Sod harvested by machine at uniform soil thickness of approximately one inch but not less than 3/4 of an inch. Measurement for thickness excludes top growth and thatch. Prevent tearing, breaking, drying or any other damage. 02900 -2 D. Trees shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk six inches (6 ") above ground. E. Trees which have no leader or have a damaged or crooked leader, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees shall be freshly dug. 2.02 SEED: Minimum Proportion Lbs./ Lbs./ CO Mix by Weight Acre 1,000 sq.ft. URBAN MIX* t 1 -1 Kentucky Blue Grass 70% 122.0 2.80 da. Cl) Perennial Rygrass (fine leaf variety) 10% 18.0 0.40 ' Creeping Red Fescue 20% 35.0 0.80 RURAL MIX* Kentucky 31 Fescue 54% 25 0.57 Switchgrass (Black Well) 17% 8 0.18 Alfalfa (Northern Grown) 11% 5 0.11 Birdsfoot Trefoil (Empire) 9% 4 0.09 Alsike Clover 9% 4 0.09 *A commercial mix may be used upon approval of the Engineer if it contains a high percentage of similar grasses. 2.03 SOD: A. Grass and sod established, nursery grown Kentucky or Merion Bluegrass sod, vigorous, well rooted, healthy turf, free from disease, insect pests, weeds and other grasses, stones, and any other harmful or deleterious matter. B. Sod harvested by machine at uniform soil thickness of approximately one inch but not less than 3/4 of an inch. Measurement for thickness excludes top growth and thatch. Prevent tearing, breaking, drying or any other damage. 02900 -2 2.04 LIME AND FERTILIZER: A. Ground agriculture limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. B. Fertilizer shall contain the following percentages by weight or as approved by Engineer: Nitrogen* - 15% Phosphorus - 15% Potash - I SC/ *At least 50 percent of nitrogen derived from natural organic sources of urzpform. PART 3 - EXECUTION `a 3.01 PLANTING TREES AND SHR UBS: A, Planting Season and Completion Date: Trees: Spring —March 30 through May 15 Fall — Sept. 18 through Nov. 18 2. The Contractor may plant outside the limits of such dates with permission of the City Forester. The City Forester may stop or postpone planting during these dates if weather conditions are such that plant materials may be adversely affected. B. The planting shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedures of planting and under the constant supervision of a qualified planting supervisor. C. Tree and shrub placement shall be as shown on the plans. D. Contractor shall inform the City Forester of the starting date and location. All planting soil must be approved by the City Forester before use. E. Excavate with vertical sides and in accordance with following requirements: Excavate tree pits to a minimum of two feet greater in diameter than root ball of tree. 2. Plant shrubs in pits 18 inches greater in width than diameter of root ball or container. 3. Do not use auger to excavate planting pits. F. Set trees and shrubs in center of pits, align with planting plan, plumb and straight and at elevation where the root collar (root to stem transition zone) is visible at ground level with the first main order lateral roots at or slightly below (1" to 2 ") this point. For the purpose of this contract, the root collar is defined as the point immediately above where the first main order lateral roots attach to the stem. 02900 -3 G. Compact topsoil mixture thoroughly around base of root ball to fill all voids. Soil shall be backfilled in layers and each successive layer shall be slightly tamped before the next layer is placed. Backfill tree and shrub pits halAvay with planting soil mixture and remove all exposed burlap, wires, and lacing from the top half of the root ball. Do not pull burlap or wire from under the root ball. Thoroughly puddle before further backfilling tree or shrub pit. Construct earthen saucer ring at finish grade as per planting detail. Excess soil shall be removed from the site. Thoroughly water each tree or shrub upon completion of backfill and construction of saucer ring. H. Rake bed area smooth and neat. Mulch all tree pits and shrub beds with a minimum of three inches of hardwood mulch which has been approved by the City Forester. I. The contractor shall perform a final watering of all plant material upon completion of planting operations. The contractor shall notify the City Forester upon commencement of final watering. J. Upon notification by the City Forester, the contractor will be required to immediately remove, replace, and replant plant material found not planted in accordance to the prescribed procedures above. 3.02 PLANTINGSOILMIXTURE: A. Backfill material for plantings shall be a mixture of 2/3 loose friable topsoil and 1/3 clean sand. All backfill shall have a uniform appearance and shall be loose, friable, and free of hard clods and rock over two inches in diameter. 3.03 SEED, FERTILIZE, LIME AND MULCH. A. Apply lime by mechanical means at rate of 3,000 pounds per acre. c 3. Apply fertilizer at rate of 450 pounds per acre. C. Seed Areas: 1 - -. Remove weeds or replace loam and reestablish finish grades if any delays in seeding lawn areas allow weeds to grow on surface or loam is washed out prior to sowing seed. This work will be at the Contractor's expense. 2; Sow seed at rate of 175 pounds per acre on calm day, by mechanical means. Sow 0 one -half of seed in one direction, and other one -half at right angles to original N direction: 3. Rake seed lightly into loam to depth of not more than '/a -inch and compact by means of an acceptable lawn roller weighing 100 to 150 pounds per linear foot of width. 4. Hydro - seeding may be used upon approval of the Engineer. D. Water lawn area adequately at time of sowing and daily thereafter with fine spray until germination, and continue as necessary throughout maintenance and protection period. E. Seed during approximate time periods of April I to May 15 and August 15 to September 15, and only when weather and soil conditions are suitable for such work, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 02900 -4 F. All areas requiring mulch shall be mulched as soon as seed is sown and final rolling is completed. Mulch shall be evenly and uniformly distributed and anchored into the soil. The application rate for reasonably dry material shall be approximately 11/z tons of dry cereal straw, two tons of wood excelsior, or two tons of prairie hay per acre, or othetabproved material, depending on the type of material furnished. All accessible mulched areas's"hall,be consolidated by tilling with a mulch stabilizer, and slope areas shall be tilled, on" tile, 5 contour. Crawler -type or dual -wheel tractors shall be used for the mulchiiig�/olSeration - Equipment shall be operated in a manner to minimize displacement of the n l,�0d y.. disturbance of the design cross section. : fr <; G. Apply additional care as necessary to ensure a hearty stand of grass at the end of the one' year maintenance period. 3.04 SOD: A. Install sod not more than 48 hours after cutting. Stake all sod as necessary to prevent erosion before establishment. B. Apply lime by mechanical means at a rate of 3,000 pounds per acre. C. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 450 pound per acre. D. Remove weeds or replace loam and reestablish finish grades if there are any delays in sodding. E. Rake area to be sodded. F. Roll sod to establish smooth, uniform surface. G. Water area adequately at time of sodding and continue as necessary throughout maintenance period. H. Sod dining approximate time periods of April I to May 15 and August 15 to October 15, and only when weather and soil conditions are suitable for such work, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. I. Apply additional care as necessary to ensure a hearty stand of grass at the end of the one - year maintenance period. 3.05 MAINTENANCE -ALL PLANTINGS: A. Begin maintenance immediately and continue maintenance until final acceptance of work. Water, mulch, weed, prune, spray, fertilize, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all plantings. B. Maintain sod and seed areas at maximum height of 2'/z inches by mowing at least three times. Weed thoroughly once and maintain until time of final acceptance. Reseed and refertilize with original mixtures, watering, or whatever is necessary to establish, over entire area, a close stand of grasses specified, and reasonably free of weeds and undesirable grasses. C. Reset settled trees and shrubs to proper grade and position, and remove dead material. 02900 -5 D. All plantings shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after by City Council acceptance of the project. E. The Contractor shall supply all water for planting and maintenance. Water may be obtained at the Contractor's expense at the bulk water fill station located at 1200 S. Riverside Drive. All water must be paid for in advance at the Civic Center, 410 E. Washington Street. 11 /00 sharedkngiaeer \specs- ii \02900.doc Pi i � L 3 Ci. vi k—v � o o N 02400 -6 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete. B. Formwork for exposed column foundations C. Openings for other work. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2006, B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2005. C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008. D. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on form materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK -GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast -in- place concrete work. B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. 03100 -1 D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. E. Use the following form types: 1. Footings; 2x edge form 2. Frost Footings; Loose clean grannular material, with 2x edge form 3. Exposed Column; round laminated fiber material form. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Edge formwork; Lumber: #2 SPF 2.03 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material, surface treated with release agent, non - reusable, of sizes indicated. Provide Sonotube Round manufactured by Sonoco Construction., or equal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are permitted only where trench foundations are indicated. B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. C. Form top of earth forms to ensure correct line and grade. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping witout hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where striping may damage concrete surfaces. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. E. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like to prevent swelling and for easy removal. F. Provided} amfer strips on external corners of walls. G. `install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. 3.04 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1 -1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls 03100 -2 and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, except as otherwise indicated. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. 03100 -3 C' rn y C7 03100 -3 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL r' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES, n A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. -C-) r',l B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. c.) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories. �w B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. B. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. C. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2005. D. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. Show all walls in plan and elevation. C. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis if requested by Architect. D. Engineer's review is for general design considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials, dimensions, fabrication, and erection is the Contractor's responsibility. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Unfinished. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. 03200 -1 C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Architect/Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Do not "stick" reinforcing into concrete after it has been poured. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Supported Slabs and Joists: 1 -1/2 inch. 2. Column Ties: 1 -1/2 inch. 3. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 2 inch. 4. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 5. Slabs on Fill: 2 inch. E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 03200 -2 Cl) D U C� O d_ f O N 03200 -2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building concrete and slab on grade. B. Concrete footings. C. Joint devices associated with concrete work. D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including light pole bases, thrust blocks, and transformer pads. - r_.r E. Granular cushion for slab =" c Pi F. Underslab vapor barrier +7 = w 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements; Testing and Inspection Agency o W C. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. D. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. E. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. F. Section 03390 - Concrete Curing and Sealing G. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 302.1 R -Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007). D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007. 1. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2005. 03300 -1 J. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic - Cement Concrete; 2008, K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. L. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. M. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008a. N. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2008a. O. ASTM C 881/C 881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002. P. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008). Q. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2008). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required ,with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. M D. ,Aubmit mix design and test data. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. r) 1-.05 ASSURANCE A. IF�rforrn work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. A_cquire'cement and aggregate from same source for all work. ti C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. 2. Use crushed stone aggregate for all exposed concrete and floor slabs. 3. Gravel aggregate may be used for unexposed footings, grade beams, and concrete 4. Aggregate shall limit chart, shale, iron oxide, and deleterious materials. 5. Maximum aggregate size: 1", unless noted otherwise. 03300 -2 a. Natural Sand Fine Aggregate: ASTM C -33; clean hard, strong, durable, and uncoated. Limit shale, chert, coal, and iron oxide. b. Crushed Limestone Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C -33; clean, hard, durable, and uncoated. 1) Limit clay lumps to 0.5 %, coal and carbonaceous shale to 0.5 %, total of shale and coal combined to 1.0 %, iron oxide to 0.5 %, and unsound chart particles retained on 3/8" sieve to 1.5 %. Chert particles which break Into 3 or more pieces when subjected to IDOT freezing and thawing shall be considered "unsound ". C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. C. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C. D. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. E. Calcium Chloride is not permitted 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Granular Cushion , 1. Granular fill to be clean /washed, free draining, approved crushed gravel or crushed stone, with 100% passing a 1 -1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a #4 sieve; 2. Sand is not permitted. B. Curing and Sealing Materials: Refer to Section 03390. C. Non - Shrink Grout: CRD -C 621, factory pre -mixed grout. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may, be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Type D Non - metallic 1) "Master Flow 713" Master Builders. 2) "Supreme "; Gifford -Hill /American; Admixtures. 3) "Crystex "; L &M Construction Chemical Co. D. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type ", "Grade ", and "Class" to suit project requirements. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non - dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II. B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881 M and of Type required for specific application. C. Pre - formed Expansion Joint Filler: Foam, closed -cell, expansion joint with tear -off strip. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Expansion Joint Strips EXP04050 manufactured by Reflectix. b. Cellu- Cushion EXP 200 manufactured by Sealed Air. c. See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. D. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX 03300 -3 A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. Max. 15% of cement content by weight. B. Submit written reports to Architect and Structural Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use water - reducing admixture in all concrete. 2. Use non - chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 3. Use air- entraining admixture in all concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content within following limits: a. Concrete exposed to freezing and thawing, or subjected to hydraulic pressure: 1) 5% to 7% for maximum 1" aggregate. 4. Use admixtures for water - reducing and set - control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. D. Normal Weight Concrete: All concrete except bond beam concrete. 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitio us materials by weight. 3. Cement Content: Minimum 564 lb per cubic yard. 4. Water- Cement Ratio: Maximum 44 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 6. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch, crushed limestone at exposed concrete, gravel at unexposed concrete. t' E. Normal Weight Concrete: Bond beam concrete '1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi. c��2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. -- -3. Cement Content: Minimum 470 lb per cubic yard. gip. Water- Cement Ratio: Maximum 53 percent by weight. 5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 314 inch, gravel. 2.08 MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete/Transit Mixers: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. 1. "Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted." B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 03300 -4 B. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load- bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non -load- bearing applications. D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non - shrink grout. 3.03 INSTALLING GRANULAR CUSHION AND VAPOR BARRIER A. Granular Cushion: 1. Set granular cushion over prepared sub - grade. 2. Place 8" granular cushion loose. Do Not compact, material is to settle to allow concrete slab to be structural. B. Underslab Vapor Barrier: 1. Install vapor barrier over top of granular cushion. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 1643. 3. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. 4. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. 5. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. 6. Seal all penetrations (including pipes and conduits) per manufacturer's instructions. 7. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 8. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE "• o A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Coordinate schedule of placement with Architect to allow observation /inspection' of,ggmpleted'' prep work prior to placement of concrete, min 7 day notification. c> D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devi&s will not be disturbed during concrete placement. 03300 -5 E. Repair understab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Joint Fillers: 1. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. 2. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. 3. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. H. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. J. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. K. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Consolidate all concrete and concrete slab -on -grade with mechanical vibration equipment, supplemented by hand - spadding, rodding or tamping. 3. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or da�bies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 4. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. L. I Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. If none indicated, verify locations with Architect prior to:commencing placement operations. c� N} = Saw t ut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/3 depth of slab thickness. N. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. O. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F, and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. P. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 03300 -6 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water - soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Use water - reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. B. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1 R; thin floor coverings include epoxy flooring. 2. Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1 R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Measure flatness of slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. B. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1(8 (nch in 10 ft. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of Section 03390, 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E, Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 03300 -7 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch -up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. of 03300 -8 1 %- c '_mot -- �- _-' v Q N 03300 -8 SECTION 03390 CONCRETE CURING AND SEALING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES v i A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. p B. Finish sealer at exposed concrete surfaces v�•1 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS tom, j A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals c.�_.. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007) . C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). D. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. E. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007. F. ASTM D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, moisture - retaining sheet, and sealers, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 and ASTM 0-1315, Type 1 - Clear or translucent, Class B. 1. Acrylic polymer resin, 25% solids, water based curing, sealing, and dustproofing. 2. Non - yellowing 3. No solvent vapors 4. Manufacturers: a. Kure -N -Seal by Sonneborn. 03390 -t b. Dress and Seal WB30 by L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. B. Moisture - Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in.. 3. White - burlap- polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide. C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 4 mil thick, clear. D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. B. Verify compatability of Curing Compound with floor coverings to be utilized. 3.02 EXECUTION -HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R. B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. C. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. D. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. E. Curing Methods; Perform curing of concrete by one or a combination of the following: 1. Moisture Curing: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water -fog spraying 2. Moisture- Retaining Sheet; Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped not less than 3 inches and sealed T ' with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. j3. Absprptive Moisture - Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap - polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days. 4. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimum two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. F. ;'floors indicated in Room Finish Schedule to receive Sealer; 1. Provide second application of Curing and Sealing Compound. 2. Apply second application after completion of construction and final clean -up. �. Clean concrete floor prior to application. 4. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimum two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. 03390 -2 SECTION 04720 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES «> , A. Architectural cast stone. B. Units required are: 1. Coping at top of cut stone veneer wall and columns 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Mortar for setting of cast stone B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast stone work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. B. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. C. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007. E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. F. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. G. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008a. H. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005. I. ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers. 1. Supplier shall detail and provide anchorage and joint connections and accessories. D. Mortar Color Selection Samples. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years of experience in producing cast stone of the types required for project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration. Protect corners from damage. 04720 -1 B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule. C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt. E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage. F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided. G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize on -site inventory and to avoid delaying the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Cast Stone: 1. Edwards Cast Stone 2. Haddonstone 3. Continential Cast Stone 4. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural limestone, complying with ASTM C 1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C 1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM C 1364, 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet. 4. Color: Light Buff /Cream, Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. `5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B.! Shapes; Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus /minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1l4 inch. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 1. Pieces More than 12 inches Wide: Provide full length two -way reinforcement of cross - sectional area not less than 0.25 percent of unit cross - sectional area. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. 1, For Units: Type I, white or gray as required to match Architect's sample. 2. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. D. Pigments: ASTM C 979, inorganic iron oxides; do not use carbon black. 04720 -2 E. Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M. F. Water: Potable. G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated. H. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, galvanized or epoxy coated. I. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions. J. Mortar: Portland cement -lime, ASTM C 270, Type N. K. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. L. Cleaner: General - purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect if construction is not acceptable. B. 'Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 04810. B. Mechanically anchor each cast stone unit. C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non- shrinK grout rn D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed. 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. d 3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concav @;profile; 4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills. and�'steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and columri'covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint'. E. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07900. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. 2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch 04720 -3 difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. G. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet. 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect's approval. 3.03 CLEANING A. Keep cast stone components clean as work progresses. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage. B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar - splashed work to condition of new work. Cl) 6% �U pp CL. !-. CIO o O N 04720 -4 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Concrete Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Flashings. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Electronic submittals B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. C. Section 04852 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Stone bonded to masonry back -up. D. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals: Loose steel lintels. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530 /ASCE 5fiMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 1TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain; for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007, D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. E. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. F. ASTM C 55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick; 2006. G. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006b. H. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006. L ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. J. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. K. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. L. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. M. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007. 04810 -1 N. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2008. O. ASTM D 4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane; 2004. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Samples: Submit one samples of precast sills and caps units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D, Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 /ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1 1ASCE 6 /TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock -up panel sized 4 feet long by 4 feet high; include CMU back -up, veneer material, anchors, thru -wall flashing, cavity vent, mortar, and mortar net in mock -up. 1. Approved mock -up panel shall be standard of quality for remaining work. B.' Provide mock -up panel for cut stone veneer. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.' ,'Deliver,; handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Pew Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 61TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non - standard blocks configured for lintels, control joint edges, jambs, and other detailed conditions. 3. Radius Corners: Provide block with 1 inch radius bullnose edge at all exposed outside corners /edges. 4. Load - Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight. a. Hollow block. 5. Non - Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129. a. Hollow block. B. Concrete Brick: 1. Grade N, solid, normal weight. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 04810 -2 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. B. Water: Clean and potable. C. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. D. Moisture- Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 1. Acceptable product: Omicron as manufactured by Master Builders Company or equal. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur -O-Wal: www.dur- o- wal.com, 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h- b.com, 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. As approved by Architect. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03200; size as indicated on drawings' uncoated finish. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Refer to Section 04852 Stone Masonry Veneer for veneer anchorage. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D 4637, Type I, 0.040 inch thick. 1. "Epra -Max" as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or equal. 2. Provide manufacturer's accessories as required for a complete installation, including 1 1/2" wide butyl tape, spray primer, and bonding adhesive. B. Stainless Steel Flashing: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; 24 ga thick; 2D dull finish. 1. Provide stainless steel flashing with drip at all thru -wall flashing locations. Extend 1/2" out from face of wall, with this 1/2" bent down 30 degrees and hemmed to form a drip. Provide pre- fabricated corner pieces. Membrane flashing shall lap down over this steel flashing to within 1" of exterior face of wall. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi -rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Mortar Net or equal. Panels designed for installation at flashing locations, 2" thickness, x 10" height x 5' long. a. Manufacturers: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc: www.advancedflashing.com. 2) Mortar Net USA, Ltd: www.mortarnet.com. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 04810 -3 I . Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Interior /Exterior, loadbearing and non - loadbearing masonry: Type S. B. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. C. Mortar - Proofing: Provide motar - proofing admixture to all setting mortar and grout. Comply with manufacturers requirements D. Mixing: 1. Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. 2. Colored mortar shall utilize manufacturer's pre -mix mortar PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built -in Items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING r. I A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. D B.. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: ,1. Bond: Running. 1-12. Co} rsing: One unit and one mortarjoint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave, CU 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 04810 -4 3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep /cavity vents. B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep /cavity vents. 3.07 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 24 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non - masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture (lashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal (lashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. C. Extend EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of (lashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. E. Provide end dams at sides of flashing above openings. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install galvanized, loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. C. Provide 16 oz smooth copper bond break at lintel at control joints D. Rake back joints at lintel and provide backing rod and sealant. 3.11 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beams with 2. No. 5 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Reinforce cells at adjacent to doors and window with 2- #5 bars and grout solid. C. Lap all reinforcing minimum of 40 bar diameters. L) 3 C > 04810 -5 D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 16 inches either side of opening. G. Refer to structural drawings for additional notes and requirements. 3.12 CONTROL JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and cornerjoints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.13 BUILT -IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built -in anchors and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built -in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.14 TOLERANCES A:' Maj imum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. YI) Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. C ".' Maxiimum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. QC, Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. E. Maintain minimum 1" airspace in cavity walls. 3.15 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. 1. Grout Strength Test: 2. Reinforcement Placement 04810 -6 3.17 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Protect all sash, metal, aluminum, lintels, and other adjacent materials that may be stained or damaged by cleaning materials /process. D. Attempt cleaning with stiff brushes and clean water prior to application of any cleaning agents. E. If additional cleaning is required, prepare test sample area of exposed masonry with proposed cleaning method and cleaning agent for approval by architect. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Provide secured in place polyethylene cover over top of exposed masonry and /or brick walls to prevent water infiltration /collection into wythe. Covering to be installed at the end of each work day, and upon completion of work until floor /roof system is installed. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. 04810 -7 SECTION 04852 STONE MASONRY VENEER 0 PART1 GENERAL U t? U 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cut stone veneer at exterior walls. B. Metal anchors and accessories.,;:' n C. Setting mortar and pointing mortar. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Joint reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ASTM A 580/A 580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 2008. C. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. D. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. E. ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2008. F. ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook; Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; 2007, 22nd Edition. G. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council; 1993. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar, and reinforcement. C. Samples: Submit two stone samples illustrating color, range, texture, and markings. D. Samples: Submit mortar color samples. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK -UP 04852 -1 A. Construct stone wall mock -up, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide; include stone anchor accessories, corner condition, and typical control joint in mock -up. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site. B. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on stone. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 61TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stone Quarriers: 1. Weber Stone Company; Product Random Split Face Veneer. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STONE A. Limestone: Anamosa Limestone; complying with ASTM C 568 Classification I - Low Density. 1. Grade: Standard, per ILI Handbook. 2. Color: Buff. B. i Surface Texture: Split face. C') 2.03 MORTAR _ r i A. ;_ Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S, using the Proportion Method, as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Pointing Mortar: Type N as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies, and using the g Property Method in ASTM C 270. '1. Folor: Mineral oxide pigment; buff color. a. Davis Colors b. Solomon Colors c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: As specified in Section 04810. B. Wall Ties: 1. CMU: Formed steel wire, 9 gage diameter, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 580/A 580M, ladder reinforcing for embedment into masonry with wire loop and vertical j- hook.. a. HB Tie- HVR -195V anchor system or equal, with 3/16" dia, ss flexible vee tie b. Size as required for masonry and cavity depth. 2. Concrete: Dovetail slot with dovetail tie, Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A508 /A 580M a. HB or equal, #305 dovetail slot with #315 dovetail anchor, 14 ga dovetail head, 3116" vee wall tie diameter. C. Other Anchors in Direct Contact with Stone: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless steel, of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. D. Flashings: Refer to Section 04810 04852 -2 E. Weep /Cavity Vents: Polyethylene tubing. F. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. 2.05 STONE FABRICATION A. Pattern and Coursing: Anamose Random Split Face Veneer. B. Fabricate for 318 inch beds and joints. 1 n ' C. Bed and Joint Surfaces: 1. Cut or sawn full square for full thickness of unit. D. Backs: Sawn. n 'a E. Form stone corners to irregularjoint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone irq'reporation for setting. C � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces. C. Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back -up. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. B. Cut stone at site to produce clean faces. C. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions. D. Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar. E. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations, and provide a uniform blend of stone unit sizes. F. Provide setting and pointing mortar in accordance with Section 04810. 1. If water is lost by evaporation, re- temper mortar only within two hours after mixing. 2. At ambient air temperature 80 degrees F and above, use mortar within two hours after mixing; at ambient air temperature below 50 degrees F, use mortar within two- and- one -half hours after mixing. G. Fill dowel holes in stone units with mortar. H. Arrange stone coursing in random bond with consistent joint width. I. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width. J. Install cavity mortar control as indicated in Section 04810. K. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at 24 inches on center horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports, and at top of each cavity space; do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE 04852 -3 A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in first two horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Embed wall ties in masonry back -up to bond veneer to back -up at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally. F. In addition, place wall ties at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. 3.05 JOINTS A. Leave the following joints open for sealant: 1. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. 2. Joints in projecting units. 3. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. 4. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. 5. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. 6. Joints labeled "expansion joint". B. Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints clean to accommodate pointing mortar. Fill joints with pointing mortar. C. Pack mortar into joints and work Into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint. D. At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint before it sets. Brush joints clean. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.07 PkZOTECTION A' ' During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover E sore -work exposed to weather with non - staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. END OF SECTION ee�tz, a. i -a- t�4� � L1 N 04852 -4 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL N PART 1 - GENERALr 1.1 SECTIONINCLUDES - _ n A. Structural steel framing members. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors expansion joint plates and angle frames. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810- Unit Masonry Assemblies: Supply of anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AISC -Code of Standard Practice- Manual of Steel Construction- Allowable Stress Design (ASD). B. ASTM A36/A36M - Structural Steel. ASTM A992 C. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. ASTM F1554 D. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. E. ASTM A500 - Cold- Formed Welded and Seam less Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. G. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)- Painting Manual. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of strmtural steel members, procedures and diagrams. B. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld 1. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. C. Engineer review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliancewith 05120-1 requirements for materials, dimensions, fabrications and erection shall be the Contractor's responsibility. D. All beams and girder connections not otherwise noted shall be designed, fabricated and erected as a standard connection in accordance with the latest edition of AISC Manual of Steel Detailing. Details shown are Typical: similar details apply to similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. Connection concepts to be approved by Arch itect/Engineer. Judgment regarding appropriateness of specific connections to be determined by Architect/Engineer. E. Any material ordering or fabrication prior to reviewed shop drawings is at the contractor's own risk. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Code and Standards: Complywith provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice Sr Steel Buildings and Bridges ". a) Paragraph 4,2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the fol lowing sentence: "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the �. fabricator as a part of this preparation of these shop drawings ". 2,; AISC "Specificationsfor the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Building ", including "Commentary" and Suppbments thereto as issued. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" Fl approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. American Welding Society (AWS) DI.1 "Structural Welding Code- Steel ". M Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure ". C. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 1. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which arc to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time so not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damage materials or structures as directed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 05120-2 A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Sections: ASTM A992 (Fy=50 ksi) o B. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. cLI in C. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. —`• la D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. Type E. E. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108 Grade 1015 or 1020, Headed Studs, Cold finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 (Grade 36), non-headed type unless otherwise indicated. G. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low- carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. H. High - Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium- carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325, Type N. 1. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors to be "Kwik Bolt" or approved equal. J. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Tnemec 10 -99. K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. L. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placemnt and hydration. M. Non- metallic Shrinkage - Resistant Grout: Pre - mixed, non - metallic, non - corrosive, non- staining product containing selected silica sands, portlancbement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complyingvith CE- CRD -C621, Type D. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with RISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. B. Properlymarkandmatch -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. 05120-3 D. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated E. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 1. Provide high- strength threaded fasteners with washers for all field bolts. F. High- Strength Bolted Construction: Install high - strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM or A490 bolts" (RCRBSJ). G. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of Welds, and methods used in correcting weldingwork. H. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods which will produce true alignmentofaxes with warp. I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Weld shear connectors, spaced as shown. Use automaticend welding of headed stud shear connectors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. J Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel faming, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. No holes allowed in structural steel beams or columns unless specifically detailed and approved by Engineer. K. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. L. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicularto metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concreteormortaror those receivingfrreproofing. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2" of embedded areas only. I, Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. Remove oil and grease with solvents in accordance with SRI -63. 2. Remove dirt, rust, mill scale and deteriorated paint by power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP -2 -63. 3. Brush -off blast clean all exposed steel columns in accordance with SP7. C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. 05120-4 2.4 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached tostrgg "aural- 9jcplframeand located in exterior walls. r' v� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION r r A. Surveys: Em ploy a registered profess ionaIengineerorI and surveyor for accurate erectionof structural steel. Check elevationsof concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similardevices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and otherconnectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. I. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate kcations. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen to improve bondto surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. G. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. H. Pack non - metallic, non- shrink grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to core. 1. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently 05120-5 fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment. J. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. K. Established required levelingand plumbing measurements on mean operatingtemperaturcof structure. Make allowancesfor difference between temperaturcat time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. L. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. M. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. N. Comply with AISC Specifications for hearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. r� O: Do not enlarge unfair (roles in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. �a Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primarystructuralfiraming. Cutting will be permitted only on secondarymemberswhichare Y_ k_ L j not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. N Q. Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel is included in Division 9 under painting work. 3.2 QUALITYCONTROL A, Owner may engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high- strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. I. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as maybe necessary to reconfirm any non -compl iance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. B. Contractor shall provide the followhg testing by testing agency or qualified personnel: 1. Shop Bolted Connections: Inspect or test in accordance with AISC specifications. 2. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies,as follows: a. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests asrequired. Recorcitypes and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Field Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. Use calibrated wrench to tighten all high strength field bolts. Recalibrate wrench on a daily basis. 4. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 05120-6 C. a. Certify welders and conduct inspectionsand tests as required. Recordtypes and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. The owner will employ a testing agency to provide the followingdsts: Shear stud installation: a. Pretesting: L The contractor shall install 10 studs and have the testing agency perform the bend test per AWS DI.I - Structural Welding Code: studs shall be bent to 30° from vertical by means of hittingwith a hammer or bending with a pipe depending on AWS D1.1 temperature requirements. ii. If any of the 10 studs fail the pre -test the contractor shall make corrective measures to the method of installation and install another set of 10 studs. This shall be repeated until 10 consecutive studs pass the test. All studs passing the test maybe incorporated into the project. iii. All failed studs shall be replaced and re- tested by the bend test so they may be incorporated into the project. b. Random Testing i. The testing agency shall test l0% of all studs atrandom locations using the bend test per AWS 131.1, as described above. ii. If a failure rate greater than 5% is discovered then all of the remaining untested studs shall be tested as described below. All re- testing will be paid for by the contractor. a Re- testing L Visually inspect that all studs have a complete 3600 end weld. ii. Perform a light hammer blow test to all studs to listen for a crisp ringing sound. iii. Any stud which fails either the visual test or light hammer test shall be tested using the bald test per ASW D1.1. iv. All failed studs shall be replaced and re- tested until they pass the bend test. END OF SECTION 05120-7 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS r -� PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items., including: c: 1. Lintels 2. Column base connection 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2002. B. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. C. ASTM A 531A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. D. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. F. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009. H. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. I. ASTM A 500 /A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2008. K. SSPC -Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC -Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic "); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 05500 -t 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 /D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. D. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC -Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. ' Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B, Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Dc ,) Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Fill any remaining voids with plastic filler and sand smooth. Ease t ; L - exposed edges to small uniform radius. Supply'components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized, with prime paint finish. B. Column Base Connections: As detailed, galvanized. 2.04 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Prime Painting: One coat. D. Galvanizing of Non - structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. 05500 -2 E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non - cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of- Position: 1/4 inch. 6, 05500 -3 r. 05500 -3 SECTION 06100 A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.aisc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 06100 -1 ROUGH CARPENTRY �a PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ?' w A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Non - structural dimension lumber framing. = ? C. Sheathing. , D. Preservative treated wood materials. E. Concealed wood blocking, hailers, and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two - Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A 1531A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood - Protection Association; 2009. D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. E. WWPA G -5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.aisc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 06100 -1 B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: Kiln -dry or MC15. D. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Spruce Pine Fir. 2. Grade: S4S, No. 2. E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing (at exterior of exterior wall locations): 19/32 ", APA rated OSB, span rating 24/0, Exposure 1. B. Wall Sheathing (at exposed interior locations): 19/32 ", APA rated plywood, PS -1, Grade A -C, Fir, Exterior Exposure. 1. Class C; Flame Spread Index 76 -200; Smoke Developed Index 0 -450. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A: Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot - dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Tech Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. -1 -i- 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. E r> 4. Sill Anchor Bolts: 1/2" dia x 12" long, bent, with nut and washer. B:. Sill .Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from r vi continuous rolls. 2.05 ;AIR- BARRIER BUILDING WRAP A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Chemical Company; Weathermate House Wrap b. DuPont; Tyvek Commercial Wrap. c. Raven Industries Inc.; Rufco -Wrap. d. As approved by Architect e. Coordinate permeance value retained or inserted in first subparagraph below with products selected. Consult manufacturers' literature. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: Not less than 200 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Method B, 28 perms 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 4. Breaking Strength: 38/35 Ibs /in, ASTM D -882 Method A 5, Tear Resistance: 12/10 Ibs, ASTM D -1117 B. Building -Wrap Tape: Pressure - sensitive plastic tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 06100 -2 C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self- adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized - asphalt compound, bonded to a high- density, cross - laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less 0.040 inch 2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative - Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC313, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION .� A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations pu66tut'e gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. r.� B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall- mounted items, 06100 -3 unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. C. Where ceiling- mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Specifically, provide the following non - structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall- mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing (exterior of wall): Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws. B, Wall Sheathing (interior wall sheathing): Secure with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing, using screws. 1. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF AIR BARRIER BUILDING WRAP A. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2.. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. Refer to Section Clad Wood c; Windows for integration of air barrier and integral window nailing fin. B'_ Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather - resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Delete first subparagraph below if head flashing is not used; see Evaluations. 5. Lap weather - resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 6. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 114 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.08 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01732. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 06100 -4 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co- generation facilities or "waste -to- energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. 06100 -5 :n 1 j L] 3 rJ 06100 -5 SECTION 06130 HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL LI RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY co A. Section includes training using timbers. B. Related Sections: ? 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated witl heavy timber construction. 2. Division 6 Section "Wood Decking" for wood roof and floor decking. 3. Division 6 Section "Structural Glued- Laminated Timber" for glued - laminated timber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension. B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: I . NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. W WPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For preservative- treated wood products and timber connectors. 1. For preservative- treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For timber connectors, include installation instructions. B. LEED Submittals: 06130- 1 Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain -of- custody certificates certifying that wood products comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC- accredited certification body. a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product. C. Shop Drawings: For heavy timber construction. Show layout, dimensions of each member, and details of connections. D. Material Certificates: 1. For heavy timber construction specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 2. For. preservative- treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before Shipment to Project site. E. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked i ';with- 'estamp. 1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction." B. Forest Certification: Provide wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSC - accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD -01 -001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TIMBER A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency. 06130-2 2.2 2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces that will not be exposed to view, or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. B. Timber Species and Grade: Douglas fir -larch or Douglas fir -larch (North); No. 2, NLGA, WCLIB, or W WPA. C. Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. D. Dressing: Provide dressed timber (S4S) unless otherwise indicated. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross -grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA C15 requirements for "sawn building poles and posts as structural members." 1. Timber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated with inorganic boron (SBX) according to AWPA C31 instead of AWPA C15. 2. Treatment with CCA shall include post - treatment fixation process. o 6 J B. Pressure treat poles with waterborne preservative to comply with AWPA C4.,: �� sn I. Treatment with CCA shall include post - treatment fixation process. r C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. _. 1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium. -- r_� D. Use process that includes water - repellent treatment. E. Use process that does not include water repellents or other substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. F. After treatment, redly timber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. G. Mark treated timber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. H. Application: Treat all heavy timber construction unless otherwise indicated. 06130-3 I . Sills and similar members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Timber framing members less than 18 inches (460 nrm) above grade. 2.3 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot - rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. 4. Stainless -steel plate and flat bars complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304. 5, Stainless -steel bars and shapes complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304]. 6. Stainless -steel sheet complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/8 -inch (9.5 -mm) bearing plates, 3/4 -inch- (19 -nun -) diameter -by -12 -inch- (300 -nun -) long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239 -inch (6 -mm) side plates. C. (.;Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179 -inch (4.6 -mm) stirrups and 0.239 -inch (6 -mm) ,_,,top plates. D Fabricate strap ties from steel 3 inches (75 mm) wide by 0.239 inch (6 min) thick, E. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged -steel �tm•nbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. C') F. c -1- Provide bolts, 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); provide nuts complying with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, provide flat washers. G. Provide shear plates, 4 inches (102 min) in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933. H. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust- inhibitive primer, 2 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. I. Hot -dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal members and inclined members with a slope of less than 1:1, with natural convex bow (crown) up, to provide camber. B. Shop fabricate members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. C. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 06130-4 D. Where preservative - treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. I Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. F. Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit except for treated wood where the treatment included a water repellent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION d A. General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bacing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. r�> 1. Install heavy timber construction to comply with Shop Drawings. 2. Install horizontal and sloping members with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. 3. Handle and temporarily support heavy timber construction to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); do not embed more than 4 inches (102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. Predrill for fasteners and assembly of units. 1. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks, and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer. 1 Where preservative - treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field - treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. b. Use copper naphthenate treatment for members in contact with the ground or not continuously protected from liquid water. 06130-5 E. Install timber connectors as indicated. I. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber construction if repairs are not approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 06130 06130-6 c� � r 0 N END OF SECTION 06130 06130-6 SECTION 06150 WOOD DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glued laminated structural wood decking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: . B. Section 06181 - Glue- Laminated Structure 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 110 - Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2001. B. AITC 111 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2005. C. AITC 113 - Standard for Dimensions of Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2001. D. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007. E. ASTM D 2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. C. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two samples, 6 inch in length illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Iowa. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glue laminated members in accordance with AITC 111 requirements for unwrapped material. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued Laminated Decking: 1. Lock -Deck www.lockdeck.com 06150 -1 a_ c- 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 110 - Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2001. B. AITC 111 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2005. C. AITC 113 - Standard for Dimensions of Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2001. D. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007. E. ASTM D 2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. C. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two samples, 6 inch in length illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Iowa. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glue laminated members in accordance with AITC 111 requirements for unwrapped material. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued Laminated Decking: 1. Lock -Deck www.lockdeck.com 06150 -1 2. Filler King Company: www.fillerking.com. 3. Unit Structures: www.unitstructures.com, 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Glued Laminated Decking: Douglas Fir /Larch fabricated to comply with AITC 190.1 and AITC 113, laminated with adhesive tested according to ASTM D 2559 for wet service; Standard Vee, single tongue. 1. Appearance: Fabricate to AITC 110 Architectural grade.Sound knots and natural characteristics. Occasional pieces may contain chipped edge knots, short end splits or seasoning check, and some pin holes. 2. Nominal Size: 2x6 3. Texture: Smooth Surfaced 4. Random Length Continuous. 5. Moisture Content: 10% - 12% average, 15% max 6. Factory Finish: a. Acrylic semi - transparent stain C. b. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 7. Designed for the following minimum values: a' Bending (Fb): 2640 psi. - ' ;,b: Horizontal Shear (Fv): 165 psi. c: Modulus of elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. 8... After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A; 'Fasteners and Anchors: b 1. Fastener Type and Finish: Hot - dipped galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION - BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Random Length Continuous installation 1. Deck shall be continuous over three or more spans, with each piece of deck over at least one support. 2. Place decking to disperse end - joints as randomly as possible. Distance between end joints in adj. rows of decking shall be 2' minimum. Distance between in joints separated by only one row shall be 1' minimum. 3. Provide cantilevered overhang free of end joints. 4. Decking shall be end - matched and toe- nailed within 1' of all ends. C. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. D. Secure with fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Toenailing along Courses a. 6d @ 30" oc for 2" nominal 2. Face nailing to supports: 06150 -2 a. 16d for 2" nominal 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. 06150-3 SECTION 06181 GLUED - LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES i �cr A. Glue laminated wood beams and columns. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2004 (with errata 2005)." B. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007. C. WWPA G -5 -Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117. B. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117 - DESIGN. C. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: 20 Ibs /sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240 of span. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance information. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, framed openings, and 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer /Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years of documented experience, and certified by AITC in accordance with AITC A190.1. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other load criteria. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped. B. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued- Laminated Structural Units: 1. Timberweld Mfg. 2. Sentinel Structures, Inc: www.sentinelstructures.com. 06181 -1 3. Unit Structures: www.unitstructures.com. 4. Western Wood Structures, Inc: www.westernwoodstructures.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Douglas Fir lumber conforming to WWPA grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. B. Appearance Grade: Provide grade timbers complying with AITC 110. 1. AITC Architectural; suitable for applications where appearance is a factor, knot holes and loose khotsover 3/4" diameter are not allowed. 2. Finish: Factory applied stain with penetrating sealer. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. C. Design for the following values: 1. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. D. Laminating Adhesive: Wet -use (waterproof) complying with AITC A190.1. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural grade. B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. D. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. E. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. 4.92 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. C'], " 3:03 EltECTION Av> Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated. C. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured. D. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or other unauthorized modification. E. Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. 06181 -2 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS h> PART 1 GENERAL t I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. B. AWI /AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. C. NEMA LID 3 - High- Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Indicate field verified dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed plastic laminate manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS 06410 -1 A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. No added urea - formaldyhyde resins 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II /Custom; average moisture content of 5 -10 percent; species as follows: 1. Concealed Surfaces: Species #2 spf. 2. FSC- Certified Wood 3. No added urea - formaldyhyde resins 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as indicated. 1. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. _2. FSC- Certified Wood 3. No added urea - formaldyhyde resins 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A.` Manufacturers: ° 0 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc \Nevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. c' 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 62 High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LID 3, types as recommended for specific applications. C. Provide specific types as scheduled. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, matte finish. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, matte finish. 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, white color, matte finish. 4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2.05 COUNTERTOPS A. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA -2 and NEMA LID 3; acrylic resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non - porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. c. Color /Pattern Family: Formica, Price Group C, Classics. d. Manufacturers: 06410 -2 1) DupontCorian: www.corian.com. 2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 3) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com. 4) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 3. Other Components Thickness: 3/4" inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: 1 1/2 inch thick; bullnose edge. 5. Back Splashes and end splashes: Same sheet material, cove base, eased edge top, 4 inches high. B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A -C veneer grade, minimum 5 -ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. D. Joint Sealant: Mildew- resistant silicone sealant, color as selected by Architect. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application, urea - formaldyhyde free, complying with South Coast Air Quality Management District VOC limits. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome - plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, or chrome - plated finish in exposed locations. D. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut -outs, in color to blend with adjacent surface. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers. 1. Product: 4484 series manufactured by Stanleyworks. B. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: 150 lb. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing /stay closed type. 6. Manufacturers: c_7 , a. Hafele b. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. c. Grass America Inc: www,grassusa.com. d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.! e. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Hinges: 1. Hafele Aximat 2. 3 -way adjustable clip -on hinge, with decorative exposed knuckle 3. ANSI /BHMA Grade 1 Standard 4. Polished steel finish D. Cabinet Adjustable Shelves and Standards 1. Knape & Vogt or equal 2. 255 Series Pilaster; clips adjustable to 1/2" increments, 5/8" wide x 3116" deep, 23 ga. steel, ZC zinc finish, BHMA Grade 1, recessed installation. 3. 256 Series Pilaster Supports, ZC zinc finish 2.08 FABRICATION 06410 -3 A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. C. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints. D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. E. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. F. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. G. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. : Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION k -f_ 9 A.; ?Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. R )Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. ye ' Cl Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. L Do Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not N use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Kitchenette Base and Wall Cabinets 1. Base/Wall Cabinets; PL -1 color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 2. Countertop; solid surface, refer to Division 12 B. Maintenance Shop Base and Wall Cabinets 1. Base/Wall Cabinets; PL -1 color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 2. Countertop at workbench; galvanized metal 06410 -4 SECTION 07311 SHINGLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass shingle roofing. B. Synthetic Shingle (Alternate #1 at Shelter and Marina) C. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and around penetrations. D. Associated metal flashings and accessories. E. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06150 - Wood Decking: Roof decking. B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001. B. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2007. C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal (lashings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture /pattern; for color selection. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F. B. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. 07311 -1 i r%1 j e �k 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass shingle roofing. B. Synthetic Shingle (Alternate #1 at Shelter and Marina) C. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and around penetrations. D. Associated metal flashings and accessories. E. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06150 - Wood Decking: Roof decking. B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001. B. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2007. C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal (lashings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texture /pattern; for color selection. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F. B. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. 07311 -1 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 50 year warranty PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBEGLASS SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Certainteed Corporation 2. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt - coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D 3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Weight: 300 Ib /100 sq ft. 2. 3 -tab, Self- sealing type, english size. 3. Basis of Design: CertainTeed "Landmark Premium ". 4. Color: as selected by architect from manufcturer's standard. 5. Manufacturer's 50 year warranty 2.02 SYNTHETIC SHINGLES (ALTERNATE #1) A. Manufacturers 1. Specifications are based on the products of EcoStar, products of the following 6J, manufacturers complying with requirements of drawings and specifications will be acceptable (9 ! a. DaVinci roofing ^ r b. As approved by the Architect �. Majestic Slate Traditional as manufactured by EcoStar Carlisle, www.ecostar.carlisle.com h-1 1 : Composed of Starloy, an 80% recycled rubber and plastic compound with appropriate o "`cplorants and UV stabilizers, at 10" widths by 18" long, and with a tapered nominal q `thickness of 1/4 ". 2. Weight: 290 -300 Ibs /sq at 6" exposure 3. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 4. Class 4 Impact Resistance, UL 2218 5. Nail pull through ASTM D3136 6. Prolonged UV exposure ASTM G26 -95 7. 50 yr warranty 8. 110 MPH wind warranty C. Fasteners: EcoStar ring shank roofing nail with a 3/8" diameter head and a minimum of 1 -1/2" long shank made from stainless steel. Nails can be supplied either as a hand -drive style or in coils for use in pneumatic tools. The EcoStar ring shank roofing nail is required for fastening of all EcoStar roof tiles. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Ice -Water Protection Membrane: Self- adhering polymer- modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. B. Underlayment: Glass- reinforced, asphalt- saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM D226, and ASTM D4869 1. "Shingle- Mate" as manufactured by GAF or equal. C. Flexible Flashing: Self- adhering polymer - modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 1. Manufacturers: 07311 -2 a. GAF; Product StormFlash. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot - dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 314 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type 11, asphalt roof cement. C. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of underlayment, free of toxic solvents. D. Misc. preformed neoprene boot and sleeve assemblies for penetrations through roof. 2.05 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, and other flashing indicated and /or required to maintain weather -tight assembly. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Style D and Perry Starter flashings shall have hemmed edge. 3. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 4. Hem exposed edges of (lashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 24 ga thick; primed and finished one side with Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating 1.0 mil total dry film thickness and washcoat of .3 -.4 mil dry film thickness on reverse side,color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION r A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed td deck surface. Verify that flashingings /flanges are of type acceptable for shingle roof. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. B. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection. C. Install eave edge (lashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ICE -WATER PROTECTION MEMBRANE A. Install eave protection membrane at the following locations: 1. Install eave protection membrane at eave and rake from roof edge to minimum 2 It to inside of exterior wall line. B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Eave: 1. Adhere protection membrane starter strip to metal edge flashing. Set protection membrane 07311-3 edge flush with face of metal flashings. Secure in place. 2. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. 3. Weather lap plies minimum of 2 inches. D. Rake: 1. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. 2. Weather lap plies minimum of 2 inches. 3. Install metal rake flashing over protection membrane. 3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT A. Install underlayment over entire roof area, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 9 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. B. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 6 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap minimum 6 inches over eave protection. C. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic cement. 3.05 INSTALLATION - METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A Install flashings in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements. B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. Cz,_) Secure, in place with nails at 8 inches on center. Conceal fastenings. -• D� R tum' perry starter around eave and under rake flashing to maintain seal, closed corners, flashed to drain. V) 11-' Item's Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: N 1. Provide base flashing to run under adjacent shingles 2. Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3. Base flashing to divert water back out onto top of shingles. 3.06 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in Six - course, Six -Inch, Stepped -Off Diagonal coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Verify with manufacturer's recommendation for single style. C. At eaves, apply starter strip of shingles with tabs cutt off. Project first course of shingles 1/4 inch beyond eave. D. Extend shingles 1/4 inch beyond face of rake. E. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings. F. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 3.07 INSTALLATION - SYNTHETIC SHINGLES A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation requirements. B. After installing underlayment and before installing the Majestic Slate tiles, clean the surface of debris and dirt. 07311 -4 C. Care must be taken to place tiles so color variations are evenly distributed over the entire roof area. Shade variation will occur differently from pallet to pallet and within individual pallets. Tiles between bundles and pallets MUST be blended to insure even distribution of color variations. Color "mapping" or "blotching" in appearance is not acceptable and the EcoStar authorized Gold Star applicator will be required to correct. It is recommended that work not begin until all EcoStar materials have been delivered to the job site so that all the material may be blended together. Periodic ground inspections should be conducted to ensure a random color pattern to the installation. Please contact EcoStar's technical department for correct blending procedures. D. Minimum Fastening - No less than 2 EcoStar ring shank fasteners per tile shall be used with a minimum length of 1 -1/2 ". Fasteners should be installed at the designated "nail here" marks on the tile. Failure to fasten the tile at these locations may result in a "lifted" tile. CAUTION: When using a pneumatic nailer care should be taken to insure that nails are not over driven causing the tiles to curl upward. If tiles have been installed with over driven nails causing the ends of the tile to curve upward, tiles will never lay flat. Overdriven tiles must be removed and re- nailed properly. Never hold tiles from behind while nailing, as this will cause an upward curl of the tile. E. Do not install tiles against each other. A minimum gap of 3/8" must be maintained between installed tiles. A minimum 3/8" gap must be maintained between installed tiles and any sidewalls or roof projection. F. Beginning at the eave, install a starter row of Majestic Slate tiles gapped a minimum of 3/8" between tiles and any projections while achieving a 3/4" overhang with two EcoStar ring shank fasteners per tile (in location shown on tiles). This layer of tiles will become the starter row. The final tile at roof edges must be a minimum of 3" wide. This may involve cutting the EcoStar tile to fit. To cut the EcoStar tile to correct width simply score the back of the tile with a straight edge and utility knife and snap tile at that score. Install first course of tiles in the same manner as the starter row with the exception of the second layer having a 1/2 tile offset to the starter row. The first course of tiles should be installed flush with the starter row with no exposure. G. After the initial starter and first row of tiles has been installed, it is recommended that a chalk line be placed parallel to the roof edge running perpendicular to the first row of tiles. This chalk line will insure that the tiles stay true and plumb to the roof edge throughout installation. Never use red chalk, as this will permanently stain the EcoStar roof tiles. H. Continue installing tile courses up the roof slope now achieving the correct chosen exposure. It is recommended that chalk lines be placed horizontally up the roof slope for every tile course. This will ensure that each course is installed straight across the roof surface. I. It is the responsibility of the Gold Star Authorized Applicator to ensure that each Majestic tile has been flexed to provide a downward curve prior to tile fastening. Do not install tiles with an upward curve. J. Valley Areas - Either an open or closed valley design may be used. 1. With an open valley design leave a minimum of 2" on each side of the center of the valley exposed and uncovered by the roof tiles. A V- Style, W- Style, or Double W -Style valley metal should be used. 2. With a closed valley design cut the tiles in a straight line to fit no closer than 3/8" against tile of adjoining roof slope. Never penetrate valley metal with roof fastener. r c. 07311 -5 K. Majestic Slate tiles may not be installed if the tiles have been stored in temperatures lower than 45 °F. If tiles have been stored in temperatures below 45 °F, tiles must be brought back to a minimum material temperature of 45 °F. As the temperature rises Majestic Slate will expand beyond the designed installation pattern if the product is installed while cold or frozen. L. Install Majestic Slate - Universal Hip & Ridge tiles at all hip locations. EcoStar recommends a chalk line be snapped up the hip line to ensure a straight application up the roof surface. Universal Hip & Ridge tiles are always installed at a 6" exposure. M. Care must be taken to minimize foot traffic over completed areas of the roof. Majestic Slate tiles will show mud and dirt causing appearance problems. The removal of dirt and debris is the responsibility of the applicator. Never use chemical cleaning agents not approved by EcoStar to wash an EcoStar Majestic Slate roof assembly. N. Majestic Slate tiles can be slippery when wet; caution should be exhibited with early morning dew and after rain. EcoStar recommends the use of toe boards and OSHA approved harnesses and safety equipment at all times. O. Upon completion of the roof system installation, inspect and remove all debris from roof. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. END OF SECTION 07311 -6 o, = Cl ll� _J o O N END OF SECTION 07311 -6 SECTION 07461 WOOD SIDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board siding for Walls. B. Plywood panel siding for exterior walls C. Plywood panel for interior walls D. Trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Water- resistive barrier under siding. C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for metal flashings and trim associated with wood siding for placement by this section. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at perimeter. E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Stain finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. APA B840 - 303 Siding Manufacturing Specifications; APA - The Engineered Wood Association; 1997, revised 1999. B. APA PRP -108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural -Use Panels (Form E445); 2001. C. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; 2004, and supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade lumber in accordance with the following: 1. Western Red Cedar: WCLIB (GR). B. Plywood Specified by APA Grade or Type: Labeled by APA certified grading agency. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIDING AND TRIM BOARDS A. Tounge & Groove Siding: 07461 -1 1. V- grooved on two sides (EV2S) WRCLA2 2. Nominal 1x4, 3" exposed face width. 3. Western Red Cedar, B Clear grade 4. Texture: smooth faced 5. Kiln -dryed, max moisture content 10% B. Type A - Plywood Panel Siding (Exterior walls): APA Rated Siding, Exterior exposure class, panel style. 1. Western red cedar face 2. Grade; 303R, up to six small solid knots and knot holes filled with cedartone paintable exterior epoxy wood putty 3. Panel Size: 48 "x96" inch size sheet, 15/32 inch thick. 4. Flat profile w/ ship lap edge 5. Span Rating: 24 inches o.c. 6. Texture /Pattern: Brushed. C. Trim Boards: 1. Western Red Cedar, A Clear Grade in accordance with WCLIB 102 -c, S4S 2. Texture: Smooth faced 3. Kiln- dried, max. 10% moisture content 4. Sizes as indicated on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES Nails: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM -A153 type; non - staining, of size and strength to securely and rigidly retain the work. Splitless ring shank siding nails, textured head. g r 1. Length as required to penetrate solid wood blocking or stud a minimum of 1 1/4" (B, Flashing: Aluminum as specified in Section 07620. ° PART 3 EXEOUTION ® L_ 3.0f-- EXAMINATION Verify that substrates are ready to receive work. B. Verify that water- resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. B. Prime /finish back and edges of solid wood siding and trim prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, local and national building codes, and Western Red Cedar Lumber Association installation instructions. B. T &G Siding 1, Fasten siding in place, level and plumb. 2. Arrange for orderly nailing pattern. Blind nail except on over trim. 6d 3. Install siding with tongue up. 4. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces. Sand cut edges smooth and clean. 5. Minimize butt joints. Where required provide 45 degree cut mitre cut C. Siding panels 1. Install panel siding sheets vertically with edges and ends over firm bearing. 07461 -2 2. Ship lap edges 3. Nail at 12 inches on center. D. Board trim 1. But joints; 45 degree mitre cut, drain to exterior 2. Kerf joints at corners E, Install metal (lashings at sills, heads of wall openings, and as indicated on drawings. F. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. G. Prepare for site finishing specified in Section 09900. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb and Level: 1/4 inch per 10 feet. B. Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1/16 inch. r -+ c � 07461 -3 cn � 7 C,1 i , r 07461 -3 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including (lashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07311 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. D. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, (lashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 44 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre - Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre - coated with fluoropolymercoating. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, 07620 -1 thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: As_ specified in Section 07900. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. E. = Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant ' : F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form ,_- strip G. c 17abricita flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. x.04 GQIiiTER -AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. -_Gutters:' SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile. B. `"bownspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Straps. 3. Downspout Supports: Straps. E. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where 07620 -2 permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt (lashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. F. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. 07620 -3 j 07620 -3 SECTION 07900 CAULKING AND SEALING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 02750 - Rigid Pavement: Sealants required in conjunction with paving. C. Section 07950 - Fire and Smoke Sealing: Firestopping sealants. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005. B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009. E. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed - Cell); 2005. F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's color chart/samples D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc. 07900 -t 2. GE Silicones. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Degussa Building Systems /Sonneborn. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc. 2. Pecora Corporation. 3. Degussa Building Systems /Sonneborn. 4. Mameco International. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Acoustical Sealants: 1. Tremco, Inc. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. General Purpose Exterior /Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS; Class 25, Uses NT, T, G, A, M, and I; three- component. 1. "NP 2" as manufactured by Sonneborn BASF 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's 40 standard colors, and 470 nonstocked colors. a. Expansion joints in brick to match brick color b. Expansion joints in burnished block to match block color c. To match adjoining wall surface color(s) 3. -- Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. e. Joints between metal frames and other materials. Q. Joints between door and window frames and CMU /gypsum board e, Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. Verify with Architect C - Wet Interior Locations: silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Clear, almond, and white colors as selected by Architect. 2, Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. D. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non - skinning. 1. Tremco Acoustical Sealant or equal. 2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self - leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1 -1/2 inches. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion and control joints in floors. F. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Two- component, polysulfide rubber sealant, USA Specification A116.1, Class A, self leveling. 1. Hard curing type, non - staining, gray color. 07900 -2 2. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior joints in concrete paving and sidewalks. G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M. O; single component, solvent curing, non - sagging, non - staining, fungus resistant, non - bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Countertop to wall at areas of moisture contact. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. At interior joints, install sealant after painting is completed. Color of sealant to matchadjacent 07900 -3 3 materials. Verify color with Architect. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces, 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. 07900-4 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Thermally insulated steel doors. C. Steel glazing frames. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware, C. Section 08850 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ICC At 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a. E. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI /DHI A115 Series). F. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. G. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. H. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 08100 -1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build -up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com. 2. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 3. Curries Company /Essex Industries 4. Kewanee Corporation 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/]CC A117.1. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Glazed Lights: Non - removable stops on non - secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 5. Galvanizing at all exterior doors and interior doors: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. c- 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Interior /Exterior Doors: Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless, 16 .gauge. ;Core: Polystyrene. 3: Tops and bottoms of all exterior doors shall be closed for a flush, waterproof construction with no visible seams ato top and bottom of door by one of the following methods: a. Install minimum 20 gauge channels (legs down at top of door, legs up at bottom of door) flush with top and bottomedges (no recesses). Seam wire weld continuous around entire perimeter of channel and grind smooth. b. Install minimum 20 gauge channels (legs down at top of door, legs up at bottom of door) flush with top and bottomedges (no recesses). Spot weld and grind smooth. Install fiberglass resin filler (automotive body filler) continuous around entire perimeter of channel and sand smooth. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60 /ZF180 coating. 5. Thickness: 1 3/4" 08100 -2 6. Texture: Smooth faces. 7. 12 gauge hinge channel, 14 gauge lock channel, 16 gauge top and bottom end channel 8. 12 gauge closer reinforcement, 7 gauge hinge reinforcement. 9. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. 10. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut -outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 2. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Interior /Exterior Door Frames: Full profile welded, grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 1. 14 gauge. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60 /ZF180 coating. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames: Full profile welded, grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 1. 16 gauge. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60 /ZF180 coating. 3. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: 08850. B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4 -inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop - assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust - inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high - build, water - resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' r A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. ct, , B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. yt 08100 -3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Utilize masonry anchors in masonry construction. Countersink anchors; fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed surfaces. C. Grout all frames at cmu, including sidelights, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames or adjacent wall construction. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. G. Touch up damaged factory finishes. H. Cut ends of glazing stops and other materials shall be primed and painted. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on drawings. 08100 -4 c, c� A` 1 , • 4^ co W C1 D co N 08100 -4 SECTION 08334 COILING COUNTER DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - fire -rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. D. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke - Control Door Assemblies, 2003 Edition 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and finish. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and alignment procedures. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Coiling Counter Doors: 1. CHI Overhead Doors: a. Non -Fire Rated: Series 6500. 2. The Cookson Company: a. Non -Fire Rated: Series CD -10. 3. Cornell Iron Works Inc.: a. Non -Fire Rated: Model ESC10. -, 4. McKeon Door Company: a. Non -Fire Rated: Model CS 3000 Series. 5. Overhead Door Corp.: a. Non -Fire Rated: Series 651/657. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08334 -1 A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non - Fire - Rated: Aluminum slat curtain. 1. Mounting: Between jambs, within prepared opening.. 2. Nominal Slat Size: 1 1/2 inches wide. 3. Slat Profile: Flat. 4. Finish: Anodized, dark bronze 5. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated. 6. Hood: Manufacturer's standard; material and finish to match curtain. 7. Operation: Manual push up operation. 8. Head, jamb, and bottom bar weather - stripping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure to CMU walls and /or structural frame. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. P � - r- c 08334 -2 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum- framed storefront B. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. B. Section 08 8500 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2005. E. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008, F. ASTM B 221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007. G. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. H. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. I. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural : Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of IBC 2009 code. 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to L/175 of the clear span or fiexture limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 for spans less than 162" 4. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/240 for spans grater than 162" B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection 08410 -1 iJ A. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. B. Section 08 8500 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2005. E. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008, F. ASTM B 221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007. G. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. H. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. I. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural : Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of IBC 2009 code. 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to L/175 of the clear span or fiexture limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 for spans less than 162" 4. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/240 for spans grater than 162" B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection 08410 -1 of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Thermal Transmittance: Conductive thermal transmittance shall not be more than 0.43 BTU /hr.sq ft.F in accordance with ASTM 1503.1, when glazed with 1" insulated glass. D. Air Infiltration: 1. Unit Framing: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min /sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. E. Condensation Resistance Factor: 1. Measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. 2. Storefront Framing: not less than 57 F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 12 Ibf /sq ft. G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. H. Expansion /Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details. C.:': Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, F _A affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding ' required. e D. `,'Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering o calculations, dimensional limitations. ° E. "Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. Cam! F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Iowa. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS 08410 -2 A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 1 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specifications are based upon the products ofEFCO Corporation to define quality and performance requirements. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers, based upon compliance with plans and specifications include: 1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com, 2. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com. 4. Manko Windows 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum Storefront: 1. Aluminum- Framed Storefront: EFCO 403 -T or equal, thermally broken, factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related (lashings, anchorage, and attachment devices. a. Finish: 1) Typical unless noted otherwise: Class I color anodized. 2. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. a. Cross Section: 2" x 4 1/2" nominal b. All aluminum vertical and horizontal extrusions shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.080" c. Frame; Frame components shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum shear blocks attached to vertical mullions. d. Glazing stops: Flush. e. Dry glazed with EPDM gasket. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). -u B. Fasteners: Stainless steel C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. D. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08850. 1. Glass in Exterior Framing: 1/4" min, tempered as required by code. 2. Glass in Interior Framing: 1/4" min single glazed, trmpered as req'd by code. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or 08410 -3 AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch -up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. 0. Where fasteners penetrate sill (lashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. FY Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I.` Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08850, using interior dry glazing method. K. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. L. Touch -up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non - cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. 08410 -4 B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre- finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. B. Touch -up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 08410 -5 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating sash. ; B. Factory glazing. C. Insect screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 -Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, and descriptions of hardware and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations„ and installation requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 08520 -1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: C.R. Laurence., Inc, (800)421 -6144; Product DW Series vertical sliding service window. 2.02 WINDOWS A. DW Series vertical sliding service window 1. Frames: Aluminum frame modules shall be constructed of 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum. Poly -pile weather stripping and slide locks. 2. 4' -2" wide x 4' -4" high overall size 3. Finish: All aluminum to be clear anodized. 4. Glazing: 1/4" clear tempered. 5. Options: keyed lock, screens, sash balance and surround frame. (specify desired options). B. Performance Requirements: 1. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive aluminum windows. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non - cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. 3.08 SCHEDULE A'. Concession 006, south wall, 1 (one) required. t4° 08520 -2 SECTION 08710 r� DOOR HARDWARE ; PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel doors. B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. C. Thresholds, D. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08100 -Steel Doors and Frames. C. Section 08332 -Coiling Counter Doors: Lockable coiling doors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI /ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.1). C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI /BHMA A156.2). D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.3). E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI /BHMA A156.4).' F. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI /BHMA A156.7). G. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005 (ANSI /BHMA A156.8). H. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI /BHMA A156.13). I. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI /BHMA A156.15). J. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.21). K. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI /BHMA A156.23). L. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. 08710 -1 M. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006. N. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. O. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS- 1PNDHS -5 Series, 1996. P. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. Q. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. R. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers. D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. E. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. F. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards for Fire -Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use by Architect and Contractor. 1B'. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door ° hardware with 5 years of experience. O �J 08710-2 D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) qualified person to assist in the work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 10% additional interchangeable cores. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 HARDWARE A. Finishes: 1, US26D Satin Chrome unless noted otherwise 2. Closer casing: aluminum paint B. Butt Hinges 1. Unless otherwise specified: a. 4 -1/2" x 4 -1/2" b. Non - removable pins c. Permanently lubricated ball bearing at all doors d. Five knuckle 2. Interior /Exterior doors: <� n i a. 1 1/2 pair (min.) to V -0 ", provide 1 additional hinge for each additional 2'6" or fraction thereof. b. Stainless Steel 3. Numbers scheduled are Stanley Works a. Exterior; FBB 191: Ball bearing, stainless steel - Satin finish. 4. Comparable products from Hager, Lawrence and McKinney are acceptable. C. Mortise Lockset 1. Specifications are based upon the products of Schlage Manufacturing. Products of the following manufacturers, based on compliance with plans and specifications will also be acceptable: 2. Schlage L- Series VandlgardMortise Lever Lockset 08710 -3 a. Mortise type conforming to ANSI A 156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1. Install on doors prepared to ANSI A 156.115(w) specifications. b. Escutcheon: L Full Face c. Trim: ND Rhodes d. Dormitory Function; "anti- panic" operation; inside lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt 3. 2 314" backset. 4. Latchbolt; 3/4" throw, stainless steel, one -piece latch, reversible, with anti - friction piece. 5. Deadbolt; 1" throw, stainless steel with two enclosed hardened steel roller armor pins. 6. Strike: Stainless steel, dustproof, with curved lip. 7. Provide abrasive coating to backside of lever at all hazardous locations as required by ANSI A117.1. D. Door Closers: 1. Manufacturers: a. LCN Supersmoothee Series, 4041. 2. Non - handed, adjustable closing and latching speeds, adjustable backcheck and spring power. 3. Comply with ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements. 4. Aluminum or cast iron enclosure. 5. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for door size and mounting location. E. Door stops: As required at all doors. 1. Wall: Ives 407 1/2 concave F. Drop Down Door Leg Holder: 1. Ives #452, aluminum with replaceable rubber tip G. Overhead Door Holder /Stop: 1. .Glyhn- Johnson series 90 or equal H. Threshold: 11. Zero 564B or equal r 2. Comply with ADA requirements. v, I. -Weather*ipping -I. Perimeter: Reese DS70 2. Sweep: Reese 323, polyurethane 3. Astragal: As required by installation 4. As manufactured by Reese, National, Zero or as approved by the Architect. J. Kickplates: 1. 22 ga stainless steel with eased edges and satin polish finish. 2. 12" high x 2" less than door width, unless noted otherwise 3. Hager 1985 or approved equal. K. Head Rain Drip 1. Manufacturer a. Pemko 346 Series b. Reese R201series c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements 2. Anodized finish, clear or dark bronze as selected by Architect L. Knox Box 1. Knox -Box 3200 series, with RMK recessed mounting kit 2. Color: Aluminum 3. Provide 1 at front entry. Verify location with Architect and local Fire Marshal. 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL O8710 -4 A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 2.03 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five - knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.r> 2. Provide ball- bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non - removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges. 2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring lockirig. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, six -pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and /or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. D. Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated "push /pull" or "not required to latch ". 2.05 KEYING A. Security keyed with restricted keyway to Owner's requirements. Hardware supplier shall coordinate keying. 1. Owner, Hardware Supplier, Architect, and Lock representative shall attend meeting to establish keying schedule. B. Provide locksets and cylinders with levels of control as follows: 1. Master key locksets and cylinders in accordance with Owner's requirements and final keying schedule. 2. Interchangeable cores; a. 7 -pin small format interchangeable core, ANSI A156.5, Grade 1. b. Manufacturers: 1) Best Lock Corporation, 9K series c. All locks will be keyed into a uniform master keyed locking system. d. Security keyed with restricted keyway to Owner's requirements. All keying and coordination shall be by hardware supplier. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of the work. Upon return of reviewed finish hardware schedule, arrange a meeting between the Owner, Hardware Supplier, Interchangable Core Manufacturer's Representative (if req'd) and other involved parties to establish a 08710 -5 keying schedule based on Owner's project requirements. e. Provide an additional 10% combinated cores for Owner's future use. f. Provide bitting list with set -up chart to Owner at Project Closeout. 3. All keying and bitting shall be performed by and registered with the lock manufacturer. 4. Permanent keys shall be packed and marked in envelopes and delivered by registered mail direct to Owner from Manufacturer. 5. Key system shall incorporate visual key control. All key bows and back of cylinders (not face) shall be stamped with proper key symbol. 6. Furnish keys and blanks as follows: a. Provide 3 cut keys per door. b. Provide an additional 3 keys per door to be cut as directed by Owner c. All keys: Nickel Silver. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire -rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. ,,'Install hardware on fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. � Install alljfinish hardware as required prior to painting and then remove and reinstall after "painting is completed. 1 E. Jourrting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." FbT wood doors: Comply with DHl "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for -Wood Flush Doors" 3.03 FiEib QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Hardware Supplier's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall field inspect and certify hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified 3,04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Group 1 (doors 002, 004, 005, 006A) 1. 1 1/2 pr ss butt hinges 2. Mortise Lockset; dormitory function, lever inside retracts latch and deadbolt in single 08710 -6 action, key outside locks /unlocks lever and retracts deadbolt, inside lever always active. 3. Weatherstripping a. Perimeter b. Bottomsweep 4. Threshold; yes 5. Closer; yes 6. Chain stop with spring 7. Kickplate; 12 ", push side 8. Drop leg holder at door 006A B. Group 2 (doors 003) 1. 1 1/2 pr ss butt hinges 2. Mortise Lockset; dormitory function, lever inside retracts latch and deadbolt in single action, key outside locks /unlocks lever and retracts deadbolt, inside lever always active. 3. Weatherstripping: none 4. Threshold; none 5. Closer; none 6. Chain stop with spring 7. Kickplate; 12 ", push side 8. 08710 -7 f•J ( i) , � J a _E } 08710 -7 SECTION 08850 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulated Glass B. Single pane glazing C. Safety glazing D. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals -s B. Section 08100 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 08410 -Aluminum Storefront. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass- -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004. E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. F. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 2001. G. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. H. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004. I. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 IBC code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300- Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, 08850 -1 size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.07 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS MATERIALS c� A. ,blear Float Glass (Type 1): Clear, heat strengthened. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing f € _ select). Comply with ASTM C 1048. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum. B. °Safety Glass (Type 2): Clear; fully tempered. t. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 3. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum. 2.02 GLASS TYPES A. Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers listed under Glass Materials. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Monolithic Glass Units (Type 1): Single pane glazing 1. 1/4" PPG solarban 70XL Low -E #2 a. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .28 b. Visible Light Transmittance: 64% 2. Tempered as required at non -fire rated hazardous locations as required by code. a. Permanently label safety glazing 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non - skinning. 08850 -2 B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non - bleeding, non - staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 1. Comply with manufacturer's requirements at fire -rated glazing. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option 11. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option It. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; inch size; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. . Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. r ; 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET /DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 08850 -3 C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop withsealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. 3.07 SCHEDULE A, Refer to A601 for window glazing types. 08850 -4 t .. J. i u, U 08850 -4 r -� SECTION 09900 c7 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this section and on the Drawings. D. Surfaces to receive high performance coating are indicated in Section 09960, 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop - primed items. B. Section 09960 - High- Performance Coatings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master Painters and Decorators Association; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and /or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel "). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross - reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system (copy of relevant MPI Manual page is acceptable). 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed. C. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with Contract Documents and are compatible with applicable substrates and with each other. D. Samples: Submit three paper "drop" samples, 8 -1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. 3. Semi - Transparent Stain; submit sample on 6" long siding /trim board to be used. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch -up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. F. O &M Manuals; submit mix formula and base for each color. 09900 -1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. B. Material Safety Data Sheets: At project site maintain file of MSDS sheets for each product used; become familiar with and follow manufacturer's stated application and safety requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, c. unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. c: F. ; Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at substrate surface. IY'1.98 EXTRA MATERIALS �'r s A. c See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. y B. r, $ upply 1 gallon of each color and type; store where directed. C. ` Label each container with color, type, texture, and mix formula in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. C. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. D. Paints: in order to define requirements for quality, grades, and etc., material specifications are based upon the products of Sherwin Williams. Products of other manufacturer's, complying with drawings, specifications, and referenced manufacturer /brand may be acceptable, including: 09900 -2 1. Duron, Inc. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Diamond Vogel. E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically: 1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g /L, maximum. 2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g /L, maximum. 3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g /L, maximum. 4) Varnishes: 350 g /L, maximum. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Paints and Coatings: Provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI Categories, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings, except field - catalyzed coatings. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated. B. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. C. Where sheen is not specified or more than one sheen is specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. D. Provide colors as directed by Architect. 1. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 2. Paint Colors a. ST -1 General Siding/Trim Stain b. ST- 2Accent band Stain c. PT -3HM Door /Frame d. PT- 4Restroom Floors e. PT -5 Restroom Walls /Ceilings 2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. METALS - GALVANIZED 1. Gloss Finish, alkyd 2. 1st Coat: S -W Galvite HS 09900 -3 a. (2 -4 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S -W Pro Industrial Industrial Enamel, B54Z -200 Series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Industrial Enamel, B54Z -200 Series a. (2.2 -3.5 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Misc. galvanized items at exterior not indicated for Hi- performance coating in Section 099600 B. WOOD - SEMI - TRANSPARENT STAIN 1. 1st Coat: S -W Exterior Polyurethane Semi - Transparent Stain 2. 2nd Coat:S -W Exterior Polyurethane Semi - Transparent Stain 3. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Exterior cedar siding, trim, siding panels b. Interior plywood 2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. CONCRETE MASONRY - EPDXY 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1st Coat: S -W Loxon Block Surfacer 3. 2nd Coat S -W Loxon Block Surfacer a. (8 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry per coat) 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy K46 Series 5. 4th Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy K46 Series a. (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) 6. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Interior CMU indicated for epoxy finish B. GALVANIZED STEEL 1. Semi -Gloss Finish c , 2 1st Coat: S -W ProCr I Universal Primer, B66 -310 Series a.' (2 -4 mils dry) 2nd Coat:S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / 860V25 4. " P.rd Coat: S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / B60V25 a. (2.5 - 3 mils dry per coat) 5. ,, Provide finish on the following surfaces r... ! a. Misc. galvanized metal items B. - HM doors and frames C., METALS 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1st Coat: S -W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66 -310 Series a. (2 -4 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45 -150 series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45 -150 series a. (1.5 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Misc. metal items D. PLYWOOD - CEILINGS 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1st Coat: S -W Premium Wall and Wood Primer 3. 2nd Coat S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy K46 Series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Epoxy K46 Series a. (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Plywood ceilings indicated for painted finish E. CEDAR DECKING 09900 -4 G -' e 1 1. Factory Prefinished, refer to 06150 Wood Decking PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE -- SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Paint all exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain "natural; 'the term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built -in fixtures when they are in place. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: 1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item. 4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior doors the same as exposed faces. 6. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Paint shop - primed mechanical and electrical items occurring in finished areas. 8. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 9. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers. 10. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 11. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Any voice /data cabling 2. Items fully factory- finished unless specifically noted; factory- primed items are not considered factory- finished. 3. Items indicated to receive other finish. 4. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. 5. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 6. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster. 7. Polished and brushed stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead. 8. Acoustical materials. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop - applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 09900 -5 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. E. Measure the ph factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process, using the method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual. 1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work. 2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial action. If a different primer or paint systems is required, state the total cost of the change. Do not proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces as recommended by paint coating manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments and as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows for the applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as many as necessary for best results; where the Manual references external standards for preparation (e.g. SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards. B. Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other contaminants do not fall on newly painted, wet surfaces. C. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces, fittings, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface - applied protection before preparation and finishing. 2'. After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. SurfAdeis Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or 'repairexi"sting coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. `Barks Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra - sodium phosphate *d bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. 1existing walls /ceiling to be painted: 1. Remove all existing coatings that are loose or exhibit surface defects. Sand out/fill areas or exposed edges of existing finish 2. All existing misc. anchoring components, nails, screws, expansion anchors, hangars, etc. shall be removed by contractor from existing exposed surfaces. All existing or new holes, cracks, or otherwise damaged wall surfaces shall be patched and /or repaired to match existing surfaces prior to application of new finishes. 3. Remove all existing adhesivves , including those from markerboards that have been removed. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified or recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as indicated. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and according to manufacturer's instructions. 1••11 . 1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush marks. 2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for the paint system that application method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for material used and objects to be painted is acceptable. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs, sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections. 1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 2. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats. 6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 7. Stippled Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to even, fine texture; leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; back roll final coat to achieve a uniform surface. F. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. G. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1. Remove hardware from doors prior to painting and reinstall after painting is completed. 2. Touch -up factory prime coat as required. Verify that top bottom and edges are primed 3. Finish coat both faces, top, bottom, and edges of doors, including in top and bottom channel of interior doors. 09900 -7 hY C]J f, I Ji 09900 -7 H. Interior concrete and masonry surfaces; block filler shall be roll applied, or spray applied and back - rolled. 1. Dark and deep colors; Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many as required for complete hide and uniform appearance. J. Whenever necessary to obtain a uniform finish /sheen, a whole wall shall be refinished rather than spot finishing damaged or unsatisfactory areas. K. All data cabling, including concealed or above ceiling, shall be protected from paint overspray or installed after painting is completed. Paint on data cabling voidsthe manufacturer's warranty. Any data cabling with paint on them shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site. C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual. F. Painting Equipment is to be cleaned in Contractor furnished receptacles with waste being properly disposed. The waste is not to be poured down the sanitary sewer, storm sewer, or poured out on the ground. Any costs incurred by the Owner for clean -up will be charged to the Contractor. c+ C) c� C =� CJ SECTION 09960 HIGH- PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 4`> 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES n A. High performance coatings. i B. Special preparation of surfaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SSPC -SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon of each type and color. 2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document that applies to application on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. C. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi -coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. 1. Lead content: Not greater than 0.06 percent by weight of total nonvolatile content. 2. Chromium content, as hexavalent chromium, zinc chromate, or strontium chromate: None. 3. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: As required by applicable ,1 ".1 regulations. 4. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Polyurethane Floor Coating for Concrete Floor: Three coats, polyurethane, non -skid finish, with silica sand for slip resistance. 1. Product characteristics: a. Percentage of solids by volume: 60 %, minimum. b. Percentage of solids by weight: 64 %, minimum. 2. Mechanically abrade floor 3. 1st Coat; Primer for concrete, Sonneborn Prime and Kate 4. 2nd Coat; Polyurethane finish, Sonneborn Sonothane VOC 5. Broadcast silica sand 6. 3rd Coat; Polyurethane finish, Sonneborn Sonothane VOC 7. Provide Polyurethane Floor Coating at locations as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule. C. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate, unless otherwise specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of substrates. C. Cementitious Substrates: Do not begin application until substrate has cured 28 days minimum and measured moisture content is not greater than 16 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac. C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store. N D. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Concrete Floors: Mechanically abrade floor to medium -grit sandpaper texture. Remove curing and parting compounds and other surface hardeners. Clean floors of oil, grease, and other bond inhibiting materials. F~ Ferrous Metal 1. Solvent clean. 2. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using power tools according to SSPC -SP 3. G. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. 3.03 PRIMING A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in accordance with coating manufacturer's Instructions. B. Concrete: Prior to priming, patch with masonry filler to produce smooth surface. 3.04 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified. 09960 -2 B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. D. Painting equipment is to be cleaned in Contractor furnished receptacles with waste being properly and legally disposed. Paint waste is not to be poured down the sanitary sewer, storm sewer, or out onto the ground. Any costs incurred by the Owner for clean -up will be charged to the Contractor. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. 09960 -3 �u SECTION 10180.01 TOILET ACCESSORIES t> ;n PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet Room Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. B. ASTM A 240/A 240M -Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory -apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight- exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In order to define requirements for quality, function, sizes, and materials, specifications are based upon the products of ASI- American Specialties. Products of the following manufacturers, complying with requirements of drawings and specifications will be acceptable: 1. Bobrick 2. Bradley 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 10180 -1 B. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 18 -8 alloy. B. Fasteners; ss, tamper resistant head, type as required for wall surface 2.03 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Soap Dispensers - Surface Mounted: 1. Provided and installed by Owner B. Paper Towel Dispenser - Surface Mounted: 1. ASI #0210 2. Surface mounted, holds 525 standard multi -fold or 400 standard c -fold paper towels, 22 ga. type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish. 3. Locks: Tumbler locks, keyed alike other toilet accessory locks, with two keys for each lock. 4. 145/8 "hx11 1/16" w x 4 1/16" d C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal - Surface Mtd: 1. ASI #0852 -SH, surface mounted with shelf 2. Door and cabinet fabricated from 22 ga., type 304, stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish. 3. Shelf fabricated from 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, noA satin finish. D. Toilet Paper Holder - Surface Mounted: 1. Provided and installed by Owner E. Mop Holder: 1. ASI #8215 -3 2. 26" length with three mop holders. 3. , Fabricated of one -piece hi -hat channel, 20 ga., type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish 4. Mop Holder: pivoting spring loaded serrated rubber cam. ? F IF.— ' Mirrors' c)1. ASI #8026 12. r 7Mirror ;18 -8 stainless steel, type 304, No. 20 ga with No.8 mirror finish. L;-3. Backing; 1/4" thick tempered water resistant masonite 4. 5/6' returns to wall all around Four (4) 7/32" dia mounting holes. 6. 24 "Wx36 "H G. Grab Bars: 1. ASI #3500 series with flanges for exposed mounting. 2. Sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings and in schedule. 3. Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from type 304, 18 -8 alloy, stainless steel with no.4 satin finish. 4. Tubing: 1 -1/2" OD, 18 ga., formed 1 -1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end, peened finish. 5. Flange: 3" dia, 1/8" thick, with three countersunk holes for exposed fasteners. 6. Fasteners shall be tamper resistant, stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. B. Installer's Examination: 10180 -2 I . Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt. 3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). C. Co- ordinate fastener type with wall construction. Provide solid wood blocking for support in all stud walls. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight- exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Men's Toilet 1. Surface Mid. Paper Towel Disp 1 ea 2. Soap Disp, Surface mid By Owner 3. Toilet Paper Holder By Owner 4. Grab Bars 36 ", 18 ", and 42" length 1 ea B. Women's Toilet: 1. Surface Mtd. Paper Towel Disp 1 ea 2. Soap Disp, Surface mtd By Owner 3. Toilet Paper Holder By Owner 4. Sanitary Napkin Disposal 1 ea 5. Grab Bars, 36 ", 18 ", and 42 " length 1 ea y i C. Sink: Each at 06 Concession and 05 Storage p,t 1. Surface Mtd. Paper Towel Dispenser 1 ea. 2. Surface mtd. soap dispenser By Owner. D. Mechanical: 1. Mop Holder 1 ea. 10180 -3 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART 1 GENERALr 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plaque signs @ Restrooms 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI /ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002. C. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Signage: 1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com. 2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 1 0400 -1 3. ASI Modulex 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI /ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. B. Signage Type A, Plaque Type Sign; Identification Sign. 1. "Intouch" Series exterior plaque sign as manufactured by ASI Modulex or equal a. 8 1/2" H x 8 1/2" W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC /vinyl acetate bonded to acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and corners, .125" thick, matte finish, unframed. b. Provide "tactile" signage, with 1" letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. c. Screw mounted, tamper resistant heads. d. Copy for sign to be verifyied with Owner /Architect and to include: 1) MEN, with universal men symbol and universal HC symbol, braille; 1 ea 2) WOMEN, with universal women symbol and universal HC symbol, braille; 1 ea PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs to comply with ADA requirements: 1. Verify with Architect and Owner D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. 10400 -2 c�7 ry t � � l � J 10400 -2 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. r3 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.' 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300- Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide size, material, rough opening, materials, and finish for cabinets. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2. Pyro -Chem: www.pyrochem.com. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Fire Extinguisher: 1. Multi- Purpose, 10 lb extinguisher 2. Provide wall bracket for units not in cabinet PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION 10523 -1 A. Install bracket plumb and level, max 48" inches from finished floor to operating mechanism of door and /or fire extinguisher, and max 27" from finished floor to bottom of exposed edge. B. Secure rigidly in place. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Boat Storage, wall mtd, 1 ea. B. Concession 06, wall mounted, 1 ea. 10523 -2 c 10523 -2 SECTION 15000 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. B. C. D. E 1.02 This section applies to all mechanical work. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and General Requirements apply to all mechanical work. (J 1 � e ca Supplementary Conditions and Each specification section within their respective Division shall be coordinated with all other sections in that division for related work. The project documents contemplate the complete installation of the systems described herein, or shown on the drawings, so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the Owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. The Contractor shall be obliged to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly herein are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the systems, and which are normally furnished on installations of this type. COORDINATION OF WORK A. General: The Contractor shall recognize that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships that must be established within the mechanical and electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible for work fitting in place without conflict with other trades, where proper planning could avoid interference. This Contractor shall examine the locations and verify all measurements, distances, elevations and existing conditions before starting work. Because the drawings are diagrammatic and on a small scale, all rises, drops, offsets, etc., have not been shown. The Contractor shall agree to provide and install the necessary piping, fittings, valves, ducts, duct fittings and offsets, and other specialties to suit such conditions without additional cost to the Owner. Mechanical drawings shall not be used for general construction dimensions or for type of material used for general construction. For exact building layout, dimensions and building materials used, Contractor shall refer to Architectural Drawings. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Contractor shall comply with all Stale, and local codes and ordinances. B. Contractor shall make application for, obtain and pay for all required permits and certificates of inspection of the work. 15000 -1 0 2010 by FEI C. All equipment, materials, and installation procedures shall comply with standards listed within each specification. D. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. E. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Prepare and submit four (4) copies of maintenance and operation instructions for all mechanical equipment famished. One copy will remain on record in the Engineer's office. Organize maintenance and operating manual information into suitable sets of manageable size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed (thumb - tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring diagrams, recommended "turn- around" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product data, signed letters of certification of inspection and similar application information. Bind each manual of each set in a heavy -duty 2 -inch, 3 -ring vinyl - covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each binder. B. Record Drawings: I. Provide one (1) set of mechanical drawings marked -up with actual installation locations. Give special attention to the complete and accurate recording of underground conduit, piping and ductwork, other concealed and non - accessible work, branching arrangement and valve location for piping systems, locations of dampers and coils in duct systems, locations of control system sensors and other control devices, and work of change orders where not shown accurately by Contract Documents. C, Contract Document Discrepancies: 1. If-Contract Document requirements appear to make it impossible to produce first class , work, or should discrepancies appear among Contract Documents, request interpretation b e fore proceeding with work. If Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out work in satisfactory manner. Should conflict occur in or between drawings and specifications, Contractor is deemed to have 3 estimated on more expensive way of doing work unless he shall have asked for and obtained written decision before submission of proposal as to method or materials required. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to the building or its appurtenances resulting from the substitution of equipment to that specified in the Contract Documents. E. Review of shop drawings does not release the Contractor from further satisfactory operating responsibilities. Material and equipment shall still be required to meet the requirements of the 15000 -2 0 2010 by FEI Construction Documents and shall be approved for final acceptance when construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated, tested, adjusted and balanced to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of the area involved shall be submitted by the Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment. Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor -borne expense. 1.05 FEES, PERMITS, LICENSES, UTILITY CONNECTION CHARGES, AND UTILITY COST A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all fees, permits, licenses, utility connection charges (water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer and gas) and utility cost for services to the building required. Capital facilities utility service charges are to be paid directly by Owner, not part of the Construction Contract. B. The Contractor shall maintain all necessary signal lights and guards against danger auld use all proper means for the safety of the public. C. The Contractor shall pay for opening and repairing all pavement cuts. D. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer copies of all fees, permits add licenses., required for all mechanical work herein specified before any mechanical work is stalled, 1.06 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. General: Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor for proper electrical power characteristics to all mechanical equipment which require electrical power connection. Unless specifically shown otherwise Electrical Contractor shall provide all power connections required to provide power to the equipment and Mechanical Contractor shall provide all equipment and electrical wiring required for all start -stop control and safety interlock functions required for all equipment. B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or partially specified in this section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following: Motors for mechanical equipment. 2. Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. C. Mechanical /Electrical Coordination Schedule: See schedule on drawings for further Mechanical/Electrical coordination requirements. 15000 -3 0 2010 by FEI 1.07 ELECTRICMOTORS A. Basic Motor Requirements 1. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motors I HP and Larger: Polyphase. 3. Motors smaller than 1 HP: Single- phase. 4. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 5. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected. 6. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 8. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated. B. Polyphase Motors: I. Description: NEMA MG -1, medium induction motor. a. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG -1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated. b. Premium Energy- Efficient Design: All motors. C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate winding for each speed. d. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. e. Beatings: Double - shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. f Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. g. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motors Used with Reduced - Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit ,control method. ct r 15000 -4 0 2010 by FBI C. Single -Phase Motors: 1. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one (1) of the following, to suit starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application. a. Permanent -split capacitor. b. Split -phase start, capacitor run. C. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 2. Shaded -Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 HP ; i 3. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Bearings: Ball- bearing type for belt - connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single -phase motors. 1.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site, each Contractor shall clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 1.09 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. B. Operating histructions: Conduct a walk- through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems. 1.10 FINAL COMPLETION A. The Mechanical Contractors shall not call for a final completion check until the entire Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Systems have been installed, adjusted, balanced and in full and complete satisfactory operation and the following certifications of inspection from equipment suppliers have been completed and submitted to the Architect/Engineer. 15000 -5 © 2010 by FEI 1.11 FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment will not be made until the Contractor has satisfactorily completed all final inspection items. 1.12 GUARANTEE A. The one (1) year guarantee period shall not start until the project is fully completed and the Contractor has received the Filial Payment and Certificate of Completion. B. All equipment and all work shall be fully guaranteed, parts, and labor, for one (1) full year from the date of the Certificate of Completion. Repairs made during this period must be fully guaranteed for an additional one (1) year period from the date of repairs. C. The Mechanical Contractor has the full responsibility to guarantee all equipment and work and shall assume full responsibility to repair any equipment at his cost that the manufacturer refuses to guarantee. D, The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work provided hereon and to charge the Contractor for same if repairs are not made by the Contractor within a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a non- critical item. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Painting of exposed mechanical work is specified and performed under other divisions of these specifications. B. Factory finishes, shop priming, and special protective coatings are specified in the individual equipment specification sections. C. Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is specified, all maned or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish at the time of final inspection. c• � f� I j N �O 0 �-+ I5000 -6 2010 by FEI SECTION 15010 ' SHOP DRAWINGS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Submittals shall include specially prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects. B. Submittals shall also include product data which includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specially prepared for this project, but with the designation of selections from among available choices for this project clearly identified. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of Architect/Engineer's review with another. B. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, Subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and providing space for Architect's/Engineer's "Action" marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractors office will be returned by Architect/Engineer "Without Action ". C. Provide Contractor's certification on form, ready for execution, stating that information submitted complies with requirements of contract documents. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to the building or its appurtenances resulting from the substitution of equipment to that specified in the Contract Documents. E. Review of submittals does not release the Contractor from further satisfactory operating responsibilities. Material and equipment shall be approved for final acceptance when construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated, tested, adjusted and balanced to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of the area involved shall be submitted by the Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment. Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor -borne expense. 15010 -1 0 2010 by FEI 1.03 SUBMITTAL LIST A. Submittals shall be submitted for, but not limited to, the items listed in each section of the specifications. Submittals, in addition to those listed, may be required by the Architect/Engineer. The following submittal register is a sununary list of submittals required for the project. SUBMITTAL REGISTER SECTION ITEM TRANS # DATE REC. BY A/E DATE RETUR NED 15000 General Provisions 15050 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods 15251 Plumbing Insulation 15400 Plumbing Piping and Equipment 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15838 Power Ventilators 15890 Air Distribution 15010 -2 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 15050 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. a. Valves: (1) Ball (2) Check b. Piping Specialties: (1) Pipe escutcheons (2) Pipe sleeves } J r (3) Dielectric unions C. Meters and gauges: (1) Glass thermometers (2) Pressure gauges d. Supports and anchors: (1) Horizontal- piping hangers and supports (2) Saddles and shields 2. Mechanical identification. 3. Vibration control: a. Flexible pipe connectors 4. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 15050 -1 0 2010 by FE1 5. Installation requirements common to piping and equipment specification Sections. 6. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 7. Excavation and backfill. 8. Piping tests. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels, C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL and FM Compliance: Provide meters, gauges, and supports which are UL listed and FM approved. B. MSS Standard Compliance: Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP -58. C. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. D. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces fire increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved: If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. Cl) t v, o 0 N 15050 -2 2010 by FBI 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dill. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised- §ervice rtompanies;,' and controlling agencies. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory - threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. B. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. 15050 -3 © 2010 by FEI Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 %) and silver (approximately 5 %), having 0.10% lead content. 2. Alloy Sn50: Tin (50 %) and lead (50 %) (for use on nonpotable water systems only). C. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following: 1. Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC): ASTM D 2564. 4. PVC to ABS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138, color other than orange. D. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Pipe Escutcheons: 1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. 2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. E> 'l" Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2'i' Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. §iS bieylectric Unions: Factory - fabricated, union assembly for 250 PSIG (1725 kpa) minimum working pressure at a 180 °F (82 °C) temperature. �3 4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300 PSIG (2070 kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 °F (107 °C) temperature. 15050 -4 0 2010 by FEI 5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300 PSIG (2070 kPa) working pressure at 225 °F (107 °C) temperature. C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: W 0 Steel Sheet- Metal: 24 -gauge (0.70mm) or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast -Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pied, having_, plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. VALVES ;1 General: Provide factory- fabricated valves recommended by Manufacturer for use in- service °i indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with Installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Ball Valves: Comply with the following requirements: Ball valves - 1 -inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 PSI SWP pressure, 600 PSI non -shock WOG pressure; 2 -piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584 or B61, full port, 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl - covered steel handle. Provide extended solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; full depth ANSI threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. Provide 2 -inch extended handles of non - thermal conductive material. Valve pressure ratings shall be cast into the body of the valve. 2. Ball Valves - 1- 1 /4- Inches to 2- Inches: Rated for 150 PSI SWP pressure, 600 PSI non- shock WOG pressure; 2 -piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584 or B61, full port, 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced and replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stern, and vinyl - covered steel handle. Provide extended solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; full -depth ANSI threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. Provide 2- inch extended handles of non - thermal conductive material. Valve pressure ratings shall be cast into the body of the valve. C. Check Valves: Comply with the following requirements: 15050 -5 0 2010 by FBI Swing Check Valves - 2- Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62, horizontal swing, Y- pattern, with a bronze disc, and having threaded or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used with threaded end connections where pressure requires or Class 125 valves are not available. 2. Swing Check Valves - 2 -1/2- Inches and Larger: MSS SP -71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 3. Wafer Check Valves: Class 250, cast iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non - slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Valve shall be designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. 2.05 METERS AND GAUGES A. Thermometers: General: Provide thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. 2. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel or hard powder coat finish, glass or acrylic front, 9- inches long. '3y Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180° adjustment in vertical plane, 360° adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. s� a 4. ;Tdbe and Capillary: Blue organic- liquid filled, magnifying lens, ±1 scale division accuracy, shock mounted. S: __-S ale: Satin faced, non - reflective white aluminum, permanently etched black markings. 61 Stem: Copper - plated steel, brass or die -cast aluminum, for separable socket, length to suit installation. Thermometer Wells: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2 -inch extension for insulated piping. Provide cap fastened to well when used in a non - permanent thermometer location. 8. Thermometer wells shall be installed at each thermometer and at each point where a temperature sensing device is required by the control specifications. Range: Conform to the following: 15050 -6 0 2010 by FEI a. Hot Water: 30 °F to 240 °F with 2 °F scale divisions. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Marsh Gauges. b. Moeller Instruments. C. Miljoco Corporation. d. Weiss Instruments. B. Pressure Gauges: 2 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 91 General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Type: General use, ±1 % accuracy, ANSI B 40.1 Grade IA, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection. Case: Stainless steel, glass or acrylic lens, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. Connector: Brass, lower mount with 1/4 -inch male NPT. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched black markings. Accessories: a. Provide protective coil siphon when used for steam service. b. Provide each gauge with a shut -off needle valve. C. Provide pressure snubber where spikes may be present. Range: Conform to the following: a. Water: 0 -100 PSI. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Marsh Gauges. b. Moeller Instruments. C. Miljoco Corporation. d. Weiss Instruments. 2.06 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal- piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP -58, of one (1) of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal- piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one (1) type by one (1) manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with 15050 -7 © 2010 by FEI •3 .,1 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal- piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP -58, of one (1) of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal- piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one (1) type by one (1) manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with 15050 -7 © 2010 by FEI saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper- plated hangers and supports for copper- piping systems. 2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 3. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 2. 4. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. 5. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. 6. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. 7. Trapeze type with horizontal angle iron. B. Saddles and Shields: I. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory - fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation 2. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recotmnended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. 4. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degree insert of high density, 100 PSI, water - proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 2.07 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Markers: C) 11, General: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include contact -type, permanent adhesive or fasteners to mount on equipment. t c i OTE: Coordinate if Owner has a required equipment bar code system that also needs to,be specified here. Terminology: Match drawing schedules as closely as possible unless directed otherwise by Owner. 3. Data Required: a. Equipment Description, i.e. Domestic Water Heater. b. Schedule Mark, i.e. DWH -1. 15050 -8 © 2010 by FBI 4. Marker Size: 2 -1/2- by 4- inches for main control valves; 4 -1/2- by 6- inches for equipment. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Snap -On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed, semi -rigid snap -on, color - coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6- inches (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened by the following method: a. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 -inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 - inches. 3. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown on drawings, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. a. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with avows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. C. Plastic Tape: General: Provide manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure- sensitive (self- adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 2. Width: Provide 1 -1/2 -inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6- inches, 2 -1/2 -inch wide tape for larger pipes. 3. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, or as scheduled below: "r J ITEM BAND COLOR Domestic Cold Water Green Domestic Hot Water Yellow 2.08 JOINT SEALERS A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: 15050 -9 © 2010 by FEI One -part, non- acid - curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non - traffic areas for masonry, glass, alumirmm, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. One -part, mildew - resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non - traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and non- porous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with non- porous substrates; and subject to in- service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. -; Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: +a.; One -Part, Non - acid - Curing, Silicone Sealant: (1) 'Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. (or Equal) f r ' r � -b. One -Part, Mildew- Resistant, Silicone Sealant: €j - (1) 'Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. (or Equal) D. Acrylic - Emulsion Sealants: One -part, nonsag, mildew- resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 %. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. "Chem -Calk 600," Bostic Construction Products Div. (or Equal) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. 15050 -10 © 2010 by FEI G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 -inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: 1. Chrome- Plated Piping: Cast - brass, one - piece, with set - screw, and polished chrome- plated finish. Use split- casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped- steel, with set - screw. 3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast -iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped - steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome- plated finish. 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped - steel, with set -screw or spring clips. N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic (removable) sleeves. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2- inches (50mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast -iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch (6mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6- inches. 15050 -11 © 2010 by FEI b. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6- inches and larger that penetrate gypsum -board partitions. C. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast -iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2- inches (50mm) above finished floor level. 4. Except for below -grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Q. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for I -inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. I . Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 -inch. 2. Install cast -iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 -inch and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. R. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1 -inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. S. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove buns. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove buns and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: t a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of s nternal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded intojoint. `° `ti Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). C. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 15050 -12 Q 2010 by FEI 5. Plastic Pipe and Fitting Solvent - Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following standards: a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling of solvent- cement and primers. b. Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS): ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661. C. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC): ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493. d. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Application: ASTM D 2672. e. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non - Pressure Application: ASTM D 2855. I. PVC to ABS (Non - Pressure) Transition: Procedure and solvent cement described in ASTM D 3138. T. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions in piping 2 -inch (50rmn) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 2 -inch (50mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Wet Piping Systems (Water and Steam): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vault")id other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. 4. Install isolation valves upstream of all dielectric unions and flanges. c.) 3.02 EQUIPMENT INS7ALLATION- COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right -of -way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 15050 -13 © 2010 by FEI 3.03 VALVE SELECTION A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves with the following ends or types of pipe /tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size 2 -Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water and low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 -Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved -end. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General Application: Use ball valves for shut -off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut -down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. D. Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe, and to allow full stein movement. ✓ F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level. G. Valve Schedule: Sectional Valves: a. 2 -inch and Smaller: Ball valves. 2. Shut -off Valves: a. 2 -inch and Smaller: Ball valves. H. VaIVGlJOCations: "L -Plumbing Piping: a._� Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves two (2) or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. b. Shut -off Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. 15050 -14 0 2010 by FEI 3.05 ITA 1110 DnrCC'Trn r /mrAAP rn A W17PP PTA ce TrTf`Amlrl Al Q/'TTrn7 TT r5 SERVICE Domestic Hot & Cold Water VALVES 2 -INCHES AND SMALLER BALL CHECK 150 125 3.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Install isolation valves upstream of all dielectric unions. 3.07 METERS AND GAUGES INSTALLATION A. Glass Thermometers: 1. General: Install glass thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. At inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater. B. Pressure Gauges: 1. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. Across suction and discharge of each hydronic pump. b. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve. C. At domestic water service entrance. 3.08 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS INSTALLATION A. Hangers and Supports 1. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP -69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest 15050 -15 0 2010 by FEI i c,> .t A. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Install isolation valves upstream of all dielectric unions. 3.07 METERS AND GAUGES INSTALLATION A. Glass Thermometers: 1. General: Install glass thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. At inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater. B. Pressure Gauges: 1. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. Across suction and discharge of each hydronic pump. b. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve. C. At domestic water service entrance. 3.08 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS INSTALLATION A. Hangers and Supports 1. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP -69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest 15050 -15 0 2010 by FEI pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Piping shall not be supported from bottom cord of bar joist or from metal roof deck, unless approved by Structural Engineer. Piping may be supported at panel points of bar joists. 2. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 3. Powder - actuated fasteners shall be approved only for installation where load will be applied perpendicular to the fasteners. Powder- actuated fasteners shall not be used where load will be applied to axially to the fasteners. 4. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. B. Saddles and Shields: Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: a. Shields: Where low- compressive - strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8 -inch and over, install wood insulation saddles. b. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor bander is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.09 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. `' Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive or appropriate fasteners on or near each majbaitem of mechanical equipment c ' 1 Locate markers where accessible and visible. e, 2. Iinclude markers for the following categories of equipment: `a: Main control and operating valves. b. Pumps, water heaters, tanks, pressure vessels, humidifiers, water - treatment systems, and similar equipment. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non- concealed locations. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 15050 -16 O 2010 by FEI 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors /ceilings, or enter non- accessible enclosures. 4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 -feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 -feet in congested areas of piping and equipment. r -? 6. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced, markers. (n 3.10 VIBRATION CONTROL INSTALLATION c. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have ' equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are not short- circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support (during installation. B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level. D. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shut -off valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.11 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4- inches larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement. 3.12 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DI.I "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3.13 E XCA VA TION AND BA CKFILL A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation. 15050 -17 © 2010 by FEI B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30- inches below finished grade elevation. C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances. D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. I. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run -off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip -line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. F: Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows: 1, Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6- to 9- inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment. 2.; Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to an elevation below frost line. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed, tested, and the trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and pipe. 5. Excavate trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of pipe and equipment on undisturbed soil. a. For pipes or equipment 6 -inch or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tampered sand 15050 -18 0 2010 by FEI backfill. At each pipe joint over- excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of the pipe of loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface. G. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 °F (2 °C). H. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials. 2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. r. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over roW. bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials. ' C..)? Backfill excavation as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following,, 1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been rec'or'ded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris. J. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8- inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4- inclies in loose depth for material compacted by hand- operated tampers. K. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. L. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. M. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below: Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well- defined moisture - density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and ASTM D 4254, for soils which will not exhibit a well - defined moisture- density relationship (cohesionless soils). 15050 -19 © 2010 by FBI a. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12- inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95% maximum density for cohesive material, or 98% relative density for cohesionless material. b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95% maximum density for cohesive material, or 98% relative density for cohesionless material. C. Other Areas: Compact top 6- inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 % maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90% relative density for cohesionless soils. 2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations. N. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.15 PIPING TEST A. All domestic water piping shall be flushed, tested at 100 PSI and shall be left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 PSI for the balance of the construction period. c > f c_> 15050 -20 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 15251 PLUMBING INSULATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL r� O .1_ A. Plumbing insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. B. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k- value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each plumbing system requiring insulation. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Furnish insulation and materials bearing the manufacturer's label. Only mechanics skilled at such work shall apply materials. Insulation and materials shall be by one of the manufacturers listed. Specialty material shall be of the manufacturer indicated or approved equal. Fire and smoke hazard classification ratings on insulation, jacket, and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 255, ASTM E 84, or UL -723 as follows: 1. Flame Spread Index not exceeding 25. 2. Fuel Contributed not exceeding 50. 3. Smoke Developed Index not exceeding 50. B. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following manufacturers: 1. Armacell LLC 2. Dow Chemical Company 3. Einsulation, Inc. 4. Johns- Manville Corp. 5. Keene Corp. 15251 -1 © 2010 by FEI 6. Knauf Fiber Glass 7. Owens - Corning Fiberglass Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 9. Pittsburg Corning Corp. E. Thermal Conductivity Average Maximum in Btu - in/hr -ft2 at 75 °F Mean Temperature: I. Fiberglass Board = 0.26. 2. Fiberglass Blanket = 0.30. 3. Fiberglass Preformed Pipe Insulation = 0.26. 4. Cellular Glass = 0.30. 5. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular = 0.27. 6. Polyisocyanurate = 0.19. 7. Calcium Silicate = 0.60 @ 500 °F. F. Vapor retarder film and tape shall have a maximum permeance of 0.030 Penn. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Piping insulation shall be as scheduled below: SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND INSULATION AND JACKET LOCATION L Sanitary Above Ground Piping 1 -inch 4 -pcf density fiberglass Drainage from insulation with fire- resistive, drains serving ASJ vapor barrier jacket or cooling coil 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible condensate elastomeric closed -cell plastic drainage to ice foam insulation or 1 -inch machine polyisocyanurate closed cell drainage and insulation with vapor retarder from efrigerated film water coolers 2. Domestic Cold Piping in building 1/2 -inch OR 1 -inch 4 -pcf Water (including through 1 -1/4 -inch density fiberglass insulation HVAC Make -up with fire- resistive, ASJ vapor Lines) barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 3. Domestic Cold Piping in building 1- 1 -inch 4 -pcf density fiberglass 15251 -2 © 2010 by FEI SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND INSULATION AND JACKET LOCATION Water (including 1/2 inch and larger insulation with fire - resistive, HVAC Make -up ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1- Lines) inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 4. Domestic Hot Piping in building 1 -inch 4 -pcf density fiberglass and Recirculated through 2 -inch insulation with fire- resistive, Hot Water ASJ vapor barrier jacket or I- inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or I -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. B. Handicapped Lavatory Drain and P -Trap Assembly and Hot and Cold Water Supply Pipe and Valve Assembly: Insulate handicap lavatory P -trap and angle valve assemblieS3 with the premolded assembly as manufactured by "Truebro" Lav- Guard, Plumberex Pro - Extreme, or approved equal, white color with 3 -piece interlocking trap assembly and interlocking`Ai gle valye assemblies. Fasteners shall be nylon -type supplied with kit. C. Insulation of Piping Specialties on Cold Piping Services: Insulate unions, flanges, strainers flexible connections, hoses, and expansion joints on cold piping services: with: flexible'. elastomeric cellular insulation. Thickness of elastomeric cellular insulation shall be equivalent to thickness of insulation on the piping service as specified in this Section or as shown on the drawings. Insulation shall be sealed to provide a vapor tight barrier. Cold piping' services include domestic cold water systems. D. Piping Insulation Omitted: Insulation Omitted Plumbing Systems: Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture runouts from faces of wall or floor to fixture; on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. E. Insulation Protection: Pipe insulation exposed in finished areas shall be protected with 0.030- inches thick ABS plastic jacketing covers, Ceel -Co 100 Series or approved equal. 2. Pipe insulation exposed in equipment rooms, indoor parking garages and other unfinished areas shall be protected with 0.030- inches thick, ultraviolet resistant, PVC plastic jacketing covers, Ceel -Co 300 Series or approved equal. 15251 -3 © 2010 by FBI PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with the MICA National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full - length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. The appearance of the completed insulation shall be a significant factor in determining the acceptability of the work. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor - bander jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. .Where vapor retarders are specified, elbows and fittings shall be wrapped with vapor retarder tape 341ches wide or shall have PVC jacketing. °6 Cover values, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and 60mposition of insulation applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory - molded, pre-cut or job - tabricated units (at installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. i< H. Wxtend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. I. Insulated piping systems shall be supported on the exterior of the insulation surface. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. J. Metal shields: Conform to table below for minimum length of shield: PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS_ LENGTH OF SHIELD Less than 1" Up to 1" 3" 1 "— 2" 1" 4 1/2" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 5 1/2" 21/2 " -4" 1" 61/2" K. Pipe Hanger, Trapeze, and Roller Support Insulation Inserts: Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. Apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 -inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. 15251 -4 2010 by FBI 3.02 a L PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. Protection: Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. 15251 -5 © 2010 by FEI �n . 3 P © 2010 by FEI SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing piping and equipment is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. B. Types of plumbing piping and equipment specified in this Section include the following: I. Potable Water Piping. 2. Soil and Waste Piping. 3. Plumbing Equipment: 1.2 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing piping and equipment -of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: I. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 15400 -1 0 2010 by FEI a. Water Meters b. Backflow Preventers 3 C. Pressure Regulating Valves d. Water Hammer Arresters a C. Wall Outlet Boxes , L Thermostatic Mixing Valves g. Drainage Piping Products It. Water Heaters 1.2 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing piping and equipment -of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: I. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 15400 -1 0 2010 by FEI 4. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which comply with UL and NEMA standards: C', a.: UL 174, "Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters." f k.;' UL 1453, "Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters." r rjo AGA and NSF Labels: Provide water heaters which have been listed and labeled by oI ATnerican Gas Association and National Sanitation Foundation. . `' '` ASME Code Symbol Stamps: For the following equipment, comply with ASME Boiler r -and Pressure Vessel Code for construction, and stamp with ASME Code symbol: a. Commercial water heaters. b. Safety relief valves. C. Expansion tanks. 7. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code ". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing piping and equipment specifications, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing piping and equipment. Include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed plumbing piping systems, 1.4 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Water Heater Warranty 1. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, 15400 -2 © 2010 by FEI heat exchangers, and burners. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MA'T'ERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide plumbing piping materials and equipment products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with applicable Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one (1) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.2 POTABLE WATER PIPING (Pipe material selected shall be in compliance with all applicable codes.) A. Interior Water Piping: 2.3 1. Tube Size 2 -inch (50mrn) and Smaller: wrought - copper fittings, solder- joints, Exterior Water Piping and Piping Under Floor Slab: ' u W Copper tube; Type L, hard- (drawn. tempet;s 1. Tube Size 3/4 -inch (19mm) and Smaller: Copper tube; Type K, soft- annealed temper; cast - copper flared tube fittings. 2. Tube Size 1 -inch (25mm) through 2 -1/2 -inch (65mm): soft- annealed temper; wrought - copper fittings, solder-joints. SOIL AND WASTE PIPING (Pipe material selected shall be in compliance with all codes.) A. Aboveground Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Copper tube; Type K, 1. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, hub -and- spigot cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene compression gaskets conforming to ASTM C 564. 2. Hubless Cast -Ron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, with stainless steel shields and neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. 15400 -3 0 2010 by FEI 3. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV for pipe, and cast - bronze, drainage pattern fittings, with solderedjoints. a. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B 32, 50 -50 tin -lead solder. 4. ABS Type DWV Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2661 pipe and fittings, with solvent cemented joints; DWV plastic fitting patterns shall conform to ASTM D 3311. a. Solvent: ASTM D 2255. B. Underground Building Drain and Storm Piping: 1. Cast -iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service weight, hub- and - spigot cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces. a. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564 2. Hubless Cast -iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301, shielded couplings; ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Heavy duty shielded stainless steel couplings: With stainless steel shield, stainless steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 1540 rubber sleeve. 3. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Conform to ASTM D 2665 for pipe and fittings. a. Solvent: ASTM D 2564 b. 2.4 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Water Meter: Furnish and install meter as required by Local Utility Company. Provide roughing -in and bypass for meter in accordance with Utility Company requirements. Meter cost shall be included in Contractor's bid. M 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water meters of one (1) U „ of the following: a. Badger Meter, Inc. 6. Hersey Products Inc. C Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. LL i d. Rockwell Intl.; Municipal & Utility Div. S•— o e. Zurn Industries Inc.; Hays Fluid Controls Div. B. Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks, and pressure - differential relief valve located between two (2) positive seating check valves, and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013. 15400 -4 @ 2010 by FEI Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide backflow preventer of one (1) of the following: a. Conbraco. b. Febco Sales, Inc.; Subs of Charles M. Bailey Co., Inc. C. Hersey Products, Inc. d. ITT Lawler, Fluid Handling Div. C. Watts Regulator Co. I. Zurn/Wilkins. C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Single - seated, direct - operated type; having bronze body with integral strainer, and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure regulating valves of one (1) of the following: a. Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfr. Corp. b. Cla -Val Co. C. Spence Engineering Co., hie. d. Watts Regulator Co. D. Water Hammer Arrestors: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 PSI, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH -201. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water hammer ancestors of one (1) of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Josam Co. N C. Mifab, Inc. d. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. r t = J C. Wade Division of Tyler Corp. .> I. Zurn htdustries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. g. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. h. Watts Drainage Products. �n E. Wall Outlet Boxes: 1. General: Provide factory - fabricated recessed wall outlet boxes with hot and cold water supply fittings and drainage connection products of size and type indicated. Gate, globe or ball valve supply shutoff fitting. Box and faceplate constructed of stainless steel, epoxy - painted steel or plastic as indicted on the drawings. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 2. Clothes Washer Valve Box: Combination valved fitting or separate hot and cold water valved fittings complying with ASME Al 12.18. Include garden -hose thread connection with copper tube supplies. Include 2 -inch standpipe and P-trap for direct connection to drainage piping. 15400 -5 © 2010 by FEI 3. Icemaker Valve Box: Cold water valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18. Include 1/2 -inch copper tube outlet connection with copper tube supply. 4. Coffee Maker Valve Box: Cold water valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18. Include 1/2 -inch copper tube outlet connection with copper tube supply. Include 1-1/2 - inch standpipe and P -trap for direct connection to drainage piping. 5. Condensate Drain Box: Include 1 -1/2 -inch standpipe and P -trap for direct connection to drainage piping. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water hammer arrestors of one (1) of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. IPS Corporation. d. LSP Products Group, Inc. C. Symmons Industries, Inc. f Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zorn Plumbing Products Group. F. Drainage Piping Products: General: Provide factory- fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and governing regulations. 2. Cleanout Plugs: Cast - bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. 3. Floor Cleanouts: Cast -iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: 4. Nickel- Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of the pattern and proper recess to fit floor finish. 5. Wall Cleanouts: Cast -iron body adaptable to pipe with cast - bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. 6. Flashing Flanges: Cast -iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. t Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. L_ . • r, k in Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast -iron caulking type roof coupling for cast -iron stacks, cast - iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast - bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing. G. Electric Water Heaters: 15400 -6 Q 2010 by FEI 1. General: Provide electric water heaters of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics as indicated on drawings. Comply with ASHI2AElIF,S 90A for energy efficiency. Provide UL listing. 2. Heater: Working pressure of 150 PSI; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water. 3. Heating Elements: Low watt density with zinc - plated copper sheath; double element, non- simultaneous operation. 4. Safety Controls: Equip with high- temperature cutoff for each element, factory - wired. 5. Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with vermin -proof glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish. 6. Warranty: Furnish five (5) year limited warranty for tank leakage. 7. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4 -inch relief valve; cold water dip tube. 8. Controls: Provide thermostat for each element, factory- wired. 9. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide residential electric water heaters as one (1) of the following: r� r> a. Bradford - White Corp. b. A.O. Smith, Consumer Products Div, n C. Rheem Water Heater Div., City Investing Co. d. Ruud Water Heater Div., City Investing Co. co e. State Industries I. Viking Superior Corp. - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF POTABLE AND WASTE STORM PIPING A. General: Install plumbing piping in accordance with all applicable specifications, and in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Potable, waste and vent piping shall not be installed within any fire resistive rated assembly wall of two (2) hours or greater. 15400 -7 © 2010 by FEI C. Pressfit systems shall be installed with fitting ends pressed onto the pipe using press tool, jaws and ring sets equipped with the proper size press jaws in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. D. If plastic pipe is used, provide fire stopping at all floor penetrations with firestop collars and firestop sealant, STI SpecSeal or approved equal. E. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in Kitchens or Laundry Rooms and in any piping system containing or receiving drainage of liquids at temperatures over 140 °F. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in supply or return air plenums. F. Cleanouts for soil and waste storm piping: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required by all applicable Plumbing Codes; and at each change in direction of piping greater than 90 °; at minimum intervals of 50 -feet for piping 4 -inch and smaller and 100 -feet for piping larger than 4 -inch; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. 2. Provide access to all cleanouts. Install floor and wall cleanout covers or access panels /doors for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish and as required for wall fire rating. G. Slope for Soil, Waste, and Storm Piping: Install piping pitched to drain at uniform slope not less than that indicated by governing plumbing code, or at a minimum, the following: 1. Pipe Size 3 -inch and Smaller: 1/4 -inch per foot (2 % slope). 2. Pipe Size 4 -inch to 6 -inch: 1/8 -inch per foot (1% slope). H. Solder Joints in Potable Water Systems: All solder for joints in potable water systems shall contain less than 0.2% lead and shall be 95% tin, 5% antimony as manufactured by M.C. Canfield and Sons of Union, New Jersey or approved equal. I. Hanger and Supports: Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: PIPE MATERIAL HORIZONTA VERTICAL L IN IN FEET FEET Cast -Iron Soil Pipe 5 15 Copper Tubing — 1 -1/4- Inches and 6 10 Smaller Capper Tubing - 1 -1/2- Inches and Larger 10 10 PVC Plastic Pipe 4 4 Steel Pipe 12 15 15400 -8 0 2010 by FEI J. Waste, Vent, and Water Connections: t> v 1. The minimum size of waste, vent, and water connections to the individual fixtures shall be as follows: Fixtures Waste Ven ', H t W Water Closets (Flush Valve) 4" 1 2 Urinals 2" 1- 3/ 1 4 4 Lavatories 1 -1/4" 1- 1/ 1 1 2 4 Sinks 1 -1/2" 1- 1/ 1 I 2 2 Janitors Sinks 3" I 2 2 Water Hydrants 3/ 4 2. The minimum size of underfloor waste connection from any individual fixture shall be 2- inch pipe size, regardless of waste connection size to the fixture. K. Floor Drains: Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below with coordination with general construction and architectural drawings to provide proper slope to drain: DEPRESSION IN INCHES RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED — FEET 1/2 5 3/4 10 15400 -9 0 2010 by FEI 1 15 1 -1/4 20 1 -1/2 25 1. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer. 2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 3. Coordinate drain location with equipment served. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Water Meter: Install water meter in accordance with Local Utility Company's installation instructions, and comply with requirements. B. Backflow, Preventers: Install backflow preventers at water service entrance and at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventer serving equipment in same room as equipment being connected. Pipe relief outlet without valves, to nearest floor drain. C. Pressure Regulating Valve: Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves, and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet. D. Water Hammer Arrestors: Install water hanuner arrestors with isolation valve for all quick - closing type valves. Locate water hammer arrestors per manufacturer's reconnnendations. E. Install wall outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2 -by -4 -inch fire- retardant - treated -wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. F. Electric Water Heaters: General: Install electric water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 2. Support: Set units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level and plumb unit. 3. Electric Supply: Furnish wiring diagram to electrical installer. r � 4.'.'.; 'Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and dielectric unions. Connect recirculating water line to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and ".lri$tall thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. (ate Start -Up: Start -up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with r, manufacturer's start -up instructions. Check and calibrate controls. 15400 -10 © 2010 by AEI 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation piping systems until they have been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Test water distribution piping as, follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing. 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 PSIG above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four (4) hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 0 i 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. -' i C. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to pracedures or authority having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: d 1. Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems and parts df:existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open - jointed drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing -in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of I -inch water column. Use a U -tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain 15400 -11 © 2010 by FEI constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects, using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: Purge new potable water distribution piping systems prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C 651 or AW WA C 652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) and allow to stand for 24 hours. C. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water /chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three (3) hours. d. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time. C. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination. c> fjN -I, �aY Qw a Ce 0 15400 -12 © 2010 by FEI c-� SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1- GENERAL L1 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing fixtures is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. B. Types of plumbing fixtures, specified in this Section include the following: Plumbing Fixtures. 1.2 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fixtures, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 4. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which comply with UL and NEMA standards: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing fixture specifications, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. 15410 -1 © 2010 by FEI B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. Include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.4 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide factory- fabricated fixture products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with applicable Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one (1) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installers option. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Provide factory - fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturers standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as reconunended by manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. Where more than one (1) type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single ° manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing 4. regulations. B. c Materials: Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW -P -541/- Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. f. (,Comply with requirements of WW -P -541/- specification relative to quality of ware, glazing, ;ettamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some �16bing fixtures specified in this Section are not described in WW -P- 541/ -. C. Supplies and Stops: All fixtures shall be provided with supplies with stops. Stops shall be chrome- plated solid brass with brass sterns and chloramine- chlorine resistant washers.' Stops shall be keyed when installed in public restrooms. 2. Supplies shall be chloramine- chlorine resistant braided stainless steel flexible connectors, 15410 -2 © 2010 by FEI D. Traps: Traps shall be provided for all fixtures without integral traps. P -traps shall be adjustable chrome plated heavy cast brass with 17 gauge tubular wall end, brass slip nuts, and brass flanges. 2. Sink end waste kits shall have cast brass tee and 17 gauge tubular waste arm and brass slip nuts. E. Vacuum Breakers: All plumbing fixtures with hose attachment capability including hand held shower units with flexible hose shall be equipped with vacuum breaker. F. Fixture Carriers and Supports: Provide carriers and supports for all fixtures requiring same. Provide factory- fabricated carrier extension kits per manufacturer's recommendations required to accommodate depth of wall or plumbing chase. G. Fixture Schedules: Comply with fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule as indicated on drawings. Plumbing fixtures shall be of one (1) of the manufacturers indicated and in accordance with the information and manufacturer's catalog numbers indicated. Where manufacturer's catalog numbers have been updated or deleted, fixtures shall be of similar configuration and of similar or better quality than that indicated. H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing fixtures and trim of one (1) of the following: 1. Lavatories, Water Closets, Urinals: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Crane Co. C. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. d. Kohler. e. Tote. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Elkay Mfg. Co. C. Moen; Div. of Stanadyne. c.> d. Just Manufacturing Co. 3. Mop Service Basins: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Bradley Corp. C. Crane Co. d. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. e. Fiat Products. f. Mustee. 15410 -3 © 2010 by FF1 g. Stern - Williams 4. Faucets: 15410 -4 0 2010 by FEI a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Chicago Faucet Co. C. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. d. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. e. Elkay Mfg. Co. f. Kohler. g. Moen. h. Speakman. i. Symmons. j. T & S Brass k. Tote. 1. Zurn. 5. Flush Valves: a. Sloan Valve Co. b. Toto C. Zurn. 6. Water Closet Seats: a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Corp. C. Forbes - Wright Industries, Inc.; Church Products. d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats. 7. Drinking Fountains: r� a. Oasis - Reg. Trademark of Ebco Mfg. Co. b. Elkay Mfg. Co. C Filtrine Manufacturing Co. d. Halsey Taylor Div.; Household International Co. e. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. 8c Fixture Supports: v a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Mifab, Inc. C. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Zum Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 15410 -4 0 2010 by FEI 9. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, and Drainage Piping Products: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Mifab, Inc. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. C. Watts Drainage Products. f. Zurn Industries, Hydromechanics Div, 10. Wall Hydrants: '. ca a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. C. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Woodford Mfg. Co. f. Zurn Industries. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing fixtures, are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturers written instructions, roughing -in drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of the National Uniform Code pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures. B. C. D. E. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building construction; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. Provide protective inserts for bathtubs and shower bases designed to prevent scratching of finished surface. Supplies and Stops: All fixtures shall be provided with supplies with stops Traps: Provide traps for all fixtures without integral traps. 15410 -5 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 15838 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling - mounted ventilators. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA - Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal. 15838- 1 0 2010 by FEI PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING - MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Carnes Company. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation, 3. Loren Cook Company. B. Housing: minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel and acoustically insulated. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. Wheel shall be forward curved and constructed of galvanized steel. D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug -in. E. Accessories: 1. Isolation: Rubber -in -shear vibration isolators. 2. Integral backdraft damper. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound -power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal. B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA - Certified Ratings Seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers. c' r B. . Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. c. (j r 15838 -2 °fir e © 2010 by FEI 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." D. Connect wring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables. r.. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal - overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving pails. 7. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. 15838 - 3 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 15890 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of air distribution work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air distribution work specified in this section include the following: 1. Metal Ductwork: 2. Air outlets and inlets: a. Diffusers, registers and grilles. b. Louvers 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with air distribution systems similar to that required for Project. C. Codes and Standards: SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" 1995 2d Edition for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 96 "Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protections of Commercial Cooking Operations ", NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems ". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on all air distribution work, including performance data for air flow pressure drops through filters, noise criteria, air inlet, outlet and terminal room schedules, material construction and installation instructions. 15890 -1 © 2010 by FEI z, A. Extent of air distribution work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air distribution work specified in this section include the following: 1. Metal Ductwork: 2. Air outlets and inlets: a. Diffusers, registers and grilles. b. Louvers 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with air distribution systems similar to that required for Project. C. Codes and Standards: SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" 1995 2d Edition for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 96 "Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protections of Commercial Cooking Operations ", NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems ". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on all air distribution work, including performance data for air flow pressure drops through filters, noise criteria, air inlet, outlet and terminal room schedules, material construction and installation instructions. 15890 -1 © 2010 by FEI B. Shop drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings, including dimensions, materials, finish, mounting details and methods of assembly for all air distribution equipment. Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials and rigidity are not reduced. NOTE: Coordinate sound output of each air device and modify sizes or arrangements as required to meet sound criteria Iisted on drawings. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists, cleaning and trouble shooting instructions. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual. D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories and air outlets and inlets. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air distribution equipment of one (1) of the following: r (,J B ci N Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: a. Cames b. Krueger C. E.H. Price d. Titus e. Tuttle & Bailey Louvers -GIs c. ci d f. 9. h. i. j� Aerolite Airline Products Co. Airstream Products Division of Penn Ventilator Co. American Warming Greenheck Louvers & Dampers Inc. NCA Reliable Ruskin Safe- Air(Dowes 2.02 METALDUCTWORK A. Materials: 15890 -2 0 2010 by FET 1. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. 2. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A 700. 3. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock - forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view. B. Miscellaneous Materials: ; c5 - 1. Joint and Seam Sealant: Indoor /Outdoor Water Based Duct Sealant shall be all purpose } duct sealant for use on all types of metal duct, glass fiber duct board, and flex duct, as well as duct fabric and flexible tubing runouts. The sealant incorporates_ a. built -in fiber reinforcement for exceptional strength, with UV inhibitors for outdoor-use. UL 181A -M Listed/ UL 181B -M Listed. Provide Versa -Grip 181 Hardcast or approved equal' 2. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot - dipped galvanized -steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, wire rope, trim and angles for support of ductwork. Hang all ductwork from the structure only. Do not hang from metal deck. C. Fabrication: General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1 -3 through 1 -16 and 1 -21 through 1 -25, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications and joint types and intervals. 2. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 3. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the following pressure classifications: a. Exhaust Ducts: 1 -inch water gage, negative pressure. 4. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations. 5. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive and fasten with mechanical fasteners. 6. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19- inches and larger and are 20 -gage or less, with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figure 1 -4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated. 15890 -3 0 2010 by FEI 7. Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1995 Edition, Figures 2 -1 through 2 -8. D. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. 1. Snap -lock seams are not acceptable. 2. If SMACNA seal Class A or B is specified, the longitudinal seam shall be seated from the inside. 2.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards ". B. Connectors shall comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems" and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems ". Indoor installations shall be of a UL 214 Listed, fire- retardant vinyl coated woven nylon or Neoprene coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density of vinyl is 22 ounces /sq. yd. and rated to 180T. Minimum density of Neoprene 30 ounces /sq. yd and rated to 200 °F. 2.04 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air diffusers, registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. 2. Performance: Provide air diffusers, registers, and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturers current data. 3. Ceiling and Wall Compatibility: Provide diffusers, registers, and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling and wall systems which will contain each type of air diffuser, register and grille. 4: Finish: Diffusers, registers and grilles shall have an off -white factory applied finish, unless shown otherwise. -' 5. Dampers and Accessories: See schedule on drawings for required dampers and accessories. 15890 -4 © 2010 by FEI 6 Types: Unless designated herein, provide diffusers, registers, and grilles of type, capacity and with accessories and finishes as listed on schedules and details, shown on drawings. 2.05 LOUVERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation. B. Performance: Provide louvers that have 50% minimum free area, and .10 -inch maximum pressure drop for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver. D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 T5. Louver shall bear the AMCA Seal. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. Louver finish shall be acrodized with color to match building window frames. Provide five (5) year warranty on finish. E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2 -inch square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. R Blade: Blade shall be 6- inches in depth and of drainable type construction for sizes larger than 24- inches x 24- inches. Louver sizes below 24- inches x 24- inches shall have a 4 -inch blade depth of drainable construction. G. Manufacturer: Provide a Ruskin ELF6375DX (6 -inch) or ELF375DX (4 -inch) louver or approved equal. r > PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which air distribution systems will be, installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. _ 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3- inches and under; 1% for systems rated over 3- inches) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8 -inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true - to -shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. Comply with all SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 15890 -5 © 2010 by FEI The Contractor shall form and erect all ductwork to avoid joists, beams, pipes, light fixtures, etc., and shall maintain fixed ceiling heights and clearances. Provide all drops, raises or offsets in ductwork as required by conditions at building. C. All openings for ductwork in new and existing construction shall be provided by the General Contractor; however, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to properly layout and locate all openings required for the installation of these items. All patching and refinishing shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. D. Sealing of Rectangular Ductwork: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements as defined on Page 1 -8, of the 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on four (4) sides by at least 1 -1/2 -inch. Fasten duct and substrate. Where ducts pass through fire -rated floors, walls or partitions, provide firestopping between duct and substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORKACCESSORIES A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA Standards and in accordance '_ ckAs th recognized industry Practices to ensure that products serve intended function. 3E 04 ; SCAM ANb JOINT SEALING A. !p9neral: i Seal duct seams and joints as follows: .B. Piossute'Classifications Greater Than 3 -Inch Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal soins, and "duct penetrations. C. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 -Inch Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. D. Pressure Classification Less than 2 -Inch Water Gage: Transverse joints only. E. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with manufacturer's recormnendations. B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2- 5 and 2 -6. C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2 -14 through 2 -16. 15890 -6 © 2010 by FBI 3.06 INSTALLATION OF AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. B. Locate diffusers, registers and grilles in center of acoustical ceiling modules. C. Repair all marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch -up paint. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal or where ductwork is to be painted. C. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF LOUVERS A. General: Install louvers in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that product serves intended functions. 15890 -7 02010 by FEI (: I SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Bidding Requirements, Conditions of Contract, General Specifications and General Requirements, and this Division shall be binding on the Contractor and shall apply to all electrical work to be completed under this section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the work from the date of his Contract until its acceptance by the Owner and must make good all damages sustained from whatever cause. He shall use proper care and diligence in bracing and securing all parts of the work and shall in all cases judge as to the amount of protection required. 1.02 ORDINANCES, LAWS AND CODES A. All work shall conform to the rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code, Local Code, "Occupational Safety and Health Act" and the State Fire Marshall's Office. All certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Architect before final payment will be made. B. Should any change in the drawings and /or specifications be required to conform to the above mentioned laws and ordinances, the Architect shall be notified by the Bidder prior to the Bid Date, that the necessary changes may be completed. After the Bid Date, all work necessary to meet the requirements shall be at Contractor's expense, with no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall pay all fees, permits or taxes for inspections, etc., in connection with the work under this Contract. 1.03 DATA AND MEASUREMENT A. The data given herein and on the drawings is as exact as could be secured insofar as building construction and existing conditions are concerned. Extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and specifications are intended for the assistance of the Contractor in achieving the end result. Exact locations, measurements, distance, levels, etc., will be governed by conditions at the Job Site. B. The Contractor shall verify that the size of the equipment supplied by the selected manufacturers does not exceed the available mounting space. C. The Architect reserves the right to change location or size of conduits, outlets, fixtures or other pieces of equipment as may be necessary to avoid conflicts. No extra compensation will be allowed for such changes unless additional cost to the Contractor is caused. 16010 -1 0 2010 by FEI D. The Bidder shall visit the Project Site that he may have knowledge of conditions at the Job Site and adapt his work to such conditions. 1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Anything mentioned in this specification and not shown on the drawings or vice versa shall be of like effect, as shown or mentioned in both. in any case of discrepancy or differences in the figures, drawings or specifications, the Bidder shall promptly report such discrepancies to the Architect who shall make a decision in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without this decision shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP A. The Contractor shall give his personal superintendence and direction to the work. He shall also keep a competent foreman or superintendent on the Project. B. All equipment, controls and junction boxes shall be located for ready access, operation, repair or maintenance. C. Any additional drawings necessary for the prosecution of the work will be furnished by the Architect as promptly as possible. The Contractor shall request any additional instructions needed and shall do no work without drawings and instructions. D Afiv discrepancies between the Mechanical, Electrical and Architectural Drawings shall be reported to, the Architect prior to the Bid Date. 1.06 _ G&l RANTEE At ' This'Contrac(or shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of all aPliaatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acc€ptance of the whole work, and shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part of the apparatus which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not to carelessness or improper operation. Guarantee period for the replacement shall begin with the date of replacement. B. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any failure of any part or parts which occur during the guarantee period. C. The Contractor shall also guarantee the systems and the apparatus to be working properly to meet all conditions as specified. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph "Shop Drawings" of the General Conditions. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings of all fabricated work and equipment to be purchased. Data shall be sufficiently completed to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and material. Each item shall be prepared as a separate submittal, not grouped or bound with other items. 16010 -2 © 2010 by FEI B. All drawin¢s shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and must be dated C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Lighting Fixtures. } 2. Contactors and Time Clocks. 3. Lamps. 4. Panelboards. 5. Circuit and Motor Disconnects. 6. Fuses. 7. Wiring Devices — Switches, Receptacles, Device Wallplates. , 8. Enclosures D. A notation shall be made on each item submitted as to its specified use or description of specific location in the work. E. None of the preceding items shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the item has been properly submitted in writing and reviewed by the Architect. F. Submittals shall be made even though the item is exactly as specified. G. Should the Contractor fail to comply with any of the requirements as stated, the Architect reserves the right to select a full line of materials, appliances and equipment, which shall be final and binding upon the Contractor. 1.08 SUBMITTALDATA A. Review of submittal data is only for general conformance with the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: Dimensions, which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. B. Contractor will be limited to one (1) review on a singular piece of equipment. C. The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic compliance with Contract Documents. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to insure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for equipment/systems, which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 1.09 EQUAL MANUFACTURERS /EQUIPMENT A. Any requests for manufacturer /equipment to be considered as equal other than as specified herein shall be submitted to the Engineer not less than 10 days prior to Bid Date. B. Requests for review shall be sufficiently complete to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and material. 16010 -3 © 2010 by FEI 1.10 AUTOCAD DRAWING FILE REQUESTS A. As an instrument of service to aid in Shop Drawing Submittals, Farris Engineering (FE) will provide AutoCAD drawing files upon request. The files will be sent upon return receipt of the "Request for Drawings" agreement signed by an Officer of the requesting firm. FE does not assure that the drawings represent all changes, addenda items, change orders or modifications that may have occurred. The drawings are simply a tool for use in producing shop drawing submittals. B. The drawing files will be 'cleaned -up" by having the FE logo, Professional Engineer seal and all extraneous notes and details removed. FE must be compensated for this additional service by the requesting firm. A minimum fee of $200.00 for up to eight (8) sheets and $25.00 per sheet for each additional requested drawing will be invoiced to the requesting firm once the signed agreement is received. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTION OF FIXTURES AND WARES A. Thin Contractor shall apply the necessary protective coverage to fixtures and other equipment to prevent scratches and mars to such equipment as a result of falling objects or work of other r trades. '-_f 2.02 ,. ST6AAGE o_ A. This Corltra,c or shall provide and be responsible for safe storage of his materials and such storage shall not interfere with the work of others or progress of the Project in any manner. 2.03 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. Provide enclosures, which mate properly with the equipment to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. B. Equipment in corrosive atmosphere shall be rated NEMA 4X. All NEMA 4X equipment shall be fabricated from suitable non - metallic material or shall be stainless steel. Painted steel is not acceptable for NEMA 4X applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Before installing any work, this Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with all other Contractors on the Project, with the Electric Utility Company and the City Code enforcing department. B. All electrical work shall be installed in proper sequence and so arranged with other trades that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of all piping systems and mechanical equipment. 16010 -4 0 2010 by FEI C. This Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of equipment and conduit as indicated without major alteration. If alterations are required, a detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. D. Whenever interferences might occur, before installing any of the work in question, the Electrical Contractor shall consult with other Contractors and shall come to an agreement with them as to the exact location and level of his conduit bus duct, light fixtures and /or parts of his installation. E. All changes in the work of this Contractor, caused by his neglect to follow these instructions, shall be made at this Contractor's expense. 3.02 DITCHING, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavation required to install conduits and equipment shown on drawings or required for proper operation. Excess excavation below the required level shall be backfilled with earth and thoroughly tamped. 3.03 CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate the hook up of the following equipment with the Contractor required to furnish and install them. See the appropriate sections in the General Construction Work specifications for further information. Mechanical Equipment Cabinetry Equipment Owner Furnished Equipment B. Verify fuse and /or circuit breaker requirements for electrical connections to equipment and provide overcurrent devices accordingly. C. The plans indicate the locations of system devices. The Contract shall include the wiring system required to interconnect the indicated devices to result in a complete, operating system. The interconnecting wiring shall be in conformity with the requirements of the manufacturer of the equipment as well as with other requirements set out herein. The basic wiring method to be employed is indicated herein. The Contractor's Shop Drawing submittal shall indicate the specific routing and type of wireway and the number and type of conductors to be installed. 3.04 TEMPORARY WIRING A. This Contractor is to provide a temporary electrical service having a main disconnect and distribution panel. The size of the service shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. From the panel provide wiring for luminaires and receptacles. All receptacles shall be equipped with ground fault circuit protection in accordance with NEC requirements. Provide welding circuits as required. B. The Contractor shall verify with the serving utility existing conditions available for temporary power. The Electrical Contractor shall pay all installation charges by Utility Company to connect and disconnect the temporary service. 16010 -5 © 2010 by FEI 2. All charges for electrical energy will be paid by the General Contractor. C. All materials for the temporary service and wiring may be used and remains the property of the Electrical Contractor. D. Temporary wiring materials are not to be installed as part of the permanent wiring system. E. Wiring need not be installed in conduit, but must be adequately installed and protected from mechanical injury to prevent shock. F. Permanent wiring including feeders, panels, receptacles, etc., may be used as soon as installed. G. The Electrical Contractor shall bear all installation costs necessary to connect and disconnect the temporary service. 3.05 _ _ CLEANING Ai .' This Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free of all waste or surplus materials, rubbish and debtis'which is caused by his employees or resulting from his work. 13.: After' all; equipment and fixtures have been installed and building is ready for occupancy, the Electrical Contractor shall remove all stickers, rust stains, labels, temporary covers, plaster ma(k$, paint spots, etc. All foreign matter shall be blown out or flushed out of all conduits, panels, motors, devices, switches, fixtures, etc. C. Identification plates and trims on all equipment shall be free of paint and polished. D. The Contractor shall leave the electrical portion of the work in a safe clean and very neat condition ready for operation. 3.06 REBATES A. The Contractor shall assist the Owner with filing of applicable forms to obtain rebates. This shall include but not be limited to determination of qualifying materials and furnishing invoices for materials with corresponding quantities. 3.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain an up -to -date set of plans and specifications on the Job Site. He shall mark all Addendum Items and any field changes on this set and see that a copy of all changes is furnished to the Architect at the end of the Project. B. The drawings shall also include as -built conditions such as equipment locations, routing of service entrance and major feeders, etc. 3.08 INSTR UCTION IN OPERATION BOOKS AND SPARE PARTS A. After all tests and adjustments have been made, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary qualified personnel to place the special systems in continuous operation, during which time he 16010 -6 0 2010 by FEI shall provide complete Operating and Maintenance Instructions to the Owner's representative with an outline of instructions in written form. These personnel shall reserve adequate time to instruct an Owner's representative on proper operation (including all phases of the system and each of its component parts). B. Contractor shall furnish Owner with two (2) sets of all operating instructions, maintenance instruction and spare parts lists of all equipment furnished under this Contract. Lists shall include current unit prices and source of supply for each item of operable equipment. 3.09 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. B. During the progress and after completion of the work included under this specification, the Contractor shall make all required tests at his own expense in the presence of the Architect as required hereinafter and by local ordinances, codes, laws and regulations. Such tests shall be in accordance with other sections of this division. The Architect shall be notified five (5) days in advance as to the time when such tests are to be performed that a representative of the Architect may be present. 16010 -7 0 2010 by FEI c,> 16010 -7 0 2010 by FEI r. c: o SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. All wiring shall be installed in continuous raceways as specified herein except where specifically noted otherwise. B. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 4. Rigid metal conduit. 5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. C. MC Cable is not approved for this project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel, zinc- coated, threaded type conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls. 1. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Rigid metal conduits shall have threaded couplings when installed in concrete or direct burial in the ground. Other'installations in dry locations may be threadless rigid fittings. 2. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel zinc - coated with additional external coating of PVC conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit conforming to UL 1. Formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc- coated strip steel. I. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp type. 16110 -1 © 2010 by FEI a. Straight Terminal Connectors: One -piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit and male threaded end provided with locknut. b. 45° or 90° Terminal Angle Connectors: Two -piece body construction with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit and male threaded end provided with lockimt. D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit conforming to UL 360; construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double- wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coat with liquid -tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket seating rings, with insulated throat. E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electrical metallic tubing conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 1. EMT Fittings: Fittings for EMT shall be steel and may be of the screw or compression type except that in poured concrete the screw type is not acceptable. All EMT connectors shall be of the insulated throat type. Die -cast or indenter fittings are not acceptable. EMT connectors shall be fastened to box or enclosure with locknuts. Snap - in fittings are not acceptable. Sieel EMT connectors with male threads on the locknut and female threads on the � connector equal to Cooper Crouse -Hinds Space -Saver connectors may be used in lieu of 1 G�_ ", inssulated throat type connectors. r� F Gondiitt 'Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as fequired 'to] fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with ade thred- conduit- entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel and epposion- resistant screws. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit and fittings of types, sizes and weights as specified. B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 C, UL Rated, construct of polyvinyl chloride and conforming to NEMA TC -2, for direct burial, or normal above ground use, UL Listed. C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit and tubing duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturers published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. PART 3- EXECUTION 16110 -2 0 2010 by FEI 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS A. General: Install raceways as indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's, written installation," instructions, and in compliance with NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation ". IVistall units plumb and level and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances B. Coordinate with other work including wires /cables, boxes and panel work, as ;necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF COND UITS A. General: All conduits shall be concealed unless noted otherwise. Install concealed conduits either in walls, slabs or above hung ceilings. In existing work where conduits can not be concealed in finished areas, surface metal raceways shall be used. I. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. 2. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling. 3. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application. Install expansion fittings in raceways every 200 -feet linear run or wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. 4. Use roughing -in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location with other trades. Conduit Installation: Provide rigid conduit where embedded in concrete on or below grade, in direct contact with earth or fill below slab, wet locations, or installed outdoors. Follow minimum requirements in other areas as follows: Use rigid steel zinc- coated conduit in spaces where exposed below 4- feet -0 -inch height in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Equipment Rooms, Penthouses and in service splines. Other areas include warehouse spaces where exposed below 18- feet -0- inch height, on floors of crawl spaces and locations subject to mechanical injury. 2. Where acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction, intermediate metal conduit may be used in lieu of rigid steel conduit in non - hazardous locations when in compliance with NEC. 3. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings where installed in corrosive atmosphere. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. 16110 -3 © 2010 by FEI 4. Use steel zinc - coated EMT for raceway systems except as specifically specified previously, where not allowed by NEC or noted on drawings. Additionally EMT shall not be acceptable below grade, in or under slabs on grade, or in wet locations. 5. Use flexible conduit in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures in accessible ceilings, and final 24- inches of connection to motors, or control items subject to movement or vibration, and in cells of precast concrete panels. The maximum length for flexible conduit shall not exceed 6 -feet. 6. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit where subjected to one (1) or more of the following conditions: a. Exterior location. b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. C. Pump motors. d. Corrosive atmosphere. C. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease. 7. Rigid Non - Metallic Conduits: a, . • Rigid non - metallic conduits may be used below grade or embedded in concrete on or below grade only. D b. Rigid non - metallic conduits shall not be used for exposed stub -ups above floor. Where acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, rigid non - metallic conduits ` may be stubbed -up 6- inches above floor where concealed within walls. In masonry walls, non - metallic conduits may be extended to a maximum of 48- _ ' inches above floor. C. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. d. Install rigid non- metallic conduits in compliance with NEC, local utility practices, and all other authorities having jurisdiction. C. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling thread inside the plugs and set flush with the finished grade. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6- inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver- operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor. D. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from grade. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished grade. E. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc - coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12- inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 16110-4 © 2010 by FEI F. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. G. Field -bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter. H. Size conduits to meet NEC requirements and as shown on drawings or specified herein, except no conduit Smaller than 3/4 -inch shall be embedded in or below concrete or in masonry walls. Fasten rigid conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures with locknuts inside and outside enclosure or with threadless rigid box connectors and terminate with bushing. J. Conduit terminations in wet locations shall be of the threaded hub type or other sealing type fittings UL Listed for use in wet locations. K. Conduit shall be properly supported as specified herein and as required by NEC. L. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use 3 -piece union or split coupling, M. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables /wires within raceways, N. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL Listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. 2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air - conditioned spaces. y 5 3. Where required by the NEC. O. Provide sleeves for conduits passing through foundation or other load bearing walls. P. Conduits installed underground which extend through the foundation walls shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of moisture through the foundation walls. All conduits extending through the exterior walls of a building in areas below grade shall be provided with a hydrostatic seal such as Link Seal or equal. Q. Concealed Conduits: Conduits in finished areas shall be installed concealed. 2. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure watertightness. 16110 -5 0 2010 by FBI R. 9 F ' 3. For floors -on- grade, install conduits under concrete slabs. 4. Install underground conduits minimum of 24- inches below finished grade. 5. Rigid steel conduit buried in direct contact with the earth shall be coated with an asphaltum base paint prior to installation and all scratches shall be repainted after installation before backfilling. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Conduits shall not be installed in concrete slabs without prior approval /direction from the Structural Engineer regarding maximum conduit sizes, minimum cover, locations, etc. Exposed Conduits: 1. In unfinished areas such as Janitor Closets, Storage, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, etc., conduit may be run exposed. Prior permission shall be first obtained from the Architect. All exposed conduit shall be installed in a neat manner following the building lines. Horizontal runs shall be close to the ceiling and shall be installed above mechanical piping as much as possible. Single hung conduits shall be supported with strap or rod -, hangers, wire is not an acceptable hanger. Multiple hung conduits shall be strapped to y the channel to hold it in place. 2. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building. c� r 3._ Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips. Support conduits on each i t, , ' side of bends and on spacing not to exceed following: Up to 1 -inch: 6- feet -0 -inch; 1- 1/4-inch and over: 8- feet- 0- incli. �U 4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement. 5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above hung ceilings, and in crawl spaces except that spacing of supports for conduits up to (- inch shall not exceed 8- feet -0 -inch. T. Conduit Fittings: I. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. 2. Plastic insulating bushings for terminating rigid conduits smaller than 1 -1/4 -inch are to have ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. 3. histall metallic insulated type bushings for terminating rigid conduits 1 -1/4 -inch and larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. 16110 -6 © 2010 by FEI 3.03 A. 4. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application. INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor, and connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. I. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with contusion inhibiting compound before assembling. 2. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. 3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer. No field bends of two -piece type raceway sections will be permitted. 4. Field bends of single piece raceway shall be permitted for small offsets only where the use of fittings supplied by the manufacturer is not possible. Field -bend raceway with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter of raceway. Raceway shall be installed so as to avoid field bends wherever possible. 5. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported. 6. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations. 16110 -7 © 2010 by FEI r., Ct , W , © 2010 by FEI SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wires and cables shall be single, insulated conductors, field - installed in continuous raceways unless specified otherwise. B. Types of electrical wire, cable and connectors specified in this section include the following: I . Copper conductors. 2. Tap type connectors. ; 3. Wirenut connectors. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS j A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (l)` op the following (for each type of wire, cable and connector): Wire and Cable: a. Apex Wire and Cable Corp. b. American Insulated Wire Corp. C. American Wire and Cable Co. d. Belden Div; Cooper Industries. C. Brand -Rex Div; Pyle National Co. f. Cerro Wire and Cable Corp. g. Cleveland Insulated Wire Co. It. General Cable Corporation. i. Helix Wire Corporation. j. Houston Wire k. Indiana Insulated Wire Inc. 1. Laribee Wire Manufacturing Co., Inc. m. Madison Wire and Cable Corp. n. Okonite Co. o. Pirelli Cable Corp. P. Radix Wire Co. q. Rome Cable Corp. r. Southwire Company. S. Triangle PWC, Inc. 16120 -1 0 2010 by FEI 2. Connectors: a. AMP, Inc. b. Appleton Electric Cc; Emerson Electric Co. C. Buchanan Co. d. Burndy Corporation. e. Brand -Rex Div. Pyle National Co. f. Electrical Products Div; Midland -Ross Corp. g.. General Electric Co. h. Gould, Inc. mr li, : Ideal hrdustries, Inc. F4 J. Leviton Mfg Company. =° k.> 3M Company O- 7JGedney Co. an, Southport Industries Inc. ii-. Square D Company. o. Thomas and Betts Corp. 2.02 WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS A. General: All reference to size in these specifications or on drawings is for copper conductors. Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 °C (68". B. Building Wires: Provide factory- fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity rating, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. C. Cables: Provide UL -type factory - fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and jacketing/sheathing as indicated for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. D. Connectors: Provide UL -type factory - fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.03 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 16120 -2 © 2010 by FBI C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. The normal minimum size shall be 12 AWG. All wire No. 10 and smaller to be solid, all No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All service entrance, feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be type THHN/THWN. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one (1) is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use of soap will not be permitted as pulling lubricant. Insulation on conductors shall be permanently marked with wire size, insulation type, voltage range and manufacturer's name. The insulation on conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120 /240 -volt circuit: Phase A - Black; Phase B - Red., Phase C — Blue. The phase conductors shall be tagged and shall remain the same throughout the circuit. Switch legs shall be color coded to distinguish them from Hot or Phase Conductors. Switch legs occurring in the same box or enclosure shall be color coded separately. Exceptions to the color coding as listed above shall be as follows: 1. Wiring for special systems shall be color coded or labeled as required ,_by the ! manufacturer, - Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire /cable. grips which will not damage cables or raceway. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Htstall splices and taps which possess equivalent -or- better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. All splices and taps shall be made in outlet, junction and pull boxes. Splices on circuit wiring shall be of the pigtail type using solderless connectors. Larger sizes of conductors requiring uninsulated connectors of the bolt type shall be taped with pressure sensitive vinyl tape. Q. For branch circuit wiring, conductor fill per conduit run shall not contain more than eight (8) current carrying wires, provided the wire size is derated as required by the National Electrical Code. Conduits containing both circuit switch legs and/or traveler wires may contain more than the number stated above, providing the conduit is of adequate size and the wire size is derated as required by the National Electrical Code. Whenever a 120 -volt, single phase branch circuit is over 70 -feet in length and the load is in excess of 50% of the branch circuit protective device, the 16120 -3 O 2010 by FEI conductors shall be increased one (1) size to the first outlet box unless specifically noted otherwise. For special systems conductor fill of conduit is per manufacturers specifications furnished with each system, noted on the drawings or shall be as required by code. R. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturers torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. 2.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short- circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 16120 -4 0 2010 by FEI CJ GTE 16120 -4 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Bushings. 5. Lockouts. 6. Knockout closures. �i PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size and depth to suit each location and application. 1. Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. B. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion - resistant cast -metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast -metal face plates with spring - hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant plugs and fasteners. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. D. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lockouts: Provide corrosion - resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 16135 -1 0 2010 by FEI 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. Surface- mounted device boxes in unfinished areas shall be a minimum of 4 -inch square knockout type. Surface- mounted boxes in finished and exterior areas, shall be cast metal, threaded hub similar to Crouse Hinds "FS" or "FD" condulet box. C. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wirelcable, wiring devices and raceway installation work. D. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. E. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. F. Install electrical boxes in those locations, which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. Junction boxes shall not be installed above non- accessible ceilings. G. Avoid installing boxes back -to -back in walls. Provide not less than 24 -inch separation. H. Avoid installing aluminum products in concrete. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with lockout or bushing on rounded surfaces. K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Box support shall be independent of conduit. L. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage. C:) 3.02 `� POSITION OF OUTLETS A. The 8lectrical Contractor shall consult with Mechanical and General Contractor prior to rough -in outlets and shall set boxes to avoid interference with equipment installation in walls or ceilings. pCID r r B. o- Outlets shall be centered with respect to paneling, trim, furring, etc. Outlets improperly located §hall b ec. orected at Contractor's expenses. Outlets shall be set plumb, secured firmly in place with face of box or plaster ring extending to finished surface or wall, ceiling or floor as the case �rtray be. 16135 -2 2010 by FEI C. Washers or bushings shall be installed between recessed box and device strap to make a flush rigid installation of the device installed. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Upon completion of installation work, ground electrical boxes as required by NEC and other Division 16 Sections. 16135 -3 © 2010 by FEI 7 ,.3 J 16135 -3 © 2010 by FEI SECTION 16143 WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems, which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 1. Receptacles. <> 2. Ground -fault circuit interrupters. 3. Switches. 4. Wallplates. 5. Plugs and connectors. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one (1) of the following (for each type and rating of wiring device): 1. Arrow Hart 2. Bryant Electric Co. 3. Cooper Wiring Devices 4. Daniel Woodhead Co. 5. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co. 6. General Electric Co. 7. Hubbell Inc. 8. L.eviton Mfg Co. 9. Pass and Seymour Inc. 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES A. General: Provide factory- fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors and electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. WD 1. Provide gray color devices except as otherwise indicated; color selection to be verified by Contractor with Architect. All devices shall be specification grade. B. Receptacles: 16143 -1 0 2010 by FEI 1. Ground -Fault Interrupters: Provide "feed -thru" type ground -fault circuit interrupters, with heavy -duty duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, and of being installed in a 2 -3/4 -inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type UL Rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20- amperes, 120 - volts, 60 Hz; with solid -state ground -fault sensing and signaling; with 5- milliamperes ground -fault trip level; equip with NEMA configuration 5 -20R. C. Plugs and Connectors: Plugs and Connectors: Provide plugs and connectors with required amperage ratings, voltage ratings and NEMA configurations, which are designed to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. All plugs and connectors shall be manufactured by Daniel Woodhead Company or approved equal by one (1) of the following manufacturers: a. Hubbell Inc. b. Pass and Seymour Inc. D. Switches: 1. General: Switches shall be provided as specified in this section. Additional features such, as key operator, rocker and lighted toggle shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. 2. Single -Pole: Provide heavy -duty flush single -pole AC quiet, self - grounding type switches, 20- amperes, 120 /277 - volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, toggle switch handle, and side -wired screw terminals. 3. Double Pole: Provide heavy -duty flush double -pole AC quiet, self - grounding type switches, 20- amperes, 120 /277 - volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, toggle switch handles and side -wired screw terminals. 2.03 WIRING DEVICE A CCESSORIES A. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates; wallplates colored to match wiring devices except as noted below. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: L; Finished Areas: C Material and Finish: uJ A }. a N 0.04 -inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel 16143 -2 0 2010 by FBI 2. Unfinished Areas: Material and Finish: Steel plate, galvanized. Surface- mounted boxes in unfinished areas shall be furnished with 4 -inch square raised covers, with openings to fit device or devices to be installed. B. Provide metallic weatherproof covers for receptacle installed outdoors, in wet locations or shown as weatherproof. Provide "in -use" type weatherproof covers where required per NEC. C. Finish plates provided for switches controlling exhaust fans shall be stainless steel and engraved as follows "EXH FAN" in 1/4 -inch high black filled letters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written ;instrktions7, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work; as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt and debris. D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed. E. The continuity of branch circuit conductors shall not depend on device connections such as lampholders, receptacles, etc. where the removal of the device would interrupt the continuity. Branch circuit conductors shall be spliced with jumpers to connect the device. F. Connections of wire to devices shall be screw tightened (except devices with built -in connector /leads). Connections using only spring pressure are not acceptable. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. All switches and receptacles with exposed terminals shall be wrapped with insulating tape equal to Scotch No. 33 such that no live parts are left exposed. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES 16143 -3 0 2010 by FEI A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items, which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs and those, which are not clean and flee from paint, dirt and debris. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.04 TESTING A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short- circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 16143 -4 © 2010 by FBI r, ILI M P =' N n .7 C� N 16143 -4 © 2010 by FBI SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals and associated fastenings. 1. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to specific items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U- Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. American Electric. C. B -Line Systems, Inc. d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Hayden Corp. g. Kin -Line, Inc. m- It. Uniatrut Diversified Products. 2. Conduit Sealing Bushings: a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. I. Madison Equipment Co. g. L.E. Mason Co. h. O- 7/Gedney. i. Producto Electric Corp. 16190 -1 © 2010 by FEI j. Raco, Inc. k. Red Seal Electric Corp. 1. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. in. Thomas & Betts Corp. 2.02 COATINGS A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot -dip galvanized. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps. B. Fa§t�ners: Types, materials and construction features as follows: ci -- 1 Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. Plastic expansion anchors (for conduit 1 -inch and smaller only). r 2r.. T9991e Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3' Pkder- Driven Threaded Studs: Heat - treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service. C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory - fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory - fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gipping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish. E. U- Channel Systems: 16 -gage steel channels, with 9/16 -inch diameter holes, at a minimum of 8- inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match the U- channel and are of the same manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Shop- or field - fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U- channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one (1) of the following: 16190 -2 0 2010 by FEI Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3- inches and smaller: 20 -gage. b. 4 -inch to 6- inches: 16 -gage. C. Over 6- inches: 14 -gage. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. j i 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. 5 ^' r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.07 INSTALLATION A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: I. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four (4). Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 Ibs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U- bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze -type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 -inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4 -inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. 6. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 -foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors. 16190 -3 0 2010 by FEI In vertical runs, arrange support so that load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers and other devices. F. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other firerated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated -wall or floor construction, apply UL Listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches and control components in accordance with the following: 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw -type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring- tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 -1/2 -inch in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 -inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25% of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock - resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. ^" Ai fi M -�. 6 t P r� cJ 16190 -4 2010 by FEI SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical identification is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: 1. Buried cable warnings. 2. Electrical power, control and communication conductors. 3. Operational instructions and warnings. 4. Danger signs. 5. Equipment/system identification signs. C. Refer to Division 1 General Requirements Section, Identification Systems, for equipment and system nameplates and performance data; not work of this section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than one (1) single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. B. Plasticized Tags: General: Manufacturers standard pre - printed or partially pre- printed accident - prevention and operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 -1/4 -inch x 5 -5/8 -inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre - printed wording including large -size primary working, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE. C. Self- Adhesive Plastic Signs: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard, self- adhesive or pressure - sensitive, pre - printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g., 208V, EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER. a. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide orange signs with black lettering. 16195 -1 © 2010 by FEI D. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: I. General: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 -gage steel; of standard red, black and white graphics; 14 -inch x 10 -inch size except where 10- inches x 7- inches is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation wording, e.g., HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH. E. Engraved Plastic - Laminate Signs: General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L -P -387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. a. Thickness: 1/16 -inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 -inch length; 1/8 -inch for larger units. b. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. F. Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker: General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright- colored, continuous- printed plastic tape, intended for direct - burial service; not less than 6 -inch wide x 4 MILS thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service or buried cable. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS Ci neral: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification - yvork, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, LI 4 lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by 1 manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical vstems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and ttuthbers., i c� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLiCATIONAND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. 2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. 16195 -2 © 2010 by FEI 3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work. B. Operational Identification and Warnings: General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self - adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended Purposes. C. Danger Signs: General: In addition to installation of danger signs required by Governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons in or about Project. a. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any circumstances, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 250- volts. b. Critical Switches /Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property where instructed by Architect. D. Equipment/System Identification: r 1. General: Install engraved plastic- laminate sign on each major :unit of relectrigjd equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical, system °r including communication/control /signal systems, unless unit is specified with' -its own self - explanatory identification or signal system. Signs for disconnect. switches, motor ' starters, contactors and similar equipment shall indicate the load served. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2 -inch high lettering on 1 -1/2` -inch high sign (2 -inch high where two (2) lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. C. Disconnect switches. d. Motor starters. e. Contactors. 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of 16195 -3 © 2010 by FEI equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate. E. Underground Cable Identification: General: During back - filling/top- soiling of each exterior underground electrical, signal or communication cable, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 -inch to 8 -inch below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 -inch, install a single line marker, 2. Install line marker for every buried cable, regardless of whether direct buried or protected in conduit. F. Cable /Conductor Identification: I. General: Apply cable /conductor identification in each box /enclosure /cabinet, except where another form of identification (such as color -coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. 16195 -4 0 2010 by FBI r. CJ Cl) i ;.- r--r. ri o N 16195 -4 0 2010 by FBI SECTION 16420 SERVICE ENTRANCE, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Electrical services will come from a pad mounted transformer located where shown on the Project Drawings. B. The electrical services to the service entrance equipment from the transformer shall be by Division 16 in accordance with the one -line power riser diagram. C. Additional requirements for service - entrance work are indicated by drawings and schedules. D. Wires /cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings are specified in Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Sections, Wires and Cables, Raceways and Electrical Boxes and Fittings and are work of this section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SERVICE - ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide service- entrance equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information and as required for complete installation and as herein specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE - ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate all service - entrance work at existing transformer with Owner and power utility. Install service - entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service- entrance equipment fulfills requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC, Power Utility, and NEMA Standards. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service - entrance equipment work with other work. C. Install fuses, if any, in service- entrance equipment. 3.02 GROUNDING 16420 -1 © 2010 by FBI A. Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for service- entrance equipment as required by NEC, the Grounding Section of Division 16 and as indicated on drawings. 3.03 ADJUSTAND CLEAN A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Touch -up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original finishes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of service - entrance equipment and electrical circuitry, energized circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 16420 -2 © 2010 by FEI rJ � 'TU O o N 16420 -2 © 2010 by FEI SECTION 16452 r - GROUNDING PART 1- GENERAL f 9 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings, schedules and as specified herein. - B. Types of grounding specified in this section include the following: 1. Solid grounding. C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Materials and Components: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables /wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods /electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installers option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE and established industry standards for applications indicated. B. Conductors: Provide copper electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All conduits shall contain a minimum of one (1) separate equipment proundiruz conductor identified and sized according to NEC. C. Ground Rods: 1. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 5/8 -inch dia. x 8 -feet (Unless otherwise noted). D. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. 16452 -I © 2010 by FEI E. Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work. Provide welded connections where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding rods /electrodes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the equipment grounding screw provided on receptacles. C. At,switch outlets, where self - grounding type switches are installed in metal boxes, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the metal box. 4D'd Where switches installed in non - metallic boxes have metallic cover plates or screws, provide f— 3 `switches with green hexagonal equipment ground screw and connect to the equipment grounding tdnductor. -. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. U N F. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding rods /electrodes. (Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable). G. Install clamp -on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms or less, by driving additional ground rods and /or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance. 16452 -2 0 2010 by FBI SECTION 16470 i J PANELBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following: 1. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for cablelwire, connectors and electrical raceway work required in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures; not work of this section, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one (1) of the following: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D Company. 4. Cutler - Hammer. 2.2 PANELBOARDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and auxiliary components, of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti -turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper or aluminum conductors; equip with tin - plated aluminum bus bars, full -sized neutral bar, with bolt -on type heavy -duty, quick -make, quick- break, single -pole or multi -pole circuit- breakers, as indicated, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Multipole breakers shall be provided 16470 -1 0 2010 by FEI with a common trip. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards shall be type: 240V Bolt -on General Electric AQ . Siemens S I Square D NQOD Cutler- Hammer PRLI, PRL2 Breakers in panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than as listed on the panelboard schedule. C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, minimum 20- inches wide and 5 -3/4- inches deep, code -gage, minimum 16 -gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush metal locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike. Equip with interior circuit - directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface - mounting as indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. 1. Furnish six (6) spare keys for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. D. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time -delay type fuses, circuit - breakers, ground -fault protection units, etc., as recommended by manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. E. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time -delay type fuses, circuit- breakers, ground -fault protection units, etc., as recommended by manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS 16470 -2 0 2010 by FEI A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC Standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in LTL Standards 486A and B or manufacturer's torque requirements when more stringent. D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. E. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. F. Provide factory panelboard circuit directory cards upon completion of installation work. Circuit directory cards shall be arranged with even numbered circuits separated by group or card from odd numbered circuits. All circuits, including spares and spaces, shall be labeled. All identification shall be at a minimum typewritten. Hand lettering is not acceptable. G. All wiring within panelboards shall be arranged in a neat and organized manRar. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required by NEC and othel. Division 26 Sections. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturers tightening torque specifications. B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short - circuits. D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 16470 -3 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 16477 FUSES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of fuse work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of fuses specified in this section include the following: 1. Class L time- delay. 2. Class RKI time - delay. 3. Class RK5 time - delay. 4. Plug fuses. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS f :T �7 c� A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following: 1. Bussman Div; McGraw - Edison Co. 2. Littelfuse Co. 3. Gould Shawmut. B. Fuse types listed below are for Bussman Co. Fuses by Littelfuse Co. or Gould Shawmut shall be equal to types indicated. 2.02 FUSES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average tune /current and peak let- through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. B. Class L Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class L time -delay fuses rated 600V (Type KRP -C), 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 601- amperes and larger. C. Class RKI Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RKI time -delay fuses rated 250V (Type LPN -RK) for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type LPS -RK) for voltages 250 -600V, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 100- through 600 - amperes. 16477 -1 0 2010 by FE1 D. Class RK5 Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 time -delay fuses rated 250V (Type FRN -R) for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type FRS -R) for voltages 250 -600V, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes .1-through 90- amperes. E. Plug fuses shall be permitted only for single -pole fuseholder with switch units. Plug fuses shall be dual - element Type S fuses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF FUSES A. Install fuses as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA Standards for installation of fuses. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiling work, as necessary to interface installation of fuses with other work. C. Install fuses in fused switches, if any. D. Short- circuit protection dual - element fuses installed in individual motor circuits with separate overload protection shall be sized at 150% of motor nameplate current rating or the next standard fuse size. Where excessive ambient temperature, high inertia motor loads or frequent "on -off' cvcling reauires larger fuses, consult the electrical engineer. Use fuse reducers where fuse Raps are larger than fuse dimension. E. All fuse sizes shall be coordinated with manufacturer's requirements for each unit of equipment to be connected. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of fusible devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short - circuits. Correct malfunctioning units and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. 16477 -2 2010 by FBI .:ti o v N 16477 -2 2010 by FBI SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section might include the following: 1. LED. 2. High - intensity- discharge (HID). 3. Fluorescent. 4. Incandescent. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTAELEMANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: The type and manufacturer of all lighting fixtures shall be as indicated on the fixture schedule and drawings. 2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, ballasts, starters and wiring. B. No labels on fixtures shall be placed where same will be conspicuous or where same will mar the appearance of the units. The complete units and all components for fluorescent, HID and incandescent fixtures shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., label. C. All fixture and pole finishes shall be factory applied unless specifically noted otherwise D. All ballasts shall have ratings suitable for the atmosphere for which they are to be installed. Fixtures installed in low ambient temperature areas shall have ballasts specifically designed for low temperature starting. E. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be low mercury TCLP compliant. 16510 -1 © 2010 by FEI r ,n A. Manufacturers: The type and manufacturer of all lighting fixtures shall be as indicated on the fixture schedule and drawings. 2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, ballasts, starters and wiring. B. No labels on fixtures shall be placed where same will be conspicuous or where same will mar the appearance of the units. The complete units and all components for fluorescent, HID and incandescent fixtures shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., label. C. All fixture and pole finishes shall be factory applied unless specifically noted otherwise D. All ballasts shall have ratings suitable for the atmosphere for which they are to be installed. Fixtures installed in low ambient temperature areas shall have ballasts specifically designed for low temperature starting. E. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be low mercury TCLP compliant. 16510 -1 © 2010 by FEI 2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPES A. General: The fixture types are designated by letters (A.B.C. etc.) near each outlet and refer to the description as listed in the Fixture Schedule. B. All lamps shall be of type specified on the Fixture Schedule. This Contractor shall furnish lamps for all fixtures as shown on the plans and fixture schedule. These lamps shall be new at the time of building acceptance by the Owner. Any lamps used for construction lighting shall be replaced prior to acceptance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed and substrate which will support lighting fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation ", NEMA Standards and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. C. Where recessed fixtures are specified, Contractor shall provide plaster frames or other framing devices to the Ceiling Contractor prior to the installation of the fixtures and shall be responsible to see that the proper fixtures are furnished for the specific ceiling used. D. Where bollards are used, fasten fixtures securely to base; and ensure that bollards are plumb. E. Where the drawings indicate ballasts /lamps to be separately switched, the lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamps on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. The switch nearest the door shall control the outermost lamps. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING cA A. rJ Clean, lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. t& protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. C) u> C� 16510 -2 © 2010 by FEI 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting fixtures as required by NEC and other Division 26 Sections. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 16510 -3 0 2010 by FEI �7 16510 -3 0 2010 by FEI SECTION 16950 OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORKINCLUDED ' A. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, power packs, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. B. Contractor /Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16. C. Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this Section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC Systems and Building Management Systems. 1.2 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed. B. All components shall be UL Listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this Section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. C. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship and in conformance with the specifications. The Supplier's obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the Owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non - conforming and returned to the Supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the Owner's acceptance of the Project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. 16950 -1 ©2010 by FEI 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this Specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this Specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted. B. Submit paper prints of CAD - generated lighting plans prepared by manufacturer showing proper product, location, and orientation of each sensor and location and quantity of power packs. Electronic files are not acceptable. C. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. D. Submit standard catalog literature, which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. E. Submit any timing and sensitivity settings literature for each type of proposed device. F. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts. 1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to ensure Owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 A CCEPTABLE MANUFA CTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide occupancy sensor products of one (1) of the following: 1. Hubbell 2. SensorSwitch 3. Leviton 4. Watt- Stopper 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Provide the following type of sensor per area unless otherwise noted on the drawings: 1. Concessions and Storage: Dual Technology. 2. Restrooms: Ultrasonic ceiling- mounted or Microphonic ceiling - mounted. ' , r 13. Wall. switch sensors shall have manual ON /OFF capability. C c� C. Wall switch sensors shown to control two (2) lighting zones in the same space shall be provided with two (2) manual ON /OFF switches. 16950 -2 02010 by FEI D. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize advanced signal processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and airflow throughout controlled space. E. F. G. H. J. 2.3 All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with ballasts /lamp systems as shown on the drawings. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. All sensors shall be UL rated. Provide power packs and remote power packs where required for proper operation of sensor. Faceplate material/finish and wall- mounted sensor color shall match finish /colors of other wiring devices in the same room or space. (See Specification Section 26 27 26 for material and finish). CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU A. Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2 -inch knock -out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self- contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low- voltage power. B. Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 1. 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten n 2. 20A - 120 VAC Ballast 3. 20A - 277 VAC Ballast s ` c.} C. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 33 regarding routing of power and controLwiring: cr PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the area provided with detection. B. It shall be the Manufacturer and Contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have 90% to 100% coverage to completely cover the controlled area. Sensors shall be located such that detection does not extend beyond corresponding room or area. 16950 -3 02010 by FEI C. The Manufacturer and Contactor shall provide additional sensors, power packs and miscellaneous etuipment as required to properly and completely cover the respective controlled area. 1. Where there are multiple switches or zones of control in the room or area, a separate relay /power pack shall be provided for each switch leg or zone of control to maintain the control functions shown. 2. Where the Contractor provides a ceiling- mounted sensor in lieu of a wall- mounted sensor as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide a wall switch for manual on/off control of the space. The switch shall be located where the wall- mounted occupancy sensor is shown on the drawings. D. The Contractors shall arrange a pre - installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owners facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. E. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome location difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The Manufacturer and Contractor shall also, provide, at the Owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the Owners personnel with the operation, use, adjustment and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. F. Coordinate locations of remote power packs with accessible ceiling locations. Where no accessible ceiling space is available, provide sensors with integral power packs or line- voltage type sensors. 3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble -free occupancy -based lighting control system. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the Electrical Engineer with 10 working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the systems fine tuning the factory - authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors. 16950 -4 020 10 by FEI APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT cr n� .J Proposed Marina Building & Shelter -Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Prepared for: Snyder & Associates Ankeny, Iowa Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Iowa City, Iowa yJ August 25, 2010 Snyder & Associates 2727 SW Snyder Boulevard Ankeny, Iowa 50023 Attn: Mr. Donald P. Marner, ASLA P: 515 -964 -2020 F: 515- 965 -1629 E: dpmarner()snyder- associates.com nc� Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Marina Building & Shelter — Terry Trueblood Recreation area Iowa City, Iowa Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Dear Mr. Marner: Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has completed the subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services for the referenced project in Iowa City, Iowa. These services were performed in general accordance with our Task Order No: P06100457 dated August 2, 2010. This geotechnical engineering report presents the results of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the proposed structures, as well as preparation of pavement subgrades and the minimum recommended pavement thicknesses in the parking areas. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc, Bachan K. Sinha, M.S., E.I. Project Engineer /Project Manager BKS /BFG: N: \Projects\ 2010\ 06105656.O1Wrp \06105656.01.docx Copies: 3—Client �Bri F. .sl RF S� I a No. 16017 Terracon Consultants, Inc. 2339 Heinz Road, Unit H Iowa City, Iowa 52240 P 13191 688 3007 F 1319) 688 3008 terracon.com •,ry t Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Proposed Marina Building & Shelter — Terry Trueblood Recreation area Iowa City, Iowa Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Dear Mr. Marner: Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has completed the subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services for the referenced project in Iowa City, Iowa. These services were performed in general accordance with our Task Order No: P06100457 dated August 2, 2010. This geotechnical engineering report presents the results of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the proposed structures, as well as preparation of pavement subgrades and the minimum recommended pavement thicknesses in the parking areas. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc, Bachan K. Sinha, M.S., E.I. Project Engineer /Project Manager BKS /BFG: N: \Projects\ 2010\ 06105656.O1Wrp \06105656.01.docx Copies: 3—Client �Bri F. .sl RF S� I a No. 16017 Terracon Consultants, Inc. 2339 Heinz Road, Unit H Iowa City, Iowa 52240 P 13191 688 3007 F 1319) 688 3008 terracon.com TABLE OF CONTENTS Appendix B — Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Description .................................................................................. ............................B -1 Appendix C — Supporting Documents GeneralNotes ....... ................................................. ....... ..... .... ......... .............. ....... . ........... ..... ............ C -1 Unified Soil Classification System ....... .............................. ........... .............................................. ....... C -2 Reliable e; Responsive in Convenient w Innovative Page EXECUTIVESUMMARY ................................................................................ ............................... i 1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................. ..............................1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION ................................................................. ..............................1 2.1 Project Description .................................................................. ..............................1 2.2 Site Location and Description .................................................. ..............................2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ............................................................ ..............................2 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile ....................................................... ..............................2 3.2 Groundwater Conditions .......................................................... ..............................3 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ......... ..............................4 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations ................................................... ..............................4 4.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork .............................................. ..............................5 4.2.1 Excavation Considerations .......................................... ..............................6 4.2.2 Fill Types and Compaction .......................................... ..............................6 4.2.3 Compaction Requirements ......................................... ..............................7 4.2.4 Grading and Drainage ................................... ............................... : >.........8- 4.3 Shallow Foundations ........................ ............................... : ' '..........9 4.3.1 Design Recommendations .... ............................... . ...... _,. .9 - 4.3.2 Construction Considerations ................. ..............................` 4.4 Seismic Considerations ................................... ............................... ....r 11 , 4.5 Floor Slab ............................................................................. ........................,....11 4.5.1 Design Recommendations .................................... ..................;;........., ...11 4.5.2 Construction Considerations .............................................................. " ..' ..11 . 4.6 Pavements ............................................................................. .............................12 4.6.1 Pavement Subgrades .................. -- ....................................... ................. 12 4.6.2 Design Recommendations .......................................... .............................12 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS .................................................................... .............................15 Exhibit No. Appendix A— Field Exploration SiteLocation Map... .............................................................. ................................... ..... ................. A-1 BoringLocation Diagram ............................................... ................................................ ..... .............. A -2 SubsurfaceSoil Profile ......... ................. ............................................................................................ A -3 BoringLogs .......................................................................................... ............................... A -4 lhru A -9 Field Exploration Description ..................... ..................................................................................... A -10 Appendix B — Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Description .................................................................................. ............................B -1 Appendix C — Supporting Documents GeneralNotes ....... ................................................. ....... ..... .... ......... .............. ....... . ........... ..... ............ C -1 Unified Soil Classification System ....... .............................. ........... .............................................. ....... C -2 Reliable e; Responsive in Convenient w Innovative GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED MARINA BUILDING & SHELTER - TERRY TRUBLOOD RECREATION AREA IOWA CITY, IOWA �y Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 August 25, 2010 rF EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This geotechnical executive summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design and /or construction purposes. It should be recognized that specific details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section titled General Comments should be read for an understanding of the report limitations. Terracon's geotechnical scope of work included the drilling and sampling of six (6) test borings at the project site to approximate depths of 10 to 25 feet below the existing grades. This includes one (1) boring in the proposed Marina building area, one (1) boring in the proposed shelter area, and four (4) borings in the proposed parking areas. Based on the information obtained from our subsurface exploration, the following geotechnical considerations were identified: Site Soils: The near surface site soils generally consisted of existing variable fill materials to depths of about 6 to greater than 10 feet below the existing grades. The existing variable fill materials were mainly composed of lean clay and /or fine to coarse sands with varying amounts of gravel, organics, and concrete & brick pieces. Below the existing fill materials, layers of medium stiff to stiff, native, lean clay and /or loose to medium dense, sandy soils were encountered in Borings 1 and 2. At the time of field exploration the groundwater level was encountered in the borings at depths ranging from about 6 to 10 feet below the existing grades. Foundations: Based on the subsurface data and conditions observed in the borings, it is our opinion that, special design and construction considerations will be required on this project due to presence of existing variable fill materials across the site. The proposed buildings could be supported on spread footings provided the bearing soils are prepared in accordance with the recommendations in this report. Floor Slab: The existing fill materials also pose a risk for floor slab settlement and possible distress. As a minimum, we recommend the area be surficially compacted with a heavy -duty, steel -drum, vibratory roller and at least 18 inches of properly compacted structural fill be provided below the floor slabs. Pavement Sections: The following minimum pavement sections are recommended on this project. Automobile parking areas: 4 inches of asphalt over 6 inches of crushed stone or 5 Reliable a Responsive ® Convenient ® Innovative inches of concrete. Driveways: 6 inches asphalt over 6 inches of crushed stone, or 6 inches of concrete. Due to above reasons, earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fill, subgrade preparation, foundation bearing materials, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during construction. Reliable ® Responsive s Convenient m Innovative GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED MARINA BUILDING & SHELTER —TERRY TRUBLOOD RECREATION AREA IOWA CITY, IOWA Terracon Project No. 06105656.01" ` August 25, 2010 1 F 1.0 INTRODUCTION <' This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical- jengingecing services performed for the referenced project in Iowa City, Iowa. The project site is located at the southeast quadrant of the intersection of McCollister Boulevard and S Gilbert Street/Sand Road. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: ® subsurface soil conditions s foundation design and construction N groundwater conditions ® estimated seismic site classification H site preparation and earthwork a floor slab design and construction ® excavation conditions ® pavement design and construction As planned, our scope of services included drilling and sampling six (6) test borings across the project site to depths ranging from approximately 10 to 25 feet below the existing site grades. A Site Location Map, a Boring Location Diagram, and the boring logs are included in Appendix A of this report. The laboratory test results for selected soil samples obtained from the site during the field exploration are included on the attached boring logs. Descriptions of the field exploration and laboratory testing are provided in their respective appendices. 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 2.1 Project Description ITEM I DESCRIPTION Site location & layout Proposed structures (Marina building & Shelter) Finished floor elevation Refer to the Site Location Map (Exhibit A -1) & Boring Location Diagram (Exhibit A -2) in Appendix A Single story, wood framed or masonry structures supported by a combination of load bearing walls and individual columns. Plan dimensions and /or grading details were not provided at this time. Not provided Reliable a Responsive n Convenient m Innovative 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1�Cff�C� Marina Building & Shelter - Trueblood Recreation Area a Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 ITEM DESCRIPTION Interior & Exterior Column Loads: 50 kips (assumed) -- _ - Location Maximum loads Continuous Load - Bearing Wall Loads: 3 klf (assumed) Moderate vegetation, grass, and existing ponds /water bodies at Maximum Uniform Floor Slab Load: 100 psf (assumed) Maximum allowable settlement 1-inch(assumed) Some existing structures and pavements occupy isolated locations % of total settlement (assumed) Maximum allowable differential settlement / -inch over 40 feet for walls, 3/, -inch over 40 feet for interior elevations in the proposed building areas vary between about columns (assumed). i 644'/2 feet (Boring 1) and 649 feet (Boring 2). Grading plan and /or finished grade elevations were not provided. Grading details Anticipated cut/fill thicknesses in building and pavement areas: On 6441/2 (Boring 5) and 654 (Boring 6). the order of about 3 feel or less, 2.2 Site Location and Description ITEM DESCRIPTION -- _ - Location - - -- -_ _ —_ —_...._.------- Iowa City, Iowa Moderate vegetation, grass, and existing ponds /water bodies at Existing site features & scattered locations. Ground cover Some existing structures and pavements occupy isolated locations of the site. Based on the supplied preliminary site plans, the existing grade c -� elevations in the proposed building areas vary between about Site topography i 644'/2 feet (Boring 1) and 649 feet (Boring 2). (, In parking areas, the existing grade elevations vary between about 6441/2 (Boring 5) and 654 (Boring 6). -3.0 (�,SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS -J 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile Specific conditions encountered at the boring locations are indicated on the individual boring logs. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in soil types. In -situ, the transition between native materials may be gradual. Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions on the project site can be generalized as follows: Reliable n Responsive 12 Convenient ® Innovative 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1r�rP�e ®� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area ® Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 n Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Description Approximate Depth to Material Encountered Consistency/Density Bottom of Stratum (feet) SurFcial 6 to 12 inches Gravel N/A (Borings 2 & 3) Variable fill materials - Lean clay and /or fine to medium 6 to 8' and fine to coarse sand with Stratum 1A i (Borings 1 & 3 through 6) varying amounts of gravel, N/A organic matters, and concrete & brick pieces 10 Fine to medium sand with Stratum 1B (Boring 2) varying amounts of silt Lean clay and /or lean clay Loose to medium dense 8 to 162 Stratum 2 (Borings 1, 4, & 6) to silty clay Medium stiff 20 to 243 Fine to coarse sand with Stratum 3 varying amounts of silt & ; Loose to medium dense (Borings 1 & 2) gravel Stratum 4 25° Glacial till Stiff 1. Bottom of Borings 3 & 5; 2. Bottom of Borings 4 & 6; 3. Bottom of Boring 2; r 4. Bottom of Boring 1 cl Please review the attached boring logs (Appendix A) for a detailed description of the conditions,, encountered at the individual boring locations. 3.2 Groundwater Conditions During the drilling operation, the borings were observed for the presence: and level of t: groundwater. The borings were left open approximately 24 hours so delayed water level observations could be made. Following completion of our drilling operation and /or the delayed groundwater level measurements, the borings were backfilled with on -site soils. A summary of the observed groundwater levels in the borings are presented in the following table. Reliable a Responsive m Convenient a Innovative 3 Geotechnical Engineering Report �� f �� ®� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area u Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 n Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Groundwater Level Observations Boring No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 WD/WS (feet) 13 16 10 None None None DWL (feet) — T 7 N/A i N/A 6 N/A - - -- I 8 WD: While Drilling, WS: While Sampling, DWL: Delayed groundwater level (measured on 8/18/2010) These water level observations provide an approximate indication of the groundwater conditions existing on the site at the time the borings were drilled. Long term observations in piezometers or observation wells sealed from the influence of surface water are often recommended for an accurate evaluation of the groundwater conditions and potential for groundwater level fluctuations in the soil types encountered at this site. It should be recognized that fluctuations of the groundwater table will occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall, runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. In addition, perched water can develop within higher permeability soils overlying less permeable soils and /or within variable existing fill materials following periods of heavy or prolonged precipitation. The possibility of groundwater level fluctuations and perched water should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project. 4.0 _ RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION r 4.1 'deotechnical Considerations Existing fill soijs and organic matter were encountered in the borings (except Boring 2) in the upper, about 6 -to greater than 10 feet. These fill materials appear to be variable in terms of comppsition'and consistency. Concrete and brick pieces were found in the fill materials in Borings 3, 4, and 5. It should be noted that structures supported over uncontrolled fills would be at risk for greater than normal settlements and damage. As a result, Terracon recommends all the existing fill materials and organic matters be removed from below the proposed building foundations. Depending on the planned finished floor elevations, consideration should be given to completely removing the existing fill materials from the proposed building areas. Loose sands may be present in footing excavations (i.e., for the Shelter Building). In our opinion, sandy soils exposed at the base of shallow foundations should be densified in place to at least 98% of the material's standard Proctor maximum dry density or at least 70% relative density using appropriate compaction equipment prior to foundation construction. The sands should be densified to a depth of at least 2 feet below footing bearing elevation using hand -held dynamic compaction equipment (e.g., jumping jack) Reliable a Responsive ce; Convenient ® Innovative 4 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1r�P r.�c ®� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area a Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Provided the owner is willing to accept the risk and the resultant potential for adverse performance, in our opinion, the floor slabs and pavements could be supported over portions of the existing fill. However, as a minimum we recommend at least 18 and 12 inches of properly compacted structural fill be present below the floor slabs and pavements, respectively. It should be noted that sandy and clay soils present at this site are susceptible to disturbance from construction activities, particularly if the soil has high natural moisture content or,iA wetted by surface water or seepage. Care should be taken during construction to minimize disillfbance of the bearing soils. rr �j 4.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork 'a Surficial soils, existing variable fill materials, organic matters, and any otherwise unsuable materials should be removed from the proposed construction areas. Wet or dry material sliguld either be removed or moisture conditioned and recompacted. Soft, dry and /or low- density soil should be removed or compacted in place prior to placing new fill. After rough grade has been established, the exposed subgrade should be proofrolled by the contractor and test probed by Terracon. Proofrolling on clay subgrades could be accomplished by using heavy, rubber -tired construction equipment or a tandem axle dump truck, while in sandy soils, by using a vibratory drum roller. This surficial proofroll would help to provide a stable base for the compaction of new structural fill, and delineates low density, soft, or disturbed areas that may exist below subgrade level. This proofrolling process will help to identify soft or loose areas below the subgrade level. Soft or loose areas should be undercut, moisture conditioned, and recompacted or replaced with approved structural fill. Subgrade conditions should be observed by a geotechnical engineer during construction. Depending on the time of year construction occurs and the final site grades, dewatering during excavations could be required at this site. Sump pits and pumps would generally be adequate for dewatering excavations in clay soils. However, more extensive dewatering measures, such as well points and sheeting may be required for excavations extending into water bearing sandy soils. Due to the variability of the existing fill encountered across the site, corrective measures will likely be required to increase the subgrade stability during subgrade preparation. The owner should budget for additional costs to provide the required corrective measures. Based on our experience in soils of these types, crushed stone thicknesses up to 2 feet could be required to stabilize the subgrade soils. A geotextile stabilization material could also be placed below the crushed stone to help stabilize the subgrade soils. As an alternative, the unstable subgrade soils could be undercut, scarified on -site, and compacted with moisture and density control in maximum 9 -inch loose lifts up to final subgrade elevation to provide a uniform thickness of well - compacted material. Reliable r Responsive m; Convenient n Innovative 5 Geotechnical Engineering Report 'rerracon Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area u Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 n Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of floor slabs and pavements. Construction traffic over the completed subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be graded to prevent pending of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. If the subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to floor slab and pavement construction. 4.2.1 Excavation Considerations All excavations should comply with the requirements of OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, as well as other applicable codes. This document states that the excavation safety is the responsibility of the contractor. Reference to this OSHA requirement should be included in the project specifications. Slope heights, slope inclinations and /or excavation depths should in no case exceed those specified in local, state or federal safety regulations, including current OHSA excavation and trench safety standards. If any excavations, such as the main power plant excavation, extend to a depth greater than 20 feet, according to OHSA regulations, side slopes and /or bracing must be designed by a professional engineer. Where granular (sandy) soils are encountered, we recommend excavations be shored or braced to maintain stability. The bracing or sheet piles should be designed to resist the lateral earth pressures and would reduce the potential for caving or sloughing of these cohesionless soils. Sldp$d excavations could be considered if the lateral extent would not impact adjacent str6ctures 3Allities, or pavements. Where poorly compacted variable fill materials are a encountered,' flatter slopes than those required by OHSA could be required to maintain the stability of the, excavation(s). 4.2.2 Fill Types and Compaction Newlills placed in building and pavement areas should be low volume change cohesive soil or granaldr soil. Fill placed in confined excavations and utility trenches should consist of relatively clean and well - graded granular material. This should provide for greater ease of placement and compaction in confined areas where larger compaction equipment cannot be operated. The use of granular fill in these isolated and potentially deeper excavations would reduce the potential for differential settlement for building components. Most of the inorganic clays and sandy soils encountered in the borings are considered suitable for use as site mass grading fill. However, some sorting will be required if zones of organic matters, concrete and brick rubble, or other deleterious material are encountered in the existing fill. Structural fill should meet the following material property requirements: Reliable a Responsive ig Convenient m Innovative 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report lr��r�e ®�� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area ° Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Fill Type USCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement Low Plasticity CL -ML, CL General site grading fill Cohesive GW, GP, GM, GC General site grading fill, below foundations, slabs, and Granular SW, SP, SM, SC pavements Unsuitable MH, OL, OH, PT Green (non - structural) locations Most of the on -site inorganic clays and sandy soils On -Site Soils CL, CL -ML, SP, SP -SM, (encountered in the borings) generally appear SM suitable for reuse as structural fill.3 1. Structural fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. A sample of each material type should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for evaluation prior to use on this site. 2. Low plasticity cohesive soils (CL, CL -ML) would have a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index of less than 23. 3. Organic matters, other unsuitable materials, and concrete & brick pieces should be removed from these soils. 4.2.3 Compaction Requirements � 1 Moisture conditioning (e.g. drying of clays and wetting of sands) of the existing site soils will':_ likely be required if they are used as engineered fill. Appropriate laboratory tests,rincluding Atterberg Limits for cohesive soils, organic content tests for dark colored soils, and ;'standard Proctor (ASTM D698) moisture- density relationship tests should be performed on proposed- fill materials prior to their use as engineered fill. Further evaluation of any on -site soils or off-site fill materials should be performed by Terracon prior to their use in compacted fill sections. Recommended degree of compaction and moisture content criteria for engineered fill materials are as follows: Per the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698) Material Type and Location Minimum Compaction Range of Moisture Contents for Compaction Requirement ( %)' Minimum Maximum Low Plasticity Cohesive Beneath foundations and within 1 foot of finished 98 -2% +3% pavement subgrade: Above foundations, below slabs, and more than 1 foot 95 -2% +3% below the pavement Reliable a Responsive o Convenient ® Innovative 7 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1(�r`�� ®� Marina Building & Shelter - Trueblood Recreation Area d Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 u Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 1. We recommend that structural fills be tested for moisture content and compaction during placement. Should the results of the in -place density tests indicate the specified moisture or compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved. 2. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case, granular materials should be compacted to at least 70% relative density (ASTM D 4253 -00 and D 4254 -00). 3. Specifically, moisture levels should be maintained at levels satisfactory for compaction to be achieved without the granular fill material bulking during placement or pumping when proofrolled. We( recommend that fill be placed and compacted on stable subgrades in lifts of 9 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self - propelled compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness =,,shoald be``red_uced to 4 inches in loose thickness when hand equipment (e.g., jumping jack, 'vibratory plate; compactor, etc.) is used. A vibrating smooth drum compactor should not be used On claIy soils. All new fill placement and compaction should be observed and tested by Terracon personnel. We do riot expect fill thicknesses to exceed 5 feet in any of the building areas. If additional fill is planned, we request the opportunity to review site grading plans and offer additional recommendations for higher degrees of compaction or settlement expectations and control. 4.2.4 Grading and Drainage Final surrounding grades should be sloped away from the buildings and pavements on all sides. In addition, roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe to the storm water drainage system or discharged a minimum of 5 feet away from the buildings. As an alternative, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is paved and slopes away from the buildings. Reliable a Responsive v Convenient m Innovative Per the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698) Minimum Compaction Range of Moisture Contents for Compaction Material Type and Location Requirement Minimum - Maximum subgrade -- - Granular2 Beneath foundations and within 1 foot of finished 98 -3 %' +3 %' pavement subgrade: Above foundations, below slabs, and more than 1 foot 95 -3 %' +3 %' below the pavement subgrade 1. We recommend that structural fills be tested for moisture content and compaction during placement. Should the results of the in -place density tests indicate the specified moisture or compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved. 2. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case, granular materials should be compacted to at least 70% relative density (ASTM D 4253 -00 and D 4254 -00). 3. Specifically, moisture levels should be maintained at levels satisfactory for compaction to be achieved without the granular fill material bulking during placement or pumping when proofrolled. We( recommend that fill be placed and compacted on stable subgrades in lifts of 9 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self - propelled compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness =,,shoald be``red_uced to 4 inches in loose thickness when hand equipment (e.g., jumping jack, 'vibratory plate; compactor, etc.) is used. A vibrating smooth drum compactor should not be used On claIy soils. All new fill placement and compaction should be observed and tested by Terracon personnel. We do riot expect fill thicknesses to exceed 5 feet in any of the building areas. If additional fill is planned, we request the opportunity to review site grading plans and offer additional recommendations for higher degrees of compaction or settlement expectations and control. 4.2.4 Grading and Drainage Final surrounding grades should be sloped away from the buildings and pavements on all sides. In addition, roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe to the storm water drainage system or discharged a minimum of 5 feet away from the buildings. As an alternative, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is paved and slopes away from the buildings. Reliable a Responsive v Convenient m Innovative Geotechnical Engineering Report 1r�PP��Pi Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area a Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 P Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 4.3 Shallow Foundations The proposed buildings and other lightly loaded structures could be supported on spread footings provided the bearing soils are prepared in accordance with the recommendations in this report. Depending on grading plans and due to presence of existing fill materials at this site, the spread footings would bear either in compacted structural fill following the removal of existing fill materials or directly on recompacted native soils. No footings should bear on existing fill materials and overexcavation of these materials should be anticipated. The net allowable soil bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the design foundation base elevation. 4.3.1 Design Recommendations DESCRIPTION Proposed building foundations Bearing Material Net Allowable Bearing Pressure Minimum Dimensions Minimum Embedment Depth Below Finished Grade Total Estimated Settlement' VALUE - -- Conventional shallow footings Compacted structural fill follov removal of existing fill mateYa,l on recomoacted native soils: r -� r :> g the Dr directly t. (0 2,500 psf Columns: 30 inches Walls: 16 inches 48 inches — perimeter footings and other footings in unheated areas 24 inches — interior footings in heated areas 1 inch Estimated Differential Settlement % of total settlement Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five feet of the foundation for perimeter (or exterior) footings and finished floor level for interior footings. The allowable foundation bearing pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The design bearing pressure may be increased by one -third when considering total loads that include wind or seismic conditions. The weight of the foundation concrete below grade may be neglected in dead load computations. Footings, foundation walls, and masonry walls (if any) should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or other discontinuities in masonry walls (if any) is recommended. Foundation excavations should be observed by the geotechnical engineer. If the soil conditions encountered differ significantly from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations will be required. Reliable s Responsive is Convenient iR Innovative 9 c, Geotechnical Engineering Report �rrc Marina Building & Shelter - Trueblood Recreation Area e Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 4.3.2 Construction Considerations The soils at and below the foundation bearing depths should be observed and thoroughly tested by Terracon to confirm that the soil conditions are suitable for support of the foundations. The excavations should be probed or otherwise sampled at each isolated spread footing and at regular intervals along continuous footings. Where existing fill materials, loose sandy soils which cannot be densified in place, or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered at the bearing level, the excavations should be deepened to suitable bearing material. Footings should then be supported at the original design footing base elevation on engineered fill. Overexcavation for compacted backfill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the footing base elevation with approved structural fill placed in lifts of 6 inches or less in loose thickness and compacted to at least 98 percent of the material's maximum Standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D698). The overexcavation and backfill procedures are shown in the figure below. I'WiFooti,g Level - - RecomnL Exwvefiotbn level a � ra c., c -= W30 W 2MD _ 8.... _.._ ...... .1 ----- ___ COMPACTED STRUCTURAL D FILL Overexcavation / Backfill NOTE: Excavations in sketches shown vertical for convenience. Excavations should be sloped as necessary for safely. Sandy soils exposed at the base of shallow foundations should be densified in place to at least 98% of the material's Standard Proctor maximum dry density or at least 70% relative density using appropriate compaction equipment prior to foundation construction. The sands should be densified to a depth of at least 2 feet below footing bearing elevation using hand -held dynamic compaction equipment (e.g., jumping jack) The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose or soft soils prior to placement of concrete. If groundwater is encountered at the time of construction, it should be lowered and controlled to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the excavation elevation. Should the soils at the bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be stabilized or removed Reliable in Responsive n Convenient Is Innovative 10 Geotechnical Engineering Report 11 U Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area ■ Iowa City, Iowa Y iorr ar—on August 25, 2010 n Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 prior to placement of concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavating to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. 4.4 Seismic Considerations DESCRIPTION I VALUE 2006 International Building Code Site Classification (IBC) CZ Site Latitude I N 41' 37'36.7" Site Longitude W 91' 31'40.3" ' Note: In general accordance with the 2006 International Building Code, Table 161352. IBC Site Class is based on the average characteristics of the upper 100 feet of the subsurface profile. ' Note: The 2006 International Building Code (IBC) requires a site soil profile determination extending to a depth of 100 feet for seismic site classification. The current scope does not include the required 100 foot soil profile determination. Borings extended to a maximum depth of 25 feet, and this seismic site class definition considers that fine to coarse sandy soils continue below the maximum depth of the subsurface exploration. Additional exploration to deeper depths, or seismic velocity testing would be required to confirm the conditions below the current depth of 4.5 Floor Slab " co 4.5.1 Design Recommendations DESCRIPTION VALUE G Interior floor system I Slab -on -grade Portland Cement Concrete i o Floor slab support Unheated areas subject to frost Modulus of subgrade reaction Minimum of 18 inches of properly compacted Structural-flll or suitable, low plasticity, inorganic native soils below floor slabs. Minimum of 3% feet of clean (less than 5% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve) material below slabs. 75 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in). The modulus was obtained based on our experience with similar subgrade conditions. 4.5.2 Construction Considerations The floor slab subgrade should be prepared in accordance with the Site Preparation and Earthwork section of this report. Care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content, prior to construction of the floor slabs. If the subgrade should become desiccated, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moistened, and recompacted prior to floor slab placement. In addition, we recommend the placement of the new fills for floor slab support be placed as far in advance of slab construction as possible to allow settlement of the underlying soils from the weight of the new structural fill, and thereby, reduce post- construction total and differential settlements. Reliable a Responsive ui Convenient r. Innovative 11 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ierr�cr� Marina Building & Shelter - Trueblood Recreation Area m Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade that will be covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or.when the slab will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer should refer to ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder. Where floor slabs are tied to perimeter walls or turn -down slabs to meet structural or other construction objectives, our experience indicates that any differential movement between the walls and slabs will likely be observed in adjacent slab expansion joints or floor slab cracks that occur beyond the length of the structural dowels. The structural engineer should account for this potential differential settlement through use of sufficient control joints, appropriate reinforcing or other means. 4.6 Pavements 4.6.1 Pavement Subgrades The subgrade for pavements should be prepared in accordance with the Site Preparation and Earthwork section of this report. In addition to the scarification and compaction recommended, we recommend the exposed subgrade be proofrolled. Proofrolling clay subgrades could be accomplished by using heavy, rubber -tired construction equipment or a tandem axle dump truck. This surficial proofroll would help to provide a stable base for the compaction of new structural fill, and delineates low density, soft, or disturbed areas that may exist below subgrade level. Unsuitable material encountered below subgrade level should be further undercut and replaced with structural fill. Due to the presence of existing fill on this site and in order to reduce the owner's risk of adverse pavement performance, as a minimum, the upper 1 foot of subgrade material should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. If there is a,delay between subgrade preparation and paving, the pavement subgrades should be carefully reevaluated as the time for pavement construction approaches. Within a few days of the scheduled paving, we recommend the pavement areas be proofrolled again with a loaded tandem axle 8umq:truck in the presence of Terracon personnel. Particular attention should be given to the "areas ?that w@re rutted and disturbed earlier during construction operations and frequent movement of construction equipment. Areas where unsuitable conditions exist should be repaired by removing and replacing the materials with properly compacted fill. During subgrade preparation for pavements, it is sometimes necessary to provide a layer of crushed limestone to help improve subgrade stability for heavy construction equipment traffic. 4.6.2 Design Recommendations Traffic load information was not available at the time of this report; therefore, a formal pavement design is not provided. Some typical pavement sections are provided below. Asphaltic cement Reliable in Responsive n Convenient ® Innovative 12 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1fCir�e�l� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area . Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 concrete pavement thicknesses are based on the Asphalt Paving Association of Iowa (APAI) Asphalt Paving Design Guide and local design practice. Portland cement concrete thicknesses are from the American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 330R -08 — Guide for the Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots. Thickness recommendations for Passenger Vehicle Parking sections are based on light passenger vehicle (gross weight less than 4 tons) traffic only, and only occasional truck traffic such as snow removal trucks (APAI Class II, ACI Traffic Category A). As part of the layout design of the project we recommend the designer use signs and preventive structures to restrict heavy truck traffic from entering these areas. The Main Drives & Truck Access sections are based on less than 25 trucks per day (APAI Traffic Class III, ACI Traffic Category B). As a minimum, we suggest the following typical pavement sections be considered. Recommended Pavement Section Thickness' (inches) Traffic Area Alternative Asphaltic Portland Aggregate Cement Cement Base Total Concrete Concrete Course Passenger Vehicle A 4 — 6 10 B 5 5 5 Parking Main Drives & Truck A 6 - -- 6 12 Access' B 6 5 6 1. All materials should meet the current Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Ste Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction. Asphaltic Surface - IDOT Type A Asphaltic Cement Concrete: Section 2303 Asphaltic Base - IDOT Type B Asphaltic Cement Concrete, Class I: Section 2303 Concrete Pavement - iDOT Portland Cement Concrete Type C: Section 2301 2. In areas of anticipated heavy traffic, fire trucks, delivery trucks, or concentrated loads (e.g. dumpster pads), and areas with repeated turning or maneuvering of heavy vehicles, a minimum concrete thickness of 7 inches is recommended but should be evaluated further when loading conditions are known. 3. A minimum 1.5 -inch surface course should be used on ACC pavements. 4. The granular base course materials should meet the requirements of IDOT specifications 4120.04 and be placed on a stable subgrade and compacted to at least 98 percent of the materials Standard Proctor maximum dry density. 5. A 4 -inch (or greater) granular base could be considered below PCC pavements to help reduce potential for slab curl, shrinkage cracking, and subgrade "pumping" through joints. The estimated pavement sections provided in this report are minimums for the assumed design criteria, and as such, periodic maintenance should be expected. Areas for parking of heavy vehicles, concentrated turn areas, and start/stop maneuvers could require thicker pavement Reliable ® Responsive r Convenient a Innovative 13 Geotechnical Engineering Report �ire�P,��e ®� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area o Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 d Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 sections. Edge restraints (i.e. concrete curbs or aggregate shoulders) should be planned along curves and areas of maneuvering vehicles. A maintenance program that includes surface sealing, joint cleaning and sealing, and timely repair of cracks and deteriorated areas will increase the pavement's service life. As an option, thicker sections could be constructed to decrease future maintenance. All concrete for rigid pavements should have a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi, and be placed with a maximum slump of 4 inches. Although not required for structural support, a minimum 4 -inch thick base course layer is recommended to help reduce potential for slab curl, shrinkage cracking, and subgrade "pumping" through joints. Proper joint spacing will also be required to prevent excessive slab curling and shrinkage cracking. All joints should be sealed to prevent entry of foreign material and dowelled where necessary for load transfer. Terracon has observed dishing in some parking lots surfaced with ACC. Dishing is usually observed in frequently -used parking stalls (such as near the front of buildings), and occurs under the wheel footprint in these stalls. The use of higher -grade asphaltic cement, or surfacing these areas with PCC, should be considered. The dishing is exacerbated by factors such as irrigated islands or planter areas, sheet surface drainage to the front of structure, and placing the ACC directly on a compacted clay subgrade. During subgrade preparation for pavements, it is sometimes necessary to provide a layer of crushed limestone to help improve subgrade stability for heavy construction equipment traffic. Long term pavement performance will be dependent upon several factors, including pavement and subgrade thicknesses, maintaining subgrade moisture levels and providing for preventive maintenance. The following recommendations should be considered the minimum: "'Site grading at a minimum 2% grade away from the pavements, PCC joint spacing and reinforcement per ACI 330R -08, The �ybgrade and the pavement surface have a minimum '/ inch per foot slope to � promole: proper surface drainage, 'Consider appropriate edge drainage, i- Cnstajf joint sealant and seal cracks immediately, Seal ail Wdscaped areas in, or adjacent to pavements to minimize or prevent moisture eMigration to subgrade soils, Placing compacted, low permeability backfill against the exterior side of curb and gutter, Placing curb, gutter and /or sidewalk directly on subgrade soils without the use of base course materials. Preventive maintenance should be planned and provided for through an on -going pavement management program. Preventive maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration, and to preserve the pavement investment. Preventive maintenance consists of both localized maintenance (e.g. crack and joint sealing and patching) and global Reliable a Responsive n Convenient n Innovative 14 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1r�PP�e ®� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area ® Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 n Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 maintenance (e.g. surface sealing). Preventive maintenance is usually the first priority when implementing a planned pavement maintenance program and provides the highest return on investment for pavements. Prior to implementing any maintenance, additional engineering observation is recommended to determine the type and extent of preventive maintenance. 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth- related construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. Support of floor slabs and pavements on or above existing fill soils is discussed in this report. However, even with the recommended construction testing services, there is an inherent risk for the owner that compressible fill or unsuitable material within or buried by the fill will not be discovered. This risk of unforeseen conditions cannot be eliminated without completely removing the existing fill, but can be reduced by performing additional testing and evaluation. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. Reliable n Responsive n Convenient in Innovative 15 7 1 3 i Reliable n Responsive n Convenient in Innovative 15 Geotechnical Engineering Report Marina Building & Sheller - Trueblood Recreation Area e Iowa City, Iowa Irerracon August 25, 2010 c Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct o onal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Profes ionarEngm under tFe-taTAs -of. he Slate of Iowa. BRIAN F. Gist 16017 Date My license renewal date is December 31, 2011. Reliable u Responsive a Convenient a Innovative 16 c Reliable u Responsive a Convenient a Innovative 16 APPENDIX A FIELD EXPLORATION C'l � 9 r� ui of 0 PLI MT la ko 0 n YUU D C 0 Vn L) to °� - 1S mo,uw6g d w o IS e�owtad ^+ rn f, i O 36 Dy 11111 War,) >In0 c 1S tl'V _ _ � fO JJf+sb ' a ,i IS UJJWUf.j G a O ttonuu •'r, a IS Ilu.v( >t, o o 13 a!nefl S � g Y I- S ❑ t ts Armpeoill U,hp P� ff u � fL F i .✓✓`g Il IS I11 69f7 a� U ui of 0 PLI MT la ko 0 4it Ue-y�7 aJ fy ,, F41 IS ltiaunS RS pd Vcj __ _. 1.15 P2i ouvq 4 r• r ioq ff4Fiy yz �(`'S 10 �yylgeM — WpfV`(` 0 4�f u 0 > N � 3 � o (n ei 'a 6i� fO N � UJ U r ,> , i3 J r> z Y m a 3 O n D LN r 0 p L) W d rn f, i O 36 Dy 11111 War,) >In0 c z x$ y{ �' '•' • _ n u w pa rx eUEi �d a Z yj 4 S ❑ t 4 iS wiu6ofl 4 U,hp P� ff u � fL F i an2� a� s I' a i t< llogllE7 $° m k� Sun Owm Ridgy m w JS. S ON1 wuj c 4it Ue-y�7 aJ fy ,, F41 IS ltiaunS RS pd Vcj __ _. 1.15 P2i ouvq 4 r• r ioq ff4Fiy yz �(`'S 10 �yylgeM — WpfV`(` 0 4�f u 0 > N � 3 � o (n ei 'a 6i� fO N � UJ U r ,> , i3 J r> z Y m a 3 O n D LN r 0 p L) W d rn f, i O 36 Dy 11111 War,) >In0 c z x$ y{ �' '•' • _ n u w avo CL a ay S ❑ t U,hp P� ff u � fL F i an2� do s I' a i t< k� Sun Owm Ridgy 4it Ue-y�7 aJ fy ,, F41 IS ltiaunS RS pd Vcj __ _. 1.15 P2i ouvq 4 r• r ioq ff4Fiy yz �(`'S 10 �yylgeM — WpfV`(` 0 4�f u 0 > N � 3 � o (n ei 'a 6i� fO N � UJ U r ,> , i3 J r> z Y m a 3 O o to O o ° N m N Q W 0 F— H D O 0 m (If F Z U X pRcCOI 4 `_ f OR `3L w o a Ap....... 1 \ •, pf/L<!I SI. A 11[G0.1 tItt f:rF (,[• 1 \ ./ 6 Slu ^. Sq• p 1 ,..6R /. W U N fJ.-M1 J.fi flfP v,\ 1. -, Q J Q U) l0 z W� U O_ S O m LI_•64T GR fi ''11 - `� f.l!6.i]A9 pallorn nl'n'oi' •® � N Q n W a U Z Q o K ni Af 4 }6.32xa Z — — W - ysJ t3<5n1 larWU \ A — �f- U • ; ` f- m•6R051 m a [.L •643.e1 12 eCn E Z U K W Y (7 < m m Y Y ' 0 > m 0 W C v n U) N L }.. ;�s�..._�..f ..ifs -�1\`� '•;�, E \`s ft�¢[" (S :•`'``^ {(� 1:? ,F1 �M,,. R'rtnLAt flfi O 'X C F'.1aa,,SSyy�� \, ` @" \� 1..ti13.61 Z A O O CL X V J P- W I J r f Nr, t�•tl f1 <1 . � m n_ I� N O N O N A, O N C tN0 N N tip (M➢ tM0 N 1NL c- tg v M z m P m d a A � r1 L Z m M a: 0 C d' o N D y .M .a, Q g d a CJ m o 0 r M p UOpena13 N C O N 0] QJ G _O Q C N w C O u r crq A, a a c- LOG OF BORING NO. 1 Page 1 oft CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter Boring Location: Proposed Marina Building SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION 0 } z G z F 0 m e zrn WF zz Q. � a r z OF W 0 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 644.5 ft w 0 D z w of a0 0) m a0 3 0 �'� o a D FILL, FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, PA TRACE SILT & ORGANICS WITH CLAY 1 SS 12 10 11 PIECES. Brown and Dark Brown 3 641.5 FILL. SANDY LEAN CLAY TO CLAYEY 2 SS 14 9 14 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE TOPSOIL Gray Brown, Brown and Black 5 s ssa.s L/M 3 SS 12 7 23 '2000 SILTY CLAY. TRACE SAND PA Gray and Brown, Mottled, Medium Stiff 6 636.5 116 CL 4 ST 7 27 94 '2000 0-- PA LEAN CLAY TRACE SAN4 Gray Brown, Me lum Stiff to Stiff CL 5 ST 13 22 104 *3000 15 PA 628.5 = it FINE TO COARSE SAND, r SP 6 SS 12 8 18 TRACE SILT & GRAVEL Gray Brown, Loose to Medium Dense 20 PA .....'24 620.5 SP L/S 7 SS 16 11 15 "3000 SANDY LEAN CLAY. TRACE GRAVEL 25 fits 5 WITH OCCASIONAL SAND SEAM$ 25 Gray, Stiff BOTTOM OF BORING The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between sell and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. *'CME 140 lb. SPTaulomalic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft 1 ��rr aeon BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 WL Sz 13 WS = 7 (8118/10) BORING COMPLETED 8 -17 -10 WL Y Backfilled RIG 83E FOREMAN MW WL Exhibit A -4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06105656 LOG OF BORING NO.2 Page 1 of CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter Boring Location: Proposed Shelter SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION J C F iA z� U X Y K W Ow m D w o_ W� O Z a0 Z� 0 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 649 it w o rA D z w W M� U) m � o tt� o a nu) 6" Crushed Stone PA FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, SP 1 SS 18 15 6 TRACE SILT & ORGANICS Dark Brown, Loose to Medium Dense .: 4 sas SP 2 SS 14 8 5 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, TRACE SILT Brown, Loose 5 PA SP 3 SS 10 8 10 - '�: 6 643 FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH SILT, PA TRACE GRAVEL Brown and Gray Brown, Loose P/S 4 SS 14 7 11 • 10 V 639 10 PA ey; -; GRAVELLY FINE TO COARSE SAND, :;�; TRACE SILT, Gray Brown, o : Medium Dense SP 5 SS 12 11 12 15 PA .116 633 FINE TO COARSE SAND, TRACE SILT & GRAVEL Brown, Medium Dense SP 6 SS 10 10 14 ': • 20 `. �' .. 629 20 BOTTOM OF BORING t F t9 =Ia Z 0 U Q tt tt w The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between sdl and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. * *CME 140 lb. SPT automalic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it Irracon % BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 WS ING COMP83EEFFOREMAN 8 -1 o WL 4 Backfilled Y RIG MW o VVL Exhibit A -5 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06105656 m LOG OF BORING NO.3 Page I of 1 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION F wF W W Z Z Z M W a 0 i OW M ca Approx. Surface Elevation.: 647.5 ft W o vv D D z w rr a rn M ao 3 6 o a z� D M 12" Crushed Stone PA FILL, LEAN CLAY, TRACE SANDz SS 10 21 18 GRAVEL, CONCRETE, BRICK & s.1 k Brown PA 2 SS 6 23 16 110 FILL. CRUSHED CONCRETE, 5 TRACE CLAY, Gray PA 3 SS 8 23 25 637.5 10 BOTTOM OF BORING c: 1 i r The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soli and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140 lb. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It 1 f�rracon BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 WL 0 WS BORING COMPLETED 8 -17 -10 F ackfilled Y RIG 83E FOREMAN MW Exhibit A -6 APPROVED BKS I JOB # 06105656 LOG OF BORING NO. 4 Page I of CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter SAMPLES TESTS 7 DESCRIPTION O z Q n W m a a � w D w o. O w ?� o Lu �z ¢ Ow zr Approx. Surface Elevation.: 645 ft o (0 0 z WW as rn m ¢O 3 6 o a 5 rn FILL. FINE TO COARSE SAND PA WITH GRAVEL, TRACE SIL7 Brown 2 643 1 SS 14 10 16 PA FILL, LEAN CLAY, TRACE SAND, 2 SS 12 12 17 TOPSOIL. CONCRETE & GRAVEI, Brawn, Gray and Dark Brown 5 3E PA 8 637 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND, TRACE CL 3 SS 14 4 17 1500 ORGANICS Dark Brown, Medium Stiff 10 635 10 BOTTOM OF BORING c � C t -; The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines "Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between sdl and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. * *CME 140 lb. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It � ��rr��on BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 M -V Nione WS IT 6 (8/18!10) BORING COMPLETED 8 -17 -10 V� Y Backfilled Y RIG 83E FOREMAN MW WL I Exhibit A -7 APPROVED BKS I JOB # 06105656 LOG OF BORING NO. 5 Page 1 of 1 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION J C o W N o f W r z zz x D_ x w m > zrn rrw w r- w N D 4. O O LJ �z ¢O K� Z{ (9 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 644.5 ft o D z rr rn m 3 0 o a 0 0) FILL, SILTY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, PA 112 TRACE ORGANIC Dark Brown 1 SS 12 8 14 642.5 FILL, LEAN CLAY, TRACE SAND, PA 15.5 GRAVEL. CONCRETE & BRICK Green Gray and Gray Brown 2 SS 14 38 6 639 5 FILL. FINE TO MEDIUM SAND, PA TRACE SILT WITH CLAY PIECE$ Gray Brown and Dark Brown s 636.5 FILL CLAYEY FINE TO MEDIUM SAND 3 SS 12 4 17 110 & LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL & ORGANICS, Gray Brown, Brown and 634.5 Dark Brown 10 BOTTOM OF BORING t_� c ci i r') c 0 0 z 0 U Q tt tt w The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between sol and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. " "CME 140 lb. SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, It BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 s None WS Y Irerracon COMPLETED 8-17-10 8 1 o Backfilled BORING MW 0 WL Exhibit A -8 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06105656 m LOG OF BORING NO. 6 Page 1 of 1 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates City of Iowa City SITE Terry Trueblood Recreation Area PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Marina Building & Shelter SAMPLES TESTS O ° DESCRIPTION O n z= U C N W w r z Z Z� = i m > zrn wH z ow W w co D a w O a� �z QO L- 0 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 654 it 0 n z af Co m 3 0 0 K rn PA 1 SS 12 9 18 FILL SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, ROOTLETS & TOPSOII PA Brown, Gray Brown, Gray and Dark Brown 2 SS 10 10 19 5 PA 8 V 646 SILTY CLAY, TRACE SANK UM 3 SS 14 8 26 *1500 Brown Gray, Medium Stiff 10 644 10 BOTTOM OF BORING e� r t�7 e- "c 0 0 z 0 u a The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in -situ, the transition may be gradual. "'CME 140 lb, SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it 1 ferraeon BORING STARTED 8 -17 -10 WL -V None WS Y 8 BORIN COMP83EEFFOREMAN 8-17-10 V�'L ? Backfilled (8/18/10) RIG MW VVL Exhibit A -9 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06105656 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1��P��, Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area e Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 a Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Field Exploration Description Our field exploration consisted of performing six (6) soil borings at the project site. The borings were extended to depths of about 10 to 25 feet below the existing grades. The boring locations were selected by Terracon and laid out in the field by Snyder & Associate personnel. The approximate boring locations are indicated on the attached Boring Location Diagram. The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were also provided by Snyder & Associates personnel; however, the elevations on the boring logs have been rounded to the nearest 1/] foot. The locations and elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. The borings were drilled with an ATV- mounted, rotary drilling rig using continuous flight, solid - stemmed augers to advance the boreholes. Samples were obtained using either thin - walled tube or split- barrel sampling procedures. In the thin - walled tube sampling procedure, a thin - walled tube or seamless steel tube with a sharp cutting edge is pushed hydraulically into the ground to obtain relatively undisturbed samples of cohesive or moderately cohesive soils. In the split - barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2 -inch O.D. split - barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140 -pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. A CME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split - barrel sampler in the borings performed for this project. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18- inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the boring logs at the corresponding depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and returned to the laboratory for testing and classification. Field logs of the borings were prepared by the drill crew. Each log included visual classification of the materials encountered during drilling as well as the driller's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. The boring logs included with this report represent an interpretation of the field logs by a geotechnical engineer and include modifications based on laboratory observation and tests on select samples. Exhibit A -10 6, v� c> Exhibit A -10 APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING } N (J Geotechnical Engineering Report �� Marina Building & Shelter — Trueblood Recreation Area n Iowa City, Iowa August 25, 2010 ® Terracon Project No. 06105656.01 Laboratory Testing Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their natural water contents. Dry unit weight measurements were performed on portions of intact thin - walled tube samples. A hand penetrometer was used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of some cohesive samples. The hand penetrometer provides a better estimate of soil consistency than visual examination alone. The results of the laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent to the soil profiles, at their corresponding sample depths. As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in the laboratory based on visual observation, texture, plasticity, and the limited laboratory testing described above. Additional testing could be performed to more accurately classify the samples. Portions of the recovered samples were placed in jars, and the samples will be retained for at least 1 month in case additional testing is requested. The soil descriptions presented on the boring logs for native soils are in accordance with our enclosed General Notes and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The estimated group symbol for the USCS is also shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is attached to this report. Exhibit B -1 APPENDIX C SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS The number of blows required to advance a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -spoon sampler (SS) the last 12 inches of the total 18 -inch penetration with a 140 -pound hammer falling 30 inches Is considered the "Standard Penetration" or "N- value . WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL: Water Level WS: While Sampling N /E: Not Encountered WCI: Wet Cave in WD: While Drilling DCI: Dry Cave in BCR: Before Casing Removal AB: After Boring ACR: After Casing Removal -) Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times Indicated. ,Groundwater levels at other times and other locations across the site could vary. In pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the localiph,of groundwater. In low permeability solls, the accurate determination of groundwater levels may not be possible with only short-term observatlor'ls. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Soil classification is based on the Unified Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils'have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as:cfays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non - plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse - grained soils are defined on the basis of their in -place relative density and fine - grained soils on the basis of their consistency. CONSISTENCY OF FINE - GRAINED SOILS GENERAL NOTES Standard Penetration DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: Compressive SS: Split Spoon —1 ' /e" I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted HS: Hollow Stem Auger ST: Thin - Walled Tube - 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted PA: Power Auger RS: Ring Sampler- 2.42" I.D., 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted HA: Hand Auger DB: Diamond Bit Coring - 4 ", N, B RB: Rock Blt BS: Bulk Sample or Auger Sample WB: Wash Boring or Mud Rotary The number of blows required to advance a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -spoon sampler (SS) the last 12 inches of the total 18 -inch penetration with a 140 -pound hammer falling 30 inches Is considered the "Standard Penetration" or "N- value . WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL: Water Level WS: While Sampling N /E: Not Encountered WCI: Wet Cave in WD: While Drilling DCI: Dry Cave in BCR: Before Casing Removal AB: After Boring ACR: After Casing Removal -) Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times Indicated. ,Groundwater levels at other times and other locations across the site could vary. In pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the localiph,of groundwater. In low permeability solls, the accurate determination of groundwater levels may not be possible with only short-term observatlor'ls. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Soil classification is based on the Unified Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils'have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as:cfays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non - plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse - grained soils are defined on the basis of their in -place relative density and fine - grained soils on the basis of their consistency. CONSISTENCY OF FINE - GRAINED SOILS Unconfined Standard Penetration Dry Weight Compressive or N -value (SS) Consistency Strength, Qu, Ps f Blows /Ft. > 30 < 500 <2 Very Soft 500-1,000 2 -3 Soft 1,001 —2,000 4 -6 Medium Stiff 2,001 —4,000 7 -12 Stiff 4,001 — 8,000 13 -26 Very Stiff 8,000+ 26+ Hard RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL Descriptive Term(s) of other Percent of Constituents Dry Weight Trace < 15 With 15-29 Modifier > 30 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES Descriptive Term(s) of other Percent of Constituents Dry Weight Trace < 5 With 5-12 Modifiers > 12 RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE - GRAINED SOILS Standard Penetration Ring Sampler (RS) Term or N -value (SS) Relative Density Blows /Ft. glows /Ft. Low 0-3 0 -6 Very Loose 4 -9 7 -18 Loose 10 -29 19 -58 Medium Dense 30 -49 59 -98 Dense 50+ 99+ Very Dense GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY Major Component Particle Size of Sample Boulders Over 12 in. (300mm) Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. (300mm to 75 mm) Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75 mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve (4.75mm to 0.075mm) Silt or Clay Passing #200 Sieve (0.075mm) PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Plasticity Term Index Non - plastic 0 Low 1 -10 Medium 11 -30 High 30+ Exhibit C -1 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark " Based on the material passing the 3 -in. (75 -mm) sieve a If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. ` Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW -GM well - graded gravel with silt, GW -GC well - graded gravel with clay, GP -GM poorly graded gravel with slit, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW -SM well - graded sand with sill, SW -SC well - graded sand with clay, SP -SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP -SC poorly graded sand with clay E Cu= DcdDre Cc= (Dj Dro x D, F If soil Contains> 16% sand, add "with sand" to group name. G If fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC -GM, or SC -SM. Gravels: Clean Gravels: Cu > 4 and 1 <- Cc 5 3' SP More than 50% of Less then 5% fines' Cu<4 and/or 1>CC>3e Coarse Grained Soils: More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve coarse fraction retained on No sieve Gravels with Fines: More than 12 % fines ` Fines classify as ML or MH Fines classify as CL or CH Sands: 50% or more of coarse Clean Sands: Cu> 6 and 1 <Cc < 3e Less than 5% fines ° Cu < 6 and /or i > Cc > 3 E of coarse - grained soils .. fraction passes Sands with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH CH No. 4 sieve More than 12% fines ° I Fines Classify as CL or CH d Silts and Clays: Inorganic: -PI > 7 and plots on or above ,A" Ilne' PI <4 or plots below "A" line Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried < 0.75 Fine-Grained Soils: 50% or more passes the No. 200 sieve Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit - not dried Silts and Clays: Inorganic: PI plots an or above "A' line PI plots below'A' Iine Organic: Liquid limit - oven dried r-- - <0.75 30 Liquid limit 50 or more Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark " Based on the material passing the 3 -in. (75 -mm) sieve a If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. ` Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW -GM well - graded gravel with silt, GW -GC well - graded gravel with clay, GP -GM poorly graded gravel with slit, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW -SM well - graded sand with sill, SW -SC well - graded sand with clay, SP -SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP -SC poorly graded sand with clay E Cu= DcdDre Cc= (Dj Dro x D, F If soil Contains> 16% sand, add "with sand" to group name. G If fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC -GM, or SC -SM. Soil Classification Group Group Namea iymbol GW Well -waded gravel' GC Clayey gravel"° 60 Well - graded sand' SP Poorly graded sand' SM For classification of fine- grained I SC Clayey sand 0"' CL soils and fine- grained fraction ML Silt"'`"" 5u0 of coarse - grained soils .. OL Organic sill "'`� o Fat clay "'4'" -- - - - -- CH Equation of •A° - line - d OH Horizontal at PI =4 to LL =25.5. 40 then PI =0.73 (LL -20) ❑ Equation at'U' - Fine Vertical at LL =16 to PI =7. ( } 30 then Pi =0.9 (LL-8) - -- i' - -- O\ Ur 'g zo,. - - - - -pj °4 0 o c a i Soil Classification Group Group Namea iymbol GW Well -waded gravel' GC Clayey gravel"° SW Well - graded sand' SP Poorly graded sand' SM Silly sands "' I SC Clayey sand 0"' CL Lean clay"'` ML Silt"'`"" Organic clay"'`'"'" OL Organic sill "'`� o Fat clay "'4'" -- - - - -- CH IM Elastic Silt" -- Organic clay K,L,M,P OH color, and organic odor PT I Peal " If fines are organic, add "with organic fines' to group name. ' If soil contains > 15% gravel, add 'with gravel' to group name. ' If Atterberg limits plot In shaded area, soil Is a CL -ML, slily clay. x If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add'wilh sand" or "with gravel," whichever is predominant. ` If soil contains> 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy to group name. " If soil Contains 2: 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly to group name. " PI z 4 and plots on or above "A' line. ° PI <4 or plots below'A" line. P PI plots on or above 'A' line. ° PI plots below "A' line. 01\\ MH ••P Vice - hoc , MH or OH 4r - -LL -° ML orOL a LI I- -- — — 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 LIQUID LIMIT (LL) 90 100 110 Exhibit C -2 APPENDIX B NPDES CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN FOR TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA PHASE 2 IMPROVEMETNS City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa Project No. 110.0630 NPDES Permit Discharge Authorization Number: IA September 2, 2010 c9 �n r? Prepared by: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Ankeny, Iowa 50023 319 - 362 -9394 IMPORTANT NOTICE This Pollution Prevention Plan shall be retained on the construction site from the date the construction activities begin to the date of final stabilization. In addition, all contractors shall be supplied with a copy of the pollution prevention plan. It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that these requirements are met. J:\2010_projects \110. 0630 \Correspondence \Specs \9 -2 -10 Submittal \SWPPP \14a_SWPPP.doe a c9 �n r? Prepared by: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Ankeny, Iowa 50023 319 - 362 -9394 IMPORTANT NOTICE This Pollution Prevention Plan shall be retained on the construction site from the date the construction activities begin to the date of final stabilization. In addition, all contractors shall be supplied with a copy of the pollution prevention plan. It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that these requirements are met. J:\2010_projects \110. 0630 \Correspondence \Specs \9 -2 -10 Submittal \SWPPP \14a_SWPPP.doe Table of Contents PART 1 SITE DESCRIPTION PART 2 CONTROLS PART 3 CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION PART 4 FINAL STABILIZATION / DISCONTINUATION PART 5 CERTIFICATION APPENDIX A NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 APPENDIX B CHECKLISTS APPENDIX C INSPECTION REPORTS N O a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 SITE DESCRIPTION Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 SITE INFORMATION: Project Name TERRY TRUEBLOOD REC. AREA PH.2 IMPROVEMENTS Project Location NW 1/4 Sec 27, T79N, R6W (address, lat. /long. or Section -T -R) City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa Owner Name City of Iowa City Representative 410 E. Washington Street Owner Address /Phone Iowa City, Iowa 52240 319 - 356 -5010 ° Site Area 10.0 Acres Disturbed Area 160.0 Acres Final Runoff 0.55 Coefficient Soil type / Loamy fine sand w/ moderate susceptibility to sheet & rili- characteristics erosion (perNRCS Soil Survey of Johnson Co., Iowa) Runoff discharged to the Iowa River from Sand Lake via Receiving Waters public storm sewer. Description Project consists of recreation area development with (purpose and types of soil associated grading and paving. disturbing activities) Soil disturbing activities include clearing and grubbing, stabilized construction entrance, site grading, storm sewer and utilities installation, building foundations, private parking lot paving. Expected Sequence of 1. Install stabilized construction entrance, staging area Major Construction controls & perimeter silt barrier Activities 2. Clear and grub for detention /sediment basin installation (subject to change; any 3. Construct initial detention /sediment basin deviations shall be noted on 4. Clear and grub for earthwork operations this plan) 5. Continue grading operations beginning with topsoil stockpiling (interior silt barrier installation) 6. Stabilize denuded areas and stockpiles within 14 days of last construction activity in that area 7. Install utilities & storm sewer 8, Install curb & gutter, paving 9. Backfill / finish grading 10. Temporary seeding / stabilization 11. Building construction 12. Permanent seeding /stabilization 13. Final completion, removal of temporary erosion control measures Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 PART 2 CONTROLS Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 A. Erosion and Sediment Controls Measures to be used for controlling erosion and sediment throughout the construction project. Includes stabilization measures for limiting soil erosion from disturbed areas and structural controls to divert runoff and remove sediment. Contractor /subcontractor is responsible for the implementation and management of control measures specific to this site. As work progresses, field investigation may indicate additional erosion control measures may be required as determined by the contractor, owner, engineer, city or other governmentally regulated agencies. Stabilization a. Preserve existing vegetation in areas not disturbed during construction b. The total area of soil disturbed by construction operations at ahi lime shall be held to a minimum. c. Soil Compaction — compaction of soils in areas to be seoded orc 3 sodded will be kept to a minimum to increase infiltration of storm . l runoff into the groundwater, reducing the amount of runoff. d. Temporary Stabilization - areas where construction activitys'not' planned to occur for at least 21 days will be stabilized within 14 days of ceasing construction activities in that area by one or more of the following temporary erosion control measures. • Topsoil stockpiles and disturbed portions of the site will be stabilized with temporary seed and mulch. • Areas of the site to be paved will be temporarily stabilized with geotextile and stone sub -base until pavement can be installed. • Frequent watering during construction in dry weather shall minimize wind erosion from exposed soil. e. Permanent Stabilization - areas where construction activity has permanently ended will be stabilized within 14 days of ceasing construction activities in that area by one or more of the following permanent erosion control measures. • Sodding or permanent seeding /mulch and mulch in all unpaved areas where final grading is complete. • Permanently seed drainage swales and install erosion control matting where required immediately upon reaching final grades to decrease erosion and facilitate sediment deposition in surface runoff. Vegetative buffer strips • Vegetation strip will be planted along the downstream boundary of the site to increase infiltration and sediment deposition by reducing runoff velocity. Protection of Trees and Natural Vegetation • Undisturbed areas will utilize existing vegetation as a natural buffer zone to increase infiltration and sediment deposition by reducing runoff velocity. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 h. Dust control • Mulch or surface watering will be utilized to control wind erosion of susceptible soils during and /or immediately after mass site grading operations. Outlet Stabilization • Rock / riprap and engineering fabric installed at storm sewer outlets to prevent erosion. 2. Structural Controls a. At all areas where runoff can move offsite, silt fence or approved equal will be installed along the perimeter of the project downstream of soil disturbing activities and storm water discharge points prior to site clearing and grading operations as required and /or shown on the plans. b. Temporary sediment basins are provided at the rate of 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre for disturbed areas over 10 acres. If not attainable, a combination of silt fences, multiple sediment traps, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all side slopes and downslope boundaries of the disturbed area. c. Silt fence, sediment traps or equivalent measures for all side slopes and downslope boundaries of the disturbed area provided for disturbed areas of 10 acres or less. d. Silt barrier enclosures will be installed around all area intakes and flared end section inlets to protect storm sewers from sediment immediately after construction of inlet. e. All storm water street intakes will be protected from silt with Type I inlet filters or equivalent sediment protection measures after paving. f. Silt fence, temporary silt basins, earthen dikes and ditch checks will be installed along concentrated drainageways to control flow velocity and encourage sediment deposition. c , g. Storm water detention /retention facilities will retain flows and act as �`. temporary sediment basin with the installation of a temporary outlet riser. • Installed prior to commencing upstream grading operations and a storm sewer installation. ".- vi " h. Curb & gutter will divert storm water once installed. i. Drainage swales • Permanently seeded immediately upon reaching final grade to facilitate sediment deposition in surface runoff. • Convey runoff to sediment basins /acceptable outlet. • Used in conjunction with sediment traps, ditch checks, or other control measures to trap sediment. j. Surface roughening k. Additional erosion control measures may be required on embankments, stockpiles and other areas to ensure runoff control. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 B. Other Controls Measures for controlling other sources of potential pollution that may exist on the construction site. During the course of construction, it is possible that situations may arise where unknown materials will be encountered. When such situations occur, they will be handled according to all applicable federal, state, and local regulations in effect at the time. Waste materials a. Disposal of unused construction materials and construction material wastes shall comply with applicable state and local waste disposal, sanitary sewer, or septic system regulations. In the event of a conflict with other governmental laws, rules and regulations, the more restrictive laws, rules or regulations shall apply. 2. Hazardous waste a. Hazardous waste materials will be disposed of in accordance with applicable local, State, and /or Federal regulations. b. Equipment refueling and maintenance operations will be carried out in such a manner so as to prevent any spills and contamination to the soil and groundwater. c. Potentially hazardous materials will be used with great care to prevent spillage in any volume. ?, 3. Sanitary waste A portable restroom facility may be located onsite at the contractor's discretion. Wastes will be collected and disposed of in complete' compliance with local, state and federal regulations. This facility will' be located in an area where contact with the storm water discharge is minimal. 4. Vehicle tracking a. Stabilized construction entrances and /or vehicle washing racks will be installed at all site access points to reduce vehicle tracking of sediment offsite. b. Paved streets adjacent to the site will be inspected daily and cleaned as necessary to remove any excess mud, dirt or rock tracked from the site. c. Dump trucks hauling material from the site will be properly covered with a tarpaulin. d. Dust control measures will be utilized as necessary. Non -storm water discharges a. Expected sources of non -storm water discharges from the site during construction may include: • Potable water sources including water line flushings, irrigation drainage and fire fighting activities. • Pavement/building wash waters where no spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have occurred and excluding Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 detergents. • Uncontaminated groundwater from de- watering excavation. • Natural springs, wetland, water sources. • Foundation or footing drains where flows have not been exposed to solvents. Non -storm water discharges will be directed to the sediment basin or other appropriate control measure prior to discharging off -site. C. Storm Water Management Post - construction storm water drainage will be facilitated by curb and gutter, storm sewer, intake structures, and established drainage swales for the developed areas. Runoff will be directed to onsite storm water management controls and /or the City of Iowa City public storm sewer /drainage ditch. Measures implemented to control pollution of storm water after construction is complete include the following: Open channels a. Vegetated Swales and natural depressions will reduce storm water runoff by increasing infiltration and increase sedimentation by reducing runoff velocity. b. Riprap placed as channel lining in high -flow drainage ditches to prevent erosion and increase sedimentation by reducing runoff velocity. c. Permanent erosion control or turf reinforcement mats will be placed in drainage swales to prevent erosion. d. Concrete drainage flumes installed at channel flowlines to reduce erosion of channel in small storm events. Undeveloped areas will be graded at the slopes indicated and have permanent seeding and /or landscaping designed to reduce runoff velocities and increase infiltration. 3. Approximately 150.0 acres of the site will remain undisturbed and in its original vegetative state, limiting the amount of exposed soil and providing a continuous vegetation buffer zone that will reduce runoff velocities and increase infiltration. 4. Outlets of all storm sewer systems and culverts will be stabilized with riprap aprons underlain by engineering fabric or non -rock outlet protection .measures to dissipate flow velocities and prevent erosion. 1, t ^ Cl) f "` a -t < ; • _• cn •c-3 n 0 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2Improvements — 110.0630 CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 A. State and Local Requirements The storm water pollution prevention plan reflects the State of Iowa requirements for storm water management and erosion and sediment control, as established in 161A.64 Code of Iowa, State of Iowa Statutory Requirements Pertaining to Erosion Control Plans. 2. Prior to initiating a land disturbing activity, a person engaged in land disturbing activity shall file a signed affidavit with the soil and water conservation district that the project will not exceed the soil loss limits. 3. All work shall be done in accordance with Division 9 of the latest edition of the Statewide Urban Standard Specifications (SODAS). Code Compliance: The contractor shall comply with the soil erosion control requirements of the Iowa Code, the Iowa DNR NPDES permit and all local ordinances. B. Timing of Controls /Measures 1. Install down -slope and side -slope perimeter silt fence prior to commencing land- disturbing activity. '. 2. Install construction entrance and vehicle tracking controls. 3. Construct temporary sediment basins or detention basin as sediment' basin, and route all runoff from disturbed areas to the basin and /or erosion control; ; measures at storm water discharge points — sediment traps /basins, riptap channel lining, erosion control mat. 4. Do not disturb an area until necessary for construction to proceed. 5. Install interior silt fences, earthen dikes, sediment traps, etc. as grading progresses. 6. Cover or stabilize disturbed areas and stockpiles as soon as possible and no later than 14 days after ceasing construction for more than 21 days or permanently. 7. Place Swale control measures (erosion control mats, silt traps, ditch checks, seed & mulch) in drainageways as soon as final grades are achieved and before storm sewer is installed where possible. 8. Construct outlet stabilization measures at storm outlets and place silt barriers at storm sewer inlets immediately after storm sewer is installed. 9. As areas reach their final grade, provide additional silt fence, sediment traps, earthen dikes, ditch checks or filter sock as necessary. 10. Complete permanent stabilization seeding /mulch or sod stabilization as soon as possible after work is complete in an area. 11. Remove temporary sediment controls and accumulated sediment once entire site is stabilized. Re- seed /mulch any areas disturbed during removal. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 r PROJECTED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE / CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS: PHASE A – GRADING Anticipated Start -End November 2010/ May 2011 Initial control measure installation sediment basin, construction entrance, perimeter silt fence Operator Responsible Operator 4FResponsible Anticipated Start Date Nov 2010 Anticipated End Date Nov 2010 Actual Start Date Anticipated End Date Actual End Date Initial Grading Operations clearin / rubbin , topsoil stripping/stockpiling/stabilization) Operator Responsible Operator 4FResponsible Anticipated Start Date Apr 2011 Anticipated End Date Apr 2011 Actual Start Date Anticipated End Date Actual End Date Major Grading Operations (mass grading, sediment/detention basins, pond, interior silt barrier, temporary stabilization Operator Responsible Operator 4FResponsible Anticipated Start Date Apr 2011 Anticipated End Date May 2011 Actual Start Date Anticipated End Date Actual End Date PHASE B – UNDERGROUND UTILITIES Anticipated Start -End May 2011/ June 2011 — C Se -iverllNater installation sanitar':sewer, water main Operator 4FResponsible Anticipated Start Date I Anticipated End Date An! ipatedStart Date May 2011 Anticipated End Date May 2011 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Storm System storm sewer /structures, culverts, outlet structures Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date May 2011 Anticipated End Date June 2011 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 PHASE C — PAVING / FINE GRADING Anticipated Start -End June 2011/ July 2011 Paving (sub grade prep, curb & gutter, street, sidewalk, drive, parking lot paving) Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing utility companies working on the site Anticipated Start Date June 2011 Anticipated End Date June 2011 Actual Start Date I Actual End Date Franchise Utilities electric, gas, telephone, cable, Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing utility companies working on the site Anticipated Start Date June 2011 Anticipated End Date July 2011 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Finish Grading backfill, finish radin , temporary seed stabilization Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing any individual lot ownership transfers Anticipated Start Date July 2011 Anticipated End Date July 2011; -_. Actual Start Date Actual End Date PHASE D— BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Anticipated Start -End I June 2011/ August 2011 Building Construction basement excavation, uilding construction, driveway paving, sod stabilization Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing any individual lot ownership transfers Anticipated Start Date June 2011 Anticipated End Date Aug 2011 Actual Start Date Actual End Date PHASE E — FINAL STABILIZATION Anticipated Start -End August 2011/ October 2011 Permanent Stabilization final seeding / sod stabilization, temporary erosion control measure removal Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date Aug 2011 Anticipated End Date Oct 2011 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 C. Inspection & Maintenance 1. All documents related to the storm water discharge permit shall be kept on site at all times and must be presented to the Iowa DNR or EPA upon request. Including but not limited to the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Notice of Intent, Proof of Publication, and project inspection diary. The contractor will be responsible for selecting a "qualified" inspector to conduct the inspections. "Qualified" is defined as a person knowledgeable in the principles an practices of erosion and sediment controls who possesses the skills to assess conditions at the construction site that could impact storm water quality and to assess the effectiveness of any sediment and erosion control measures selected to control the quality of storm water discharges from the construction activity. 3. The project area and control devices will be inspected by personnel assigned by the contractor every seven calendar days and within 24 hours after each rain event of 1/2" or greater or heavy snow melt. The findings and any actions taken as a result of this inspection shall be recorded in the project diary with a copy submitted weekly to the owner or owner's representative during the project. a. Inspect silt fence for depth of sediment, tears, fabric securely attached to posts and posts firmly in the ground. b. Inspect sediment basins for depth of sediment. c. Inspect diversion dikes for any breaches. d. Inspect seeding for bare spots, washouts and healthy growth. 4. This pollution prevention plan shall be revised as construction progresses to reflect current ownership, responsibilities, operations and findings. .t a. The plan will be revised due to any deficiencies in the plan or changes in conditions noted during an inspection and the contractor will implement any and all revisions as soon as practical but no later than 7 �,;-- days after the inspection. _ :b. Maintain record of major construction operations start and ending " dates and operators responsible for the various phases. '.:c; The plan will be modified within 14 calendar days of a hazardous condition, describing the release, the date of release and the circumstances leading to the release. Steps to prevent the reoccurrence of such releases will be identified in a plan revision and implemented. 5. Maintain all temporary and permanent erosion control measures in good working order by cleaning, repairing, replacement and sediment removal throughout the permit period. Any necessary repairs will be initiated within 24 hours of report. a. Built up sediment will be removed from silt barrier or the silt barrier replaced when it has reached 1/2 the height of the barrier. b. Built up sediment will be removed from sediment basins when it reaches 25% of the design capacity or at the end of the project. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 c. Accumulation of earth, silt or debris on adjoining properties or streets will be minimized. Remove any accumulation of earth, silt or debris immediately and take remedial actions for prevention. d. Minor spills of potentially hazardous materials will be cleaned up by removing and disposing of contaminate soils properly. Major spills shall be reported in accordance with 4556.386 Code of Iowa with clean up procedures dependant on the severity of the spill. 6. Hazardous substance spill prevention and response a. The contractor is responsible for training all personnel in the proper handling and cleanup of spilled materials. No spilled hazardous materials or wastes will be allowed to come into contact with storm water discharges. If contact does occur, the storm water discharge will be contained on site until appropriate measures in compliance with all Federal, State, and local regulations are followed to dispose of the hazardous substance. b. In addition to Good Housekeeping and material management practices, the following practices shall be done to minimize the potential for hazardous material spills and to reduce the risk of the spill coming in contact with storm water. • Manufacturer's recommended methods for spill cleanup will be clearly posted and site personnel will be trained regarding these procedures and the location of the information and, cleanV supplies. • Materials and equipment necessary for spill control,. - containment and cleanup will be provided onsite ina material " storage area. Equipment and materials will include but not be limited to brooms, dust pans, mops, rags, gloves, goggles „kitty , litter, sand, sawdust, and plastic and metal trash container. c. In the event of a spill, the following procedures will be followed: • All spills will be cleaned up immediately following discovery. • The spill area will be kept well ventilated and personnel will wear appropriate protective clothing to prevent injury from contact with the hazardous substance. • Spill of toxic or hazardous material will be reported to the appropriate state or local governmental agency and to the project manager and engineer, regardless of the size of the spill. d. In the event the construction site has a release of a hazardous substance or oil in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined at 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, or 40 CFR Part 302 then the permittee shall: • Person in charge of the site at the time of the spill shall call the EPA National Response Center to report the spill (800 -424- 8802, or 202 - 426- 2675). • Modify the Pollution Prevention Plan accordingly within 14 days of the spill including the items mentioned below. • Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release including: a description of the release, type of material, estimated amount of spill, date of release, explanation of why Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 the spill happened, and a description of the steps taken to prevent and control future releases. D. Materials Management Site sources of pollution generated as a result of this work related to silts and sediment which may be transported as a result of a storm event. However, this SWPPP provides conveyance for other (non - project related) operations. These other operations have storm water runoff, the regulation of which is beyond the control of this SWPPP. 1. Materials or substances expected to be present onsite during construction: a. Concrete b. Detergents c. Paints d. Tar e. Soil stabilization additives f. Fertilizers g. Petroleum based additives h. Cleaning solvents L Wood j. Solids and construction wastes 2. Material Management Practices — the following is a list of practices that will be used onsite to minimize the risk of spills or other accidental exposure of materials and substances to storm water runoff. a. Good Housekeeping • An effort will be made to store onsite only enough products required to complete the job. • All materials stored onsite will be kept in a neat, orderly manner and in their appropriate containers. If possible, products shall be kept under a roof or other enclosure. C;, • Materials will be kept in their original containers with the original C manufacturer's label. • Substances will not be mixed with one another unless recommended by the manufacturer. Whenever possible, all of a product will be used up before disposing of the container. • Manufacturer's recommendations for proper use and disposal will be followed. • The job site superintendent will be responsible for daily inspections to ensure proper use and disposal of materials. b. Hazardous Products • Products will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer's label. • The original labels and material safety data will be kept for each of the materials as they contain important product information. • Disposal of any excess product will be done in a manner that Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 follows all manufacturers', federal, local and state recommended methods for proper disposal. 3. Product Specific Practices — the following is a list of potential sources of pollution and specific practices to reduce pollutant discharges from materials or sources expected to be present during construction. a. Petroleum Storage Tanks • All onsite vehicles shall be inspected and monitored for leaks and receive preventative maintenance to reduce the chance of leakage. • Steps will be taken by the contractor to eliminate contaminants from storage tanks form entering ground soil. Any petroleum storage tanks kept onsite will be located with an impervious surface between the tank and the ground. b. Fertilizers — shall be applied in minimal amounts as recommended by the manufacturer. It shall be worked into the soil as to minimize the contact with storm water discharge. c. Paints, paint solvents and cleaning solvents — Excess paints and solvents shall not be discharged into the storm sewer system. The contractor shall refer to the manufacturer's instructions and federal regulations on the proper disposal techniques. d. Concrete wastes • Concrete trucks will be allowed to washout or discharge excess concrete only in specifically designated areas which have been prepared to minimize contact between the concrete and storm water discharge from the site. • The hardened product from the concrete washout areas will be disposed of as other non - hazardous waste materials or may be broken up and used on the site for other appropriate uses. e. Solid and construction wastes — All trash and construction debris shall be deposited into a dumpster that will be emptied as necessary. No construction waste materials will be buried on site. The dumpsters must be put in a location where the contact with storm water discharge is minimized. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 Fg—,TZVK, 1 3 wki_"-1r_�oJAMEGI ruMK•1LIrriki m_ %INN Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Teat' Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 m r Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Teat' Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 A. Final Stabilization / Discontinuation The storm water discharge from a construction activity is no longer considered to be a discharge subject to the storm water permit requirements when final stabilization has been reached and temporary erosion and sediment controls have been or will be removed. A permittee must submit a Notice of Discontinuation (NOD) to inform the IDNR that storm water discharge from the site will no longer need to be covered by the general permit. "Final Stabilization" — the point at which all soil disturbing activities are complete, and a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% of the cover for unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures has been established or equivalent permanent stabilization measures have been employed. 3. Notice of Discontinuation should be mailed to the following address: Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources 502 E. 9th Street Des Moines, Iowa 50319 -0034 4. All plans, inspection reports and other related documents must be retained for a period of three years after project completion. The contractor shall retain a record copy and provide the original documents to the owner upon issuance of the NOD. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION OF A STORM WATER DISCHARGE COVERED UNDER IOWA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Name of the owner or facility to which the storm water discharge general permit coverage was issued List the complete permit authorization number for the discharge. This number is provided on the bottom of the authorization sheet. IA - List the date the construction site reached final stabilization. The following certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements of the general permit (see back side). I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified facility have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time. I understand that by submitting this Notice of Discontinuation, I am no longer authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities by Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 and that discharging pollutants from storm water associated with industrial activity to waters of the United States is unlawful under the Clean Water Act where the discharge is not authorized by an NPDES permit. I further certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for known violations. Return to: (print) Storm Water Coordinator Department of Natural Resources 502 E. 9th Street Des Moines, IA 50319 -0034 (over) Title w Final Stabilization means that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% for the area has been established or equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS All Notices of Intent, storm water pollution prevention plans, reports, certifications or information either submitted to the Department or the operator of a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system, or that this permit requires be maintained by the permittee, shall be signed in accordance with rule 567 -- 64.3(8) of the Iowa Administrative Code as follows: 64.3(8) Identity of signatories of operation permit applications. The person who signs the application for an operation permit shall be: a. Corporations. In the case of corporations, a principal executive officer of at least the level of vice - president. b. Partnerships. In the case off a partnership, a general partner. C. Sole proprietorships. In the case of a sole proprietorship, the proprietor. d. , Public facilities. In the case of a municipal, state, or other public facility, by either the principal executive officer, or the ranking elected official. e. Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction activity. In the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction as identified in 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)(.x), either the owner of the site or the general contractor. .- C. E c i `c -i PART 5 CERTIFICATION Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Certification This project is subject to section 402(b) of the Clean Water Act and IAC 455 B.174 Subrule 567 -64.4 (projects disturbing one or more total acres) and requires inclusion in the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) General Permit No. 2 or individual NPDES Permit for storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities. The Contractor shall perform all pollution prevention measures as identified in the plans and specifications. A copy of the storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP) must be kept at the construction site from the time construction begins until the site has reached final stabilization. 2. The owner and prime contractor must sign the following certification statements. By doing so, the prime contractor becomes co- permittee with the owner and other co- permittee contractors. The prime contractor must identify which contracting entity will be responsible for each portion of the pollution prevention plan and maintain the site in compliance with the plan and NPDES Permit. The certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements found in the general permit; i.e., principal executive officer, vice president, general partner, proprietor, elector official, and will be incorporated into the pollution prevention plan. 3. All subcontractors, including short -term contractors and subcontractors must sign the appropriate certification statement before conducting any work at the site. The certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements found in the general permit; i.e., principal executive officer, vice president, general partner, proprietor, elector official, and will be incorporated into the pollution prevention plan. Upon signing the certification, the contractor or subcontractor becomes a co- permittee with the owner and other co- permittee contractors. In signing the plan, the authorized representative certifies that the information is true and assumes liability for the plan and its implementation. Note that Section 309 of the Clean Water Act provides for significant penalties where information is false or the permittee violates, either knowingly or negligently, the permit requirements. Storm water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN CERTIFICATION (Owner certification) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project Location Phone (address, ]at./long., Sec. -T -R) NE 1A Section 27, T79N, R6W Representative City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities' at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Owner City of Iowa City Address 410 E. Washington Street Phone Iowa City, Iowa 52240 319 - 356 -5010 Representative Title Signature Date I Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 I a; i At c.5 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project Location (address, lat. /long., Sec. -T -R) NE' /a Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub - contractor Responsible for Address Phone j Representative Title c: y Signature Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area —Phase 2 Improvements Project Location Respohslble for (address, lat. /long., Sec: T -R) NE'/ Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub - contractor Respohslble for _AC dress,,; Phone RepresehWive ' Title , Signature Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with NO authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project Location Phone (address, lat. /long., Sec: T -R) NE' /a Section 27, T79N, R6W Signature City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub - contractor Responsible for Address Phone Representative Title Signature Date n, r�> Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 r�> Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with NO authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area —Phase 2 Improvements Project Location Phone (address, laUlong., Sec. -T -R) NE' /a Section 27, T79N, R6W Signature City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System ( NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub - contractor Responsible for Address Phone Representative Title Signature Date f s, t _c k�? <r� Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX A NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 i:u s 3 u �aJ Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT .................................................. ..............................1 A. PERMIT AREA .................................................................................................. ..............................1 B. ELIGIBILITY ...................................................................................................... ..............................1 C. REQUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT ............................................................... ..............................1 D. AUTHORIZATION .............................................................................................. ..............................2 PART II. NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI) REQUIREMENTS ............................... ..............................2 A. DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF INTENT ............................................ ................... ..........2 B. FAILURE TO NOTIFY .............................................. ............................... ......... .1.;.. ...3... C. CONTENTS OF THE NOTICE OF INTENT ..................... D. WHERE TO SUBMIT ............................................................................ ....................•.......... ............4 +-:: E. RENOTIFICATION ............................................................................... .................. .............. i.............4 F. TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT ................................................. J 9.........0 2........4 G. NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION ....................................................................... ..............................4 PART III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, MANAGEMENT PRACTICES, AND OTHER NON- NUMERIC LIMITATIONS .................................................. . .......... I..................... A. PROHIBITION ON NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES ..... ............................... B. RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES .. ............................... ................... 5 ................... 5 .................1.5 PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS ................. ..............................5 A. DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PREPARATION AND COMPLIANCE .................5 B. SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW ....................................................................... ..............................5 C. KEEPING PLANS CURRENT ............................................................................. ..............................6 D. CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN ...................................... ..............................6 PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS .............................................................. .............................10 PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS .............................................. .............................10 A. DUTY TO COMPLY ......................................................................................... ............................... 10 B. CONTINUATION OF THE ExPIRED GENERAL PERMIT ................................. ............................... 10 C. NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A DEFENSE ............................ ............................... 10 D. DUTY TO MITIGATE ...................................................................................... ............................... 10 E. DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMAT ION ................................................................. .............................11 F. OTHER INFORMATION .................................................................................. ............................... 11 G. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... ............................... I l H. CERTIFICATION ............................................................................................ ............................... 11 I. OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE LIABILITY ............................................... ............................... 11 J. PROPERTY RIGHTS ........................................................................................ ............................... 11 K. SEVERABILITY .............................................................................................. ............................... 12 L. TRANSFERS ................................................................................................... ............................... 12 M. PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ................................................. ............................... 12 N. INSPECTION AND ENTRY .............................................................................. ............................... 12 O. PERMIT ACTIONS ......................................................................................... ............................... 12 P. ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS ............................................................................... ............................... 12 PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE ................... PART VIII. DEFINITIONS ................. ............................... -i m ..........................12 ..................12 Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 STORAI \VATER DISCIIARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL AC j ITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES PART I. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT A. PERMIT AREA. This permit covers all areas of the State of Iowa. B. ELIGIBILITY. A. Except for discharges identified under Parts I.B.2. and I.B.3., this permit may authorize the discharge of storm water associated with industrial activity from construction sites, (those sites or common plans of development or sale that will result in the disturbance of one or more acres total land area), (hereafter referred to as storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities) occurring after the effective date of this permit (including discharges occurring after the effective date of this permit where the construction activity was initiated before the effective date of this permit), including storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from areas that are dedicated to producing earthen materials, such as soils, sand and gravel, for use at a single construction site. B. This permit may authorize storm water discharge from a construction site that is mixed with storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from sources other than construction activities provided that the storm water discharge from the industrial (non - construction) source is in compliance with the terms of a NPDES general permit, other than this general permit, or individual permit authorizing such discharge. In addition, the storm water other than from construction, shall be in compliance with Pall IV,D.6. of this permit. 2. LIMITATIONS ON COVERAGE. The follOwing storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities are not authorized by this permit: A. storm water discharges that are mixed with sources of non -storm water other than EFFECDW DATE - OrTORER 1, 2002 To OCroaER 1, 2007 discharges identified in Part III.A,2. of this Permit; B. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities which are covered by an existing individual NPDES permit or which are issued a permit in accordance with Part I.C. of this permit. Storm water discharges authorized by an existing individual NPDES permit will be eligible to apply for coverage under this general permit as the existing individual permit expires; and C. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities that the Iowa Department of Natural Resources has determined to be or may reasonably be expected to be contributing to a violation of a water quality standard. 3. EXCLUSIONS. The folldwi ng storm water: discharges associated with industrial I ctivity;' from construction activities do nottrequire -a =, NPDES permit: discharges from agricultural and silvicultural ? activities including stornwater romoff front- orchards, cultivated crop's;' pastures, range lands, and forest lands, but not distcharges from concentrated animal feeding operations as defined in 40 CFR 122.23, concentrated aquatic production facilities as defined in 40 CFR 122.24, discharges to aquaculture projects as defined in 40 CFR 122.25, and discharges from silvicultural point sources as defined in 40 CFR 122.27. C. REQUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT. 1. The Department may require any person authorized by this permit to apply for and obtain an individual NPDES permit. The Department may require any owner or operator authorized to discharge corder this permit to apply for an individual NPDES permit only if the owner or operator has been notified in writing that a permit application is required. This notice shall include a brief IOWA DEPARIDIENT OF NAfUR1L RESOURCFs NPDES GENERAL PEI011T No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIA'fED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECFIVE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 statement of the reasons for this decision, an I.B. of this permit to be authorized to application form, a statement setting/ a discharge under this general permit. deadline for the owner or operator to file the application, and a statement that on the 2. Unless notified by the Department to the effective date of the individual NPDES contrary, dischargers who submit a Notice of permit, coverage under this general permit Intent (NOI) in accordance with the shall automatically terminate. If an owner or requirements of Part 11 of this permit are operator fails to submit an individual NPDES authorized to discharge storm water permit application required by the associated with industrial activity for Department under this paragraph, coverage of construction activities under the terns and this general permit automatically is conditions of this permit on the date the terminated at the end of the day specified for completed Notice of Intent was received by submittal of the individual NPDES the Department or the date construction is application. scheduled to begin as provided on Form 542 - c,.a 1415 (Notice of Intent) whichever is later. -2, Any person authorized to discharge under Upon review of the Notice of Intent, the - this permit may apply for an individual Department may deny coverage under this NPDES permit. In such cases, the discharger permit and require submittal of an application r �hpll submit the following in accordance with for an individual NPDES permit. the requirehents of subrule (567) -- 64.3(4) in fhg lowa Administrative Code: PART II. NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI) A an individual application, using DNR REQUIREMENTS Form 1 and EPA Form 2F, and, B. all applicable fees identified in rule (567)- -64.16 in the Iowa Administrative Code. 3. When an individual NPDES permit is issued to a discharger covered under this general permit, the applicability of this general permit to the individual NPDES permittee is automatically terminated on the effective date of the individual NPDES permit. A. DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF INTENT. When au individual NPDES permit is denied to a discharger otherwise subject to this 2. permit, the applicability of this permit to the individual NPDES pemrittee is automatically terminated on the date of such denial, unless otherwise specified by the Department. D. AUTHORIZATION. Except as provided in Parts ILA.2. and II.A.3. of this permit, Individuals who intend to obtain coverage for an existin storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities which expired on or after October 1, 2002, shall submit a complete Notice of Intent (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of Part II.C. on or before April 1, 2003. For storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities where construction begins after October 1, 1992, the NOI requirements specified in Part 11.C. of this permit shall be submitted to the Department at least 24 hours prior to the start of construction. L A discharger must submit a Notice of Intent 3. DEFERMENTS. The application deadline and (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of requirements for storm water discharge Part II of this permit in order for storm water associated with industrial activity for discharge associated with industrial activity construction activities in which the discharge for construction activities pursuant to Part is owned or operated by a municipality IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOORCEs NPDES GENERAL PER;Nwr No. 2 STO2M WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED wrrn INDUSTRIAL ACFD9TY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES serving a population less than 100,000 have been waived until March 10, 2003. B. FAILURE To NOTIFY. Dischargers who fail to notify the Department of their intent to be covered, and discharge pollutants to water of the United States within Iowa, without an NPDES permit, are in violation of the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa. C. CONTENTS OF THE NOTICE OF INTENT. A complete Notice of Intent shall include the items described in Parts II.C.1., I1.C.2., and II.C.3, of this permit. 1. A completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form, DNR Form 542 -1415, signed in accordance with Part VLG. of this permit. The information on the form shall include the following: A. Name, address, and location of the construction site for which this notification is submitted. The location should be provided as the 1/4 section, township, range, and the comity in which the storm water discharge is located, B. The owners name, address, telephone number, and status (federal, state, private, public or other entity). C. The name, address and telephone number of any operator (contractor) that has been identified as having a role in the storm water pollution prevention plan for the site required under Part IV.D.7. of this permit. Contractors (operators) identified after the submittal of the completed Notice of Intent shall be identified in the pollution prevention plan. D. The type of discharge (new or existing as related to October 1, 1992); whether or not the discharge is to a municipal separate storm sewer system; the date the discharge is to commence; the permit status of the discharge; and, the name of the receiving waters. EFFECnvE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 E. An indication if any existing quantitative data is available describing the concentration of pollutants in storm water discharges and a summary of available existing data. (Existing data should not be included as part of the NOI, it should retained as part of the Pollution Prevention Plan). F. A brief description of the project; an estimated timetable for major activities; and, an estimate of the number of acres of the site on which soil will be disturbed. G. A certification that compliance with G.(I) through G.(4), are met: G.(I). the pollution prevention plan has been developed before this Notice of Intent is submitted to the Department; G,(2), the pollution prevention plan will be implemented on October 1, 1992 for any existing storm water discharge - Associated with industrial activity_- for construction activities. For a storm watef, discharge: associated with industrial; activity ,for_ construction activities that °commbnce after" October 1, 1992, the pollution prevention.., plan shall be implemented ',with the start, of I construction activities; , G.(3), this Notice of Intenf--Will be included and incorporated into the pollution prevention plan and will be updated as required; and, G.(4). the storm water pollution prevention plan provides compliance with section 467A.64 of the Code of Iowa and local sediment and erosion plans and are consistent with the requirements of Part IV of this general permit. 2. APPLICABLE FEES. The applicable fees specified in Iowa Administrative Code 567 -- 64.16(455B). 3. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION, A demonstration that the public notice specified in Iowa Administrative Code 567 -- 64.6(1) "c "(2) was published at least one day, in at least two IOWA DEPARIAIENT OF NA rURA , RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PER)Irr NO. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTNITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES newspapers with the largest circulation in the area in which the facility is located or the activity will occur. D. WHERE TO SUBMIT. Facilities which discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities must submit items described in Parts II.C.1., 2., and 3. of this permit to the Department at the following address: Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources Henry A. Wallace Building 502 E. 9th St. Des Moines, IA 50319 -0034 E. RENOTIFICATION. Within 180 days after this general permit expires, the permittee is required to resubmit a completed Notice of Intent with the Department for coverage under the new general permit. If a general permit has not been reissued within 180 days after expiration, the storm water discharger must apply for an individual NPDES permit according to the procedures identified in Iowa Administrative Code 567 -- 64.3(4). F. TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS VER>vlt For storm water discharge ._ - associated, with industrial activity for F construetiolt activities where the ownership ! rchanges, -,tirp Department must be notified of �ie titje.trgnsfer within 30 days. If a storm water cdischarge associated with industrial v > activity fQr'construction activities is covered byrthis general permit, the new owner(s) shall lie subject to all terms and conditions of this general permit. A copy of the notice of transfer that was sent to the Department shall be included in the pollution prevention plan. For construction activity which is part of a larger common plan of development such as a housing or commercial development project, if a permittee transfers ownership of all or any part of property subject to this permit, both the pemrittee and transferee shall be responsible for compliance with the provisions of this permit for that portion of the project which has been transferred EFFECnvE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 including when the transferred property is less than five acres in area. If the new owner(s) agree in writing to be solely responsible for compliance with the provisions of this permit for the property which has been transferred, then the existing pennittee(s) shall be relieved of responsibility for compliance with this permit for the transferred, property, from and after the date the Department receives written notice of transfer of responsibility. A copy of the notice of transfer of responsibility shall be included in the pollution prevention plan. G. NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION. 1. Within 30 days after final stabilization at a construction site (as defined in Part VIII of this permit), the operator or owner of the facility shall submit a Notice of Discontinuation to the Department. 2. The Notice of Discontinuation shall include the following information: A. the name of the owner /operator to which the permit was issued; B. the general permit number and permit authorization number; c, the date the construction site reached final stabilization; and, D. the following certification signed in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit: "I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified facility have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time. I understand that by submitting this Notice of Discontinuation, that I am no longer authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities by Iowa Department of Natural Resources General NPDES Permit No. 2. and that discharging pollutants from storm water associated with industrial activity to waters of the United States is unlawful IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCEs NPDES GENERAL PE%N T No. 2 STORAI WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONsi Huc1'IoN ACTIVITIES under the Clean Water Act where the discharge is not authorized by a NPDES permit ", PART III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, MANAGEMENT PRACTICES, AND OTHER NON- NUMERIC LIMITATIONS A. 2. PROHIBITION ON NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES. All discharges authorized by this permit shall be composed entirely of storm water except for non -storm discharges listed in Part III.A.2. Discharges from fire fighting activities; fire hydrant flushings; waters used to wash vehicles in accordance with Part IV.D.2.c.(2).; potable water sources including waterline flushings; irrigation drainage; routine external building washdown which does not use detergents; pavement washwaters where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless all spilled material has been removed) and where detergents are not used; air conditioning condensate; springs; and foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with process materials such as solvents; may be authorized by this permit provided the non -storm water component of the discharge is in compliance with Part IV.D.5. of this permit. RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES. Any owner or operator identified in the pollution prevention plan is subject to the spill notification requirements as specified in 4556.386 of the Iowa Code. Iowa law requires that as soon as possible but not more than six hours after the onset of a "hazardous condition" the Department and local sheriffs office or the office of the sheriff of the affected county be notified. The storm water pollution prevention plan described in Part IV of this permit must be modified within 14 calendar days of knowledge of the release to provide a EFFECnvE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 description of the release and the circumstances leading to the release and to identify and provide for the implementation of steps to prevent the reoccurrence of such releases and to respond to such releases. PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS A storm water pollution prevention plan shall be developed for each construction site covered by this permit. Storm water pollution prevention plans shall be prepared in accordance with good engineering practices. The plan shall identify potential sources of pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of the storm water discharge from the construction activities. In addition, the plan shall describe and ensure the implementation of practices which will be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities at the construction site and to assure compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. Facilities must implement the provisions of the storm water pollution prevention plan required under this part as a condifii +it of this permit. A. DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION, PLAN PREPARATION AND - COMPLIANCE. ' 1. POLLUTION PREVENTION '+ PLAN PREPARATION DEADLINE; - "Theep011utiolt prevention plan shall be completed prior to the submittal of an NOI to the Department to be covered under this permit and shall be Updated as appropriate. 2. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN COMPLIANCE DEADLINE. The pollution prevention plan shall provide for compliance with the terms and schedule of the plan with the initiation of construction activities. B. SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW. 1. The plan shall be signed in accordance with Part VI.G., and be retained at the construction site from the date construction activities begin to the date of final stabilization. IOWA DEPARTh1ENr OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENEIUL PERMIT NO. 2 STOMI WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED w1T11 INDUs7R1At. ACTMTV FOR CONSTRUCTION ACEMTIES 2. The permittee shall make plans available to the Department upon request, or in the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities which discharge through a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system with all NPDES permit, to the municipal operator of the system. 3. The Department may notify the permittee at any time that the plan does not meet one or more of the minimum requirements of this Part. After such notification from the Department, the permittee shall make changes to, the plgn and shall submit to the Department: a written certification that the j requested :changes have been made. Unless r f otherwise provided by the Department, the permittee' shall have 7 days after such noification to make the necessary changes. 1 i,4, {,,Ij storm water pollution prevention plans received 'by the Department from the 04mittee are considered reports that shall be available to the public under Section 308(b) of the CWA and Chapter 22 of the Code of Iowa. However, the permittee may claim any portion of a storm water pollution plan as confidential in accordance with Chapter 22 of the Code of Iowa and Iowa Administrative Code (561) - -2.5. C. KEEPING PLANS CURRENT. The permittee shall amend the plan whenever there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance, which has a significant effect on the potential for the discharge of pollutants to the waters of the United States and which has not been addressed in the plan or if the storm water pollution prevention plan proves to be ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants from sources identified in Part IV.D.2. of this permit, or in otherwise achieving the general objectives of controlling pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities. In addition, the pollution prevention plan shall be updated to: include contractors identified after the submittal of the Notice of Intent as CO- permittees, described in Part IV.D.7. of this EFFECTIVE DATE- OCmnEN 1, 2002 To OcrODEIi 1, 2007 permit; identify any change in ownership or transference of the permit and permit responsibilities; or, if required, by the occurrence of a hazardous condition (as defined in Part VIII of this permit). Amendments to the plan may be reviewed by the Department of Natural Resources in the same manner as Part I V.B.2. D. CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN. The storm water pollution prevention plan shall include the following items: 1. SITE DESCRIPTION. Each plan shall, provide a description of the following: A. a description of the nature of the construction activity; B. estimates of the total area of the site and the area of the site that is expected to be disturbed by excavation, grading, or other activities; C. an estimate of the runoff coefficient of the site after construction activities are completed and existing data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; D. a site map indicating drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities, areas of soil disturbance, the location of major structural and nonstructural controls identified in the plan, the location of areas where stabilization practices are expected to occur, surface waters (including wetlands), and locations where storm water is discharged to a surface water; and E. the name of the receiving water(s) and the ultimate receiving water(s). 2. CONTROLS. Each plan shall include a description of appropriate controls that will be implemented at the construction site. The plan will clearly describe the intended sequence of major activities and for each activity, the appropriate control measures and the timing during the construction process IOWA DEPARDIEW or NATURAL. RESo RcEs NPDES GENERAL PEMIrr No. 2 STORAI \VATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES that the measures will be implemented. (For example, perimeter controls for one portion of the site will be installed after the clearing and grubbing necessary for installation of the measure, but before the clearing and grubbing for the remaining portions of the site. Perimeter controls will be actively maintained until final stabilization of those portions of the site upward of the perimeter control. Temporary perimeter controls will be removed after final stabilization). The description of controls shall address the following minimum components: A. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS. A.(1), STABILIZATION PRACTICES. A description of temporary and permanent stabilization practices, including site - specific scheduling of the implementation of the practices. Site plans should ensure that existing vegetation is preserved where attainable and that disturbed areas are stabilized. Stabilization practices may include: temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, and other appropriate measures. Except as precluded by snow cover, stabilization measures shall be initiated on all disturbed areas as soon as practical but in no case where construction activity will not occur for a period of 21 or more calendar days later than tine 14th day after no construction activity has occurred on such area. Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the 14th day after no construction activity occurs is precluded by snow cover, then stabilization measures shall be initiated as soon as practicable thereafter, A.(2). STRUCTURAL PRACTICES. A description of structural practices to the degree attainable, to divert flows from exposed soils, store flows or otherwise limit runoff from exposed areas of the site. Such practices may include silt fences, earth dikes, brush barriers, drainage swales, sediment traps, check dams, subsurface drains, pipe slope drains, level spreaders, storm drain inlet EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 protection, rock outlet protection, reinforced soil retaining systems, gabions, and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Structural practices should be placed on upland soils to the degree attainable. The installation of these devices may be subject to Section 404 of the CWA. A.(2).(a). For common drainage locations that serve an area with more than 10 disturbed acres at one time, a temporary (or permanent) sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures, shall be provided where attainable until final stabilization of the site. The 3,600 cubic feet of storage area per acre drained does not apply to flows from offsite areas and flows from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have undergone final stabilization where such flows are diverted around the sediment basin. For drainage locations which serve more than 10 disturbed acres at one time and where a temporary sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control is not attainable, sediment traps, siftfences, or equivalent sediment controls are [equired for all sideslope and downslope, boundaries of, the construction area. -o A.(2).(b). For drainage!iocati $ hs serdn& 10 or less acres, sedimentir�ps, siltfences or equivalent sediment controls ere required for ± ±. all sideslope and downslope'boinidaries`of the construction area or "a sedifent basin providing storage for 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained. B. STORM WATER MANAGEMENT. A description of measures that will be installed during construction to control pollutants in storm water discharges that will occur after construction operations have been completed. The installation of these devices may be subject to Section 404 of the CWA, This permit only addresses the installation of storm water management measures, and not the ultimate operation and maintenance of such structures after the construction activities have been completed and the site has undergone final stabilization. Permittees IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PER6nr No. 2 STORM NVATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES are only responsible for the installation and maintenance of storm water management measures prior to final stabilization of the site, and are not responsible for maintenance after storm water discharges associated with industrial activity have been eliminated from the site. EL(I). Such practices may include: storm water detention structures (including wet ponds); storm water retention structures; flow attenuation by use of open vegetated swales and natural depressions; and infiltration of runoff onsite; and sequential systems (which coipbine several practices). A goal of 80 pereenf removal of total suspended solids t fibm those flows which exceed t predevetopfient levels should be used in d6SIigmng and installing storm water . _ . nnanageimen(,. controls (where practicable). Where this goal is not met, the permittee shall plp%;ide justification for rejecting each practice based on site conditions. 1 11 R.(2). Velocity dissipation devices shall be placed at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel as necessary to provide a non- erosive velocity flow from the structure to a water course so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected (e.g. maintenance of hydrologic conditions, present prior to the initiation of construction activities).. C. OTHER CONTROLS. EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCroaER 1, 2007 or local waste disposal, sanitary sewer or septic system regulations: D. APPROVED STATE OR LOCAL PLANS. Facilities which discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities must include in their storm water pollution prevention plan procedures and requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or storm water management plans approved by State or local officials. Applicable requirements specified in sediment and erosion plans, site permits or storm water management plans approved by State or local officials that are applicable to protecting surface water resources are, upon submittal of an NOI to be authorized to discharge under this permit, incorporated by reference and are enforceable under this permit even if they are not specifically included in a storm water pollution prevention plan required under this permit. Operators of facilities seeking alternative permit requirements shall submit an individual permit application in accordance with Part I.C.2. of this permit along with a description of why requirements in approved State or local plans should not be applicable as a condition of an NPDES permit. 3. MAINTENANCE. A description of procedures to maintain in good and effective operating conditions vegetation, erosion and sediment control measures and other protective measures identified in the site plan. C.(1). WASTE DISPOSAL. All wastes composed of building materials must be 4. removed from the site for disposal in permitted disposal facilities. No building material wastes or mused building materials shall be buried, dumped, or discharged at the site. C.(2). Off -site vehicle tracking of sediments shall be minimized. C.(3). The plan shall ensure and demonstrate compliance with applicable State INSPECTIONS. Qualified personnel (provided by the discharger) shall inspect disturbed areas of the construction site that have not been finally stabilized at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm that is 0.5 inches or greater. A. Disturbed areas and areas used for storage of materials that are exposed to precipitation shall be inspected for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. Erosion and sediment control measures identified in the plan shall IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAI. REsouncTs NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STOILII WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 be observed to ensure that they are operating correctly. Where discharge locations or points are accessible, they shall be inspected to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Locations where vehicles enter or exit the site shall be inspected for evidence of offsite sediment tracking. B. Based on the results of the inspection, the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the plan in accordance with paragraph W.D.I. of this permit and pollution prevention measures identified in the plan in accordance with paragraph IV.D.2. of this permit shall be revised as appropriate as soon as practicable after such inspection. Such modifications shall provide for timely implementation of any changes to the plan within 7 calendar days following the inspection. C. A report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the storm water pollution prevention plan, and actions taken in accordance with paragraph IV.DA.B. of the permit shall be made and retained as part of the storm water pollution prevention plan for at least three years or until project termination. The report shall be signed in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. 5. NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES. Except for flows from fire fighting activities, sources Of non - storm water listed in Part III.A.2. of this permit that are combined with storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from construction activities must be identified in the plan. The plan shall identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for the non - storm water component(s) of the discharge. 6. ADDITIONAL REOUIREMENTS FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE FROM INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITIES OTHER 'THAN CONSTRUCTION. INCLUDING DEDICATED ASPHALT PLANTS. AND DEDICATED CEMENT PLANTS. This V permit may only authorize a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from a construction site that is mixed with a storm water discharge from an industrial source other than construction, where: A. the industrial source other than construction is located on the same site as the construction activity; B. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the areas of the site where construction activities are occurring are in compliance with the terms of this permit; and, C. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the areas of the site where industrial activity other than construction are occurring (including storm water discharges from dedicated asphalt plants and dedicated cement plants) are in compliance with the terms and conditions, including applicable NOI or application requirements, of a different NPDES general permit or individual permit autharixing such discharges. - -_ 7. CONTRACTORS. A. The storm water pollut6nprev ntion UI ?p must clearly identify for each measure in the plan, the contractor(s) artdfor subcointractor(s)' that will implement Ale ineasore. All contractors and subcontractors dotifred in the plan must sign a copy of the certification statement in Part IV.D.7.B. of this permit in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. Upon signing the certification, the contractor or sub - contractor is a co- permittee with the owner and other co- pennittee contractors. All certifications must be included in the storm water pollution prevention plan. B. CERTIFICATION STATEMENT. All contractors and subcontractors identified in a storm water pollution prevention plan in accordance with Part IV.D.7.A. of this permit shall sign a copy of the following certification statement before conducting any ION4r DEPAIITMFNr OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PE%NIrr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCDARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTNITI' FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES professional service at the site identified in thystorm water pollution prevention plan: P, r -.1 "1- certify under penalty of law that I unoers"tand, the terms and conditions of the general - 'National Pollutant Discharge fEhniination System (NPDES) permit that cauthorizesi the storm water discharges associated? with industrial activity from the Ionstruction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co- permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities ". at the identified site. As a co- permittee, I understand that 1, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit." The certification must include the name and title of the person providing the signature; the name, address and telephone number of the contracting firm; the address (or other identifying description) of the site; and the date the certification is made. PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS A. The permittee shall retain copies of storm water pollution prevention plans and all reports required by this permit, and records of all data used to complete the Notice of Intent to be covered by this permit, for a period of at least three years from the date that the site is finally stabilized. B. If there is a construction trailer, shed or other covered structure located on the property the permittee shall retain a copy of the storm water pollution prevention plan required by this permit at the construction site from the date of project initiation to the date of final 10 EFFECTIVE DATE - OCTOBER I, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 stabilization. If there is no construction trailer, shed or other covered structure located on the property, the permittee shall retain a copy of the plan at a readily available alternative site approved by the Department and provide it for inspection upon request. If the plan is maintained at an off -site location such as a corporate office, it shall be provided for inspection no later than two business days after being requested. C. ADDRESSES. All written correspondence to the Department should be sent to the following address: Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources Henry A. Wallace Building 502 E. 9th St. Des Moines, IA 50319 -0034 PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS A. DUTYTOCOMPLY. The permittee must comply with all conditions of this permit. Any permit noncompliance constitutes a violation of the Code of Iowa and the Clean Water Act and is grounds for enforcement action; for termination of coverage under this general permit; or, for denial of a request for coverage under a reissued general permit. 2. TOXIC POLLUTANTS. The permittee shall comply with effluent standards or prohibitions established under section 307(a) of the Clean Water Act (CWA) for toxic pollutants within the time provided in the regulations that establish these standards or prohibitions, even if this permit has not yet been modified to incorporate the requirement. B. CONTINUATION OF THE EXPIRED GENERAL PERMIT. This permit expires on October 1, 2007. An expired general permit continues in force for 180 days after the expiration date. Only those facilities authorized to discharge under the expiring general permit are covered IOWA DEPARTn1ENr OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERAIrr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED won INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES by the 180 -day continuation of the expired general permit. C. NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A DEFENSE. It shall not be a defense for a permittee in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity in order to maintain compliance with the conditions of this permit. D. DUTY TO MITIGATE. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit which has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. E. DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION. The permittee shall furnish to the Department, within a reasonable time, any information which the Department may request to determine compliance with this permit. The permittee shall also furnish to the Department upon request copies of records required to be kept by this permit. F. OTHER INFORMATION. When the permittee becomes aware that he or she failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in the Notice of Intent or in any other report to the Department, he or she shall promptly submit such facts or information. G. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS. All Notices of Intent, storm water pollution prevention plans, reports, certifications or information either submitted to the Department or the operator of a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system, or that this permit requires be maintained by the permittee, shall be signed in accordance with rule 567 -- 64.3(8) of the Iowa Administrative Code as follows: 64.3(8) Identity of signatories of operation permit applications. The person who signs the application for an operation permit shall be: 11 EFFEc,nvE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 a. Corporations, In the case of corporations, a principal executive officer of at least the level of vice - president, b. Partnerships. ht the case off a partnership, a general partner. c. Sole proprietorships. In the case of a sole proprietorship, the proprietor. d. Public facilities. - In the case of a municipal, state, or other public facility, by either the principal executive officer, or the ranking elected official. e. Storm wafer discharge associated with industrial activity from construction activio,. In the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction as identified in 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)(x), either the owner of the site or the general contractor. The person who signs NPDES reports shall be the same, except that in the case of a corporation or a public body, ,Monitoring reports required under the terms of The permit may be submitted by re per s, , who is responsible for the overall opemalil�n of the? facility from which the discharge o;lgmated;_:;;; H. CERTIFICATION. Any 9�person' signing documents under paragraph VI.o kS,hall make' the following certifieatioii ' f..� "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false IOWA DENIRTNIENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERNnT No. 2 STORM WATFR DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES C`j idfdrmmtton, Including the possibility of fine and imprisblilment for knowing violations." L OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE JARILIT ' Nothing in this permit shall be _. ounstrued,io preclude the institution of any legal acting or relieve the permittee from any �4responsibilities, liabilities, or penalties to which the permittee is or may be subject under section 31 1 of the Clean Water Act. J. PROPERTY RIGHTS. The issuance of this permit does not convey any property rights of any sort, nor any exclusive privileges, nor does it authorize any injury to private property nor any invasion of personal rights, nor any infringement of Federal, State or local laws or regulations. IC. SEVERABILITY. The provisions of this permit are severable, and if any provision of this permit, or the application of any provision of this permit to any circumstance, is held invalid, the application of such provision to other circumstances, and the remainder of this permit shall not be affected thereby. L. TRANSFERS. This permit is not transferable to any person except after notice to the Department. The Department may require the discharger to apply for and obtain an individual NPDES permit as stated in Part I.C. M. PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control (and related appurtenances) which are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit and with the requirements of storm water pollution prevention plans. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures. Proper operation and maintenance requires the operation of backup or auxiliary facilities or similar systems, installed by a permittee only when necessary 12 EFFECEIVE DATE - OCIGBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 to achieve compliance with the conditions or this permit. N. INSPECTION AND ENTRY, The permittee shall allow the Department or an authorized representative of EPA, the State, or, in the case of a facility which discharges through a municipal separate storm sewer, an authorized representative of the municipal operator or the separate storm sewer receiving the discharge, upon the presentation of credentials and other documents as may be required by law, to: I. Enter upon the permittee's premises where a regulated facility or activity is located or conducted or where records must be kept under the conditions of this permit; 2. Have access to and copy at reasonable times, any records that must be kept under the conditions of this permit; and, 3. Inspect at reasonable times any facilities or equipment (including monitoring and control equipment). O. PERMIT ACTIONS. Coverage under this permit may be terminated for cause. The filing of a request by the permittee for a permit discontinuance, or a notification of planned changes or anticipated noncompliance does not stay any permit condition. P. ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS. No condition Of this permit shall release the permittee from any responsibility or requirements under other environmental statutes or regulations. PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE If there is evidence indicating potential or realized impacts or water quality due to any storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities covered by this permit, the owner or operator of such discharge may be required to obtain individual permit in accordance with Part LC of this permit. IOWA DEPARTNIMT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERM1Irr NO. 2 STORK WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES PART VIII. DEFINITIONS "Best Management Practices" ('HMI's ") means schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the United States. BMPs also include treatment requirements, operating procedures, and practices to control plant site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage. "CIVA" or "Clean Water Act' means the Federal Water Pollution Control Act. "Dedicated portable asphalt plant" means a portable asphalt plant that is located on or contiguous to a construction site and that provides asphalt only to the construction site that the plant is located on or adjacent to. "Dedicated portable concrete plant" means a portable concrete plant that is located on or contiguous to a construction site and that provides concrete only to the construction site that the plant is located on or adjacent to. "Dedicated sand or gravel operation" means an operation that produces sand and/or gravel for a single construction project. "Department" means the Iowa Department of Natural Resources. "Final Stabilization" means that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% for the area has been established or equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. "Hazardous condition" means any situation involving the actual, imminent, or probable spillage, leakage, or release of a hazardous substance on to the land, into a water of the state, or into the atmosphere, which creates an immediate or potential danger to the public health or safety or to the environment. 455B.381(2) 1991. Code of lows 13 EFFECOVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 "Hazardous substance" means any substance or mixture of substances that presents a danger to the public health or safety and includes, but in not limited to, a substance that is toxic, corrosive, or flammable, or that is an irritant or that, in confinement, generates pressure through decomposition, heat, or other means. The following are examples of substances which, in sufficient quantity may be hazardous: acids; alkalis; explosives; fertilizers; heavy metals such as chromium, arsenic, mercury, lead and cadmium; industrial chemicals; paint thinners; paints; pesticides; petroleum products; poisons, radioactive materials; sludges; and organic solvents. "Hazardous substances" may include any hazardous waste identified or listed by the administrator of the United State Environmental Protection Agency under the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, or any toxic pollutant listed under section 307 of the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended to January I, 1977, or any hazardous substance designated under section 311 of the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended to January 1, 1977, or any hazardous material designated by the secretary of transportation under the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act (49 CFR 172.101). 455B.381(1) . 1991 Code of Iowa "Large and Medilun Mtmicipai^Separate Story Server System" means all municiVgt separate storm sewers that are either: o' r7 iC/) (i.) located in an incorpm-atetl puce with a: population of 100,000 or more as.deterimHed by the' latest Decennial Census by the Bureau of Census; or (ii.) located in the counties with) unincorporated urbanized populations or) 00,000 or more, except municipal separate storm-sewers that are located in the incorporated places, townships or towns within such counties; or (iii.) owned or operated by a municipality other than those described in paragraph (i) or (ii) and that are designated by the Director as part of the large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system. IOWA DEPARTnIENI` or NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STORM NVATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACITVITv FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES "Municipality" means a city, town, borough, county, parish, district, association, or other public body created by or under State law. "NO]" means Notice of Intent to be covered by this permit (see Part I1 of this permit.) "Runoff coefficient" means the traction of total rainfall that will appear at the conveyance as runoff. "Storm Water" means storm water runoff, snow melt runoff, and surface runoff and drainage. "Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity" means the discharge from any conveyance which is used for collecting and conveyi }g storm.yvater and which is directly related to manufacturing, processing or raw materials Iri "storage areal aP:an industrial plant. The term does -not include :discharges from facilities or activities i excluded from ',the NPDES program under 40 CFR rt 12`2,.' For_. tkge, categories of industries identified .:...in paragraphs (i) :- through (x) of this definition, the term ir�ehades,.but is not limited to, storm water discharges from: - industrial plant yards; immediate access roads and rail lines used or traveled by carriers of raw materials, manufactured products, waste material, or by- products used or created by the facility; material handling sites; refuse sites; sites used for the application or disposal of process waste waters (as defined at 40 CFR part 401); sites used for the storage and maintenance of material handling equipment; sites used for residual treatment, storage, or disposal; shipping and receiving areas; manufacturing buildings; storage areas (including tank farms) for raw materials, and intermediate and finished products; and areas where industrial activity has taken place in the past and significant materials remain and are exposed to storm water. For the categories of industries identified in paragraph (xi) of this definition, the teen includes only storm water discharges from all the areas (except access roads and rail lines) that are listed in the previous sentence where material handling equipment or activities, raw materials, intermediate products, final products, waste materials, by- products, or industrial machinery are exposed to storm water. For the purposes of this paragraph, material handling activities include the storage, 14 EFFECOvF. DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 loading and unloading, transportation, or conveyance of any raw material, intermediate product, finished product, by- product, or waste product. The term excludes areas located on plant lands separate from the plant's industrial activities, such as office buildings and accompanying parking lots as long as the drainage from the excluded areas is not mixed with storm water drained from the above described areas. Industrial facilities (including industrial facilities that are Federally, State, or municipally owned or operated that meet the description of the facilities listed in these paragraphs (i) -(xi) of the definition) include those facilities designated under 40 CFR 122.26(a)(1)(v). The following categories of facilities are considered to be engaging in "industrial activity" for purposes of this definition; (i) Facilities subject to storm water effluent limitations guidelines, new source performance standards, or toxic pollutant effluent standards under 40 CFR Subchapter N (except facilities with toxic pollutant effluent standards which are exempted under category (xiI of this definition); (it) Facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 24 (except 2434), 26 (except 265 and 267), 28 (except 283 and 285), 29, 311, 32 (except 323),33,3441,373; (iii). Facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 10 through 14 (mineral industry) including active or inactive mining operations (except for areas of coal mining operations no longer meeting the definition of a reclamation area under 40 CFR 434.11(1) because the performance bond issued to the facility by the appropriate SMCRA authority has been released, or except for areas of non -coat mining operations which have been released from applicable State or Federal reclamation requirements after December 17, 1990) and oil and gas exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities that discharge storm water contaminated by contact with or that has come into contact with, any overburden, raw material, intermediate products, finished products, byproducts or waste products located on the site of such operations; (inactive mining operations are mining sites that are not being actively mined, but which have an identifiable owner /operator; inactive mining sites do not include IOWA DEYARToENI' OF NATumt,REsouncEs NPDES GENERALPE2wl' No.2 STORM WATER DISCIIARGE AssorTATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACITwITIES sites where mining claims are being maintained prior to disturbances associated with the extraction, beneficiation, or processing of mined materials, nor sites where minimal activities are undertaken for the sole purpose of maintaining a mining claim); (iv) Hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facilities, including those that are operating under interim status or a permit under Subtitle C of RCRA; (v) Landfills, land application sites, and open dumps that receive or have received any industrial wastes (waste that is received fron any of the facilities described under this subsection) including those that are subject to regulation under Subtitle D of RCRA; (vi) facilities involved in the recycling of materials, including metal scrap yards, battery reclainners, salvage yards, and automobile junkyards, including but limited to those classified as Standard Industrial Classification 5015 and 5093; (vii) Steam electric power generating facilities, including coal handling sites; (viii) Transportation facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 40, 41, 42 (except 4221 - 4225), 43, 44, 45 and 5171 which have vehicle maintenance shops, equipment cleaning operations, or airport deicing operations. Only those portions of the facility that are either involved in vehicle maintenance (including vehicle rehabilitation, mechanical repairs, painting, fueling, and lubrication), equipment cleaning operations, airport deicing operations, or which are otherwise identified under paragraphs (i) -(vii) or (ix)-(xi) of this definition are associated with industrial activity; (ix) Treatment works treating domestic sewage or any other sewage sludge or wastewater treatment device or system, used in the storage treatment, recycling, and reclamation of municipal or domestic sewage, including land dedicated to the disposal of sewage sludge that are located within the confines of the facility, with a design flow of 1.0 mgd or more, or required to have an approved pretreatment program under 40 CFR 403. Not included are farm lands, domestic gardens or lands used for sludge management where sludge is 15 EFFECnvE DATF.- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCroDER 1, 2007 beneficially reused and which are not physically located in the confines of the facility, or areas that are in compliance with 40 CFR 503; (x) Construction activity including clearing, grading and excavation activities except: operations that result in the disturbance of less than one acre of total land area which are not part of a larger common plan of development or sale; 1 (xi) Facilities under Standard Industrial Classifications 20, 21, 22, 23, 2434, 25, 265, 267, 27, 283, 285, 30, 31 (except 311), 323, 34 (except 3441), 35, 36, 37 (except 373), 38, 39, 4221 -4225, (and which are not otherwise included within categories "Storm water discharge associated Ivith industrial activity for construction activities" means activities that fall under subparagraph (x) in the definition of storm water discharge associated with industrial activity. I r, STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX B r Lops Mal X q M 161 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 Appendix A it A'BASELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PRE- CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST 1. • site description, including: • The nature of the activity? • Intended sequence of major construction activities • The total area of the site • The area of the site that is expected to undergo excavation • The runoff coefficient of the site after construction is complete • Existing soil or storm water data • A site map with: • Drainage patterns • Approximate slopes after major grading ❑ Area of soil disturbance • Outline of areas which won't be disturbed • Location of major structural and non - structural controls .n • Areas where stabilization practices are expected to occur ❑ Surface waters co j ❑ Storm water discharge locations j . • The name of the receiving water(s) 2. A description of controls: 2.1 Erosion and sediment controls, including: • Stabilization practices for all areas disturbed by construction • Structural practices for all drainage /discharge locations 2.2 Storm water management controls, including: • Measures used to control pollutants occurring in storm water discharges after construction activities are complete. • Velocity dissipation devices to provide nonerosive flow conditions from the discharge point along the length of any outfall channel. 2.3 Other controls including: ❑ Waste disposal practices which prevent discharge of solid materials to waters of the U.S.? ❑ Measures to minimize offsite tracking of sediments by construction vehicles ❑ Measures to ensure compliance with State or local waste disposal, sanitary sewer, or septic system regulations 2.4 ❑ Description of the timing during the construction when measures will be implemented. 3. ❑ Are State or local requirements Incorporated into the plans? 4. ❑ Are maintenance procedures for control measures identified in the plan? 5, ❑ Identification of allowable non -storm water discharges and pollution prevention measures. 6. ❑ Contractor certification. 7. ❑ Plan certification, September 1992 A -1 Appendix A 1. Maintain Records of Construction Activities, including: ❑ Dates when major grading activities occur ❑ Dates when construction activities temporarily cease on a portion of the site ❑ Dates when construction activities permanently cease on a portion of the site ❑ Dates when stabilization measures are initiated on the site 2. Prepare Inspection reports summarizing: • Name of inspector • Qualifications of inspector • Measures /areas inspected • Observed conditions • Changes necessary to the SWPPP 3. Report Releases of Reportable Quantities of Oil or Hazardous Materials lif they occur): • Notify National Response Center 800/424 -8802 immediately • Notify permitting authority in writing within 14 days • Modify the pollution prevention plan to include: - the date of release - circumstances leading to the release - steps taken to prevent reoccurrence of the release 4.c Modify, Pollution Prevention Plan as necessary to: 1 :1 ❑ Comply with minimum permit requirements when notified by EPA that the plan does not. comply ❑ Address a change in design, construction operation or maintenance which has an ,effect on the potential for discharge of pollutants n :Prevent mnrrurranra of ranartable nuantitv releases of a hazardous material or oil ❑ All soil disturbing activities are complete 2. ❑ Temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time 3. ❑ All areas of the construction site not otherwise covered by a permanent pavement or structure have been stabilized with a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% or equivalent measures have been employed A -2 September 1992 Appendix A POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SELECTION CHECKLIST INSTRUCTIONS: THIS CHECKLIST LISTS THE MINIMUM SEDIMENT EROSION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS UNDER THE USEPA GENERAL PERMIT. CHECK I✓I EACH ITEM AND FILL IN THE BLANKS BELOW TO EVALUATE COMPLIANCE FOR EACH DRAINAGE AREA AND LOCATION. NOTE: THIS CHECKLIST WAS PREPARED FOR THE USEPA GENERAL PERMIT. REQUIREMENTS FOR STATE GENERAL PERMITS MAY VARY. Stabilization Practices ❑ Stabilization will be initiated on all disturbed areas where construction activity will not occur for a period of more than 21 calendar days by the 14th day after construction activity has permanently or temporarily ceased, Stabilization measures to be used include: ❑ Temporary Seeding ❑ Sod Stabilization ❑ Permanent Seeding ❑ Geotextiles ❑ Mulching ❑ Other Structural Practices ❑ Flows from upstream areas will be diverted from exposed soils. Measures to be used include: ❑ Earth Dike ❑ Pipe Slope Drain ❑ Drainage Swale ❑ Other ❑ Interceptor Dike and Swale Drainage locations serving less than 10 Drainage locations serving 10 or more disturbed acres disturbed acres ❑ Sediment controls will be installed ❑ A Sediment Basin will be installed Sediment controls include: ❑ A Sediment Basin is not attainable on the site; therefore, the following ❑ Sediment Basin sediment controls will be installed: ❑ Sediment Trap Sediment Trap ❑ Silt Fence or equivalent Silt Fence or equivalent controls along all sideslope controls along the sideslope and downslo a boundaries and downslo a boundaries Sediment Basin Runoff Storage Calculation acres area draining to the sediment basin X 3,600 cubic feet of storage /acre cubic feet of storage required for the basin. September 1992 A -3 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX C INSPECTION REPORTS Z� Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 2 Improvements — 110.0630 �s 0 c 7 �O EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MONITORING REPORT Project: TERRY TRUEBLOOD REC. AREA PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS Date of Inspection: h� Prime Contractor: Permit No: Inspector: Project No: Reason for Inspection: ❑ Weekly ❑ Rainfall Event (_ in.) ❑ Other %i EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MONITORING Area Inspected: 0 t { E Inspection of Best Management Practices: T -5i Control Maintenance/ Control Maintenance/ Practice Modification Practice Modification BMP Effective Required BMP Effective Required Y N N/A Y N N/A Y N N/A Y N N/A Silt Fencing ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Stockpile Stabilization ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Ditch Checks ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Mulching ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Rip Rap ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Erosion Matting ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Inlet Protection ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Temporary Seeding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Drainage Swales ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Permanent Seeding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Construction Site Exits ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Sodding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Project Schedule ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Staging Area ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Grading Practices ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Other ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Good Housekeeping ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Other ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ OBSERVATION COMMENTS /RECOMMENDATIONS Note: Any'Control Practice Effective' box checked 'N' or'Maintenance /Modification Required' box checked 'Y' must have comments, recommended improvements, and date implemented. Any modifications must be sketched, described, dated, and initialed on the drawing included with the Pollution Prevention Plan. ITEM COMMENTS /RECOMMENDED IMPROVEMENTS DATEIMPLEMENTED ❑ See reverse side for sketches or additional comments /recommendations CERTIFICATION Copy to: ❑ Onsite Pollution Prevention Plan ❑ Owner ❑ Project Engineer ❑ Project Observer "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations" Signature of Monitor h� %i 0 t { E T -5i CERTIFICATION Copy to: ❑ Onsite Pollution Prevention Plan ❑ Owner ❑ Project Engineer ❑ Project Observer "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations" Signature of Monitor 3c 2 Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356 -5149 RESOLUTION NO. 10 -388 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON SEPTEMBER 21, 2010 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above - mentioned project is to be held on the 21st day of September, 2010, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That the copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above -named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 7th day of September 20 10 MAYOR Approved by ATTEST:i/ CIT -CLERK City Attorney's Office 7A�io pwengVeslsetph- TwebloodRecArea.doc Resolution No. ic Page 2 It was moved by Mims and seconded by Champion the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x x x x x X x wpdata/glossary /resolubon-ic. doc NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Dickens Hayek Mims Wilburn Wright J Prepared by: Mike Moran, Parks & Rec., 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356 -5100 RESOLUTION NO. 10 -411 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY. IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above -named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above - named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above -named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above -named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 10:00 a.m. on the 21st day of October, 2010. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7:00 p.m. on the 26th day of October, 2010, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 21st day of September , 20 10 ,A A a, MAYOR App oved by ATTEST: Aal,�,d _/V1 ato CITY ERK City Attorney's Office R -ao )( lG o pwengtreslapprovplans W eblood- ph2.doc Resolution No. 10 -411 Page 2 It was moved by Wilburn and seconded by Mims the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: x x x x x x x wpdatalglossa ry/msolubon- lc.doc NAYS: ABSENT: Bailey Champion Dickens Hayek Mims Wilburn Wright NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE2IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until 10:00 A.M. on the 21S day of October, 2010. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 26th day of October, 2010, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: Base Bid: Construction of the park improvements to include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, boat ramp, trails, marina building with restrooms, park shelter, prairie seeding, surface restoration, and associated work. Add Alternate No. 1: The additional cost for installing rubber composite shingles for the marina building and open park shelter and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for the construction of a bio- retention cell and associated work. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: November 1, 2010 Specified Completion Date: October 31, 2011 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifi- cations and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., Cedar Rapids, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242 -4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239- 1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quanti- ties, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully re- quired under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee $ S `� CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, . JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN FED. ID # 42- 0330670 MINNOW being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS- CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper .time(s), on the following date(s): S 5-p-r E M L3 ®2 010 Legal Cl Subscribed and sworn to before me this / 3 day o A.D. 201. Notar Public rr ^�c LINDA KROTZ Commission Number 732619 <s y 64y Commission Expires OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECRE- ATION AREA - PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice Is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 2 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 21st day of September, 2010, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall In the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as post- ed by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file In the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any Interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 81950 September 13, 2010 I)rOJ Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356 -5149 RESOLUTION NO. lo-4g4 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA PHASE TWO IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT. \1 WHEREAS, Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $1,192,089.00 for construction of the above -named project. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: The contract for the construction of the above -named project is hereby awarded to Tricon General Construction, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above -named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Parks & Recreation Director is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above -named project. Passed and approved this 16th day of November , 20 1 n MAYOR y-y Approved by ATTEST: Az; e,�a,J CITYICLERK City Attorney's Office jp ZI to It was moved by Champion and seconded by Wilburn the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: X Bailey x Champion x Dickens x Hayek X Mims x Wilburn X Wright pwenglreslawrdcon- tmeblood Phasell.doc Printer's Fee $ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN FED. ID # 42.0330667p0 I, ' A(a,=A being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS - CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper time(s), on the following date(s): Legal e •k- Subscribed and sworn to before me this day A.D. 20__x._. LC..e otary Public `AL, LINDA KROTZ �. CDmTssionNumber732019 K< y Commissiop Expires oya January 27, 2011 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECRE- ATION AREA- PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa ! City, Iowa, until 10:00 A.M. on the 21st day of October, 2010. Sealed proposals will be opened immedi- ately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by lax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 26th day of October, 2010, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the follow- ing: Base Bid: Construction of the park Improvements to include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, boat ramp, trails, marina building with restrooms, park shel- ter, prairie seeding, surface restora- tion, and associated work. Add Alternate No. is The additional cost for installing rubber composite shingles for the marina building and open park shelter and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for the construction of a bio- retention cell and associated work. All work Is to be done in strict com- pliance with the plans and specifi- cations prepared by Snyder & Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examl,nation in the Offfco of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a comoralion authorized to contract as a surely in the Slate of Iowa, in the sum of 10 of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfac- tory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and maintenance of said Project, it required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the Invest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the can- vass and tabulation of bids is com- pleted and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred per- cent (100 %) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a respon- sible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and dam- ages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the centracl, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improve. ment for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply 10 this Project: Specified Start Date: November 1, 2010 Specified Completion Date: October 31, 2011 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and pro. Posed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., Cedar Rapids, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the lava Department of Economic Development at (515) 242.4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239 -1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall Include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the con tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed sub. contractors, together with quanti. ties, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to prod. ucts and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resi- dent bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive techni- calities and Irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK 82026 September 27, 2010 FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ( "City "), and Tricon General Construction Inc ( "Contractor "). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 2nd day of September , 2010, for the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project ('Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers 1 ; b. "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, as amended; C. Plans; e o d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; C7, cr rn r4 e. Notice to Bidders; 4 o �_ lc� f. Note to Bidders; t g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Contract Compliance Program (Anti- Discrimination Requirements); Proposal and Bid Documents; and j. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): OLU?+ V a7, i50 M 0, 1, o m loon on, j 4 orvn RvGX1 5 aojtTa4aI on/ 5a, q03 sTaig Wd-6- ILACTIOV aSy q50 �Ik- (4 ✓ -GS 110 " 13, 1 g� 0W'5 oyF tiw ODDS $, 400 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. e 0 O m DATED this day of 120 10. o City ATTEST: Mayor City Clerk AG -2 i Contractor W By (Title) 0LOr -i ATTEST:. (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office i �� 0 v FORM OF PROPOSAL TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF IOWA CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder MO 01J �flV?b4I Address of Bidder RN TO: City Clerk C) rn City of Iowa City r' City Hall o 410 E. Washington St. p, Iowa City, IA 52240 = The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amountrof $ I ' I . in accordance with the terms set forth in the 'Project Specifications." The undersigned bidder, having examined and determined the scope of the Contract Documents, hereby proposes to provide the required labor, services, materials and equipment and to perform the Project as described in the Contract Documents, including Addenda and , and to do all work at the prices set forth herein. We further propose to do all "Extra Work' which may be required to complete the work contemplated, at unit prices or lump sums to be agreed upon in writing prior to starting such work. ITEM DESCRIPTION 1. Mobilization 2. Site Demolition 3. Clearing and Grubbing 4. Debris Removal 5. Earthwork 6. Erosion Control 7. Storm Sewer 8. Water Service 9. Sanitary Sewer Service ESTIMATED UNIT QUANTITY LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 EA 10 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 LS 1 FP -1 UNIT EXTENDED PRICE AMOUNT $ W,Crno $ sc'�,coo $ 70 tC00 $ Zgpoc) $ (L -tt000 $ (q(ooc) $ a e�o $ $ 7oc.),coo $ tcx), me> $ $ `1Cok000 $ 4q4 ow $ 'i-ck, oc5 0 $ Lto, too o $ t-t.l' xoo $ $ 41�koc-b BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ `Aq;}% Dco ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 1. Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ '�7,C)Sg $50801 ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 2. Bio- retention Cell LS 1 $ O c'00 $ k\0% 00C-1,, N ESTIMATED UNIT EXTENDED ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY PRICE AMOUNT 10. Electrical Service LS 1 $ G,000 $ i ' -d 11. 7" Depth PCC Pavement SY 8,550 $ °7,-1- $ " &moo 12. 6" Depth PCC Pavement SF 16,750 $ 05020 $ 00 13. Limestone Retaining Wall LS 1 $ 17ye-J00 $ (Zlcw�) 14. Marina Building LS 1 $ $ 15. Open Shelter LS 1 $ %ccorj $ S-'dtooc) 16. Plantings LS 1 $ Lo i60C) $ 10,cXpo 17. Seeding LS 1 $ CO coo $ (A Low BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ `Aq;}% Dco ADD ALTERNATE NO. 1 1. Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ '�7,C)Sg $50801 ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 2. Bio- retention Cell LS 1 $ O c'00 $ k\0% 00C-1,, N O O m c lG a W r FP -2 The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: rmC„ke- - &epC'b,caoo S4ee1 Sunector"�b�oo 11111 :111 IF �• # @e &rti.ck\ 0� (Mer:1— — %M`j,l try NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. Firm: —fAft/ 65�)ft-4L 02*JS3- AU0T LW Signature: �7Z2 Printed Name: Rod Uc t+(vu Title: 6V'Jl /i/z Address: OU6UQ,t -f -6 Phone: 54.03 •699- cl SQL Contact: RoA) at('�{'AP-on N 0 rn C-3 c b. zv � o W FP -3 m Bond No. 08975939 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Tricon General Construction, Inc. (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and of MAryland as Fidelity and Deposit Company (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of One Million, One Hundred Ninety -Two Thousand. Eighty -Nine and 00/100 Dollars ($1,192,089.00) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of 0 ece Haber ga 20 1() , entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates Inc. of Cedar Rapids Iowa, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed -upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond N shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory complan of the Project. r° n , c A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made byae v Owner. ^, B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default undek�he Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Suretylp -y promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient Im i funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and /or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of One (_Ij years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance o{.ke 0 Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa re 0 a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. M SIGNED AND SEALED THIS 19th DAY OF November 20 10 W IN THE PRESENCE OF: Tricon General Construction, Inc. S!r ) ROO '1C~ e9a)NM-_ Witness (Title) Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland (Surety) Witness /ITT�f�� Thomas 0. CATftrs, Attorney -in -Fact 2626 49th Drive (Street) Franksville, WI (City, State, Zip) 262- 835 -9576 m (Phone) �i <<I Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the Slate of Maryland, by DAVID S. HEWETT, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said ny, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in fill force and effect on the d. ereby nominate, constitute and appoint Thomas O. CHAMBERS and Todd SCHAAP e, sin, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal t o a y, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and t ° h b d gs in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon sand Co y� a 1 P ts�and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged b qt . I cued u early at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. Thall re } ° ehalf of Thomas O. CHAMBERS, Todd SCHAAP, dated March 5, 2008.�uu�� The said Assistant ° 4lerehy certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2, of the By- s said Company, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice - President and Assistant Secretary Have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 24th day of February, A.D. 2010. ATTEST: 1-0 0 111 a � W Own\A State of Maryland i ss: City of Baltimore J FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND Gregory E. Murray Assistant Secretary l By: David S. Hewett Vice President On this 24th day of February, A.D. 2010, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly connnissioned and qualified, came DAVID S. HEWETT, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known In he the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and sailh, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Scal the day and year first above written. POA -F 184 -0010 0 Maria D.Adamski aotai)'T.i�blic My Commission Expires: Jul3:Z 2011 c CD Z ke W F POA -F 184 -0010 STATE OF WISCONSIN ) COUNTY OF KENOSHA ON THIS 19th day of November, 2010, before me, a notary public, within and for said County and State, personally appeared Thomas O. Chambers to me personally known, who being duly sworn, upon oath did say that he is the Attorney -in -Fact of and for the Fidelity And Deposit Company Of Maryland, a corporation of MD, created, organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of MD; that the corporate seal affixed to the foregoing within instrument is the seal of the said Company; that the seal was affixed and the said instrument was executed by authority of its Board of Directors; and the said Thomas O. Chambers did acknowledge that he executed the said instrument as the free act and deed of said Company. m Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356 -5149 RESOLUTION NO. 12 -125 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA— PHASE 2 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT 4d(2) WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 2 Improvements Project, as included In a contract between the City of Iowa City and Tricon General Construction, Inc. of Dubuque, IA, dated December 8, 2010, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Engineer's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area account #4152; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $1,291,637.75. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 3rd day of ATTEST: CIT CLERK 20 12 Ac!SCI A MAYOR Approved by 4,ry ji, . City Attorney's Office . It was moved by nobync and seconded by Mims the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: x Champion x Dickens x Dobyns Hayek Mims x Payne x Throgmorton Pweng/ res /acptwork- twebloodrecarea.doc 3112